Keysight 4072A/4073A Installation Guide Edition 6
9018-80154 Installation Guide
Agilent 4072A Advanced Parametric Tester Agilent 4073A Ultra Advanced Parametric Tester
Edition 6
Agilent Part Number: E3102-90520 April 2002
Printed in Japan © Agilent Technologies, Inc. 1999-2002
Product Warranty
Agilent Technologies warrants Agilent Technologies hardware, accessories and supplies against defects in materials and workmanship for the period of one year from the warranty start date specified below. If Agilent Technologies receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, Agilent Technologies will, at its option, either repair or replace products which prove to be defective. Replacement products may be either new or like-new.
Warranty service of this product will be performed at Buyer's facility at no charge within Agilent Technologies service travel areas. Outside Agilent Technologies service travel areas, warranty service will be performed at Buyer's facility only upon Agilent Technologies' prior agreement and Buyer shall pay Agilent Technologies' round trip travel expenses. In all other cases, products must be returned to a service facility designated by Agilent Technologies.
For products returned to Agilent Technologies for warranty service, Buyer shall prepay shipping charges to Agilent Technologies and Agilent Technologies shall pay shipping charges to return the product to Buyer. However, Buyer shall pay all shipping charges, duties, and taxes for products returned to Agilent Technologies from another country.
Agilent Technologies warrants that Agilent Technologies software will not fail to execute its programming instructions, for the period of one year from the warranty start date specified below, due to defects in material and workmanship when properly installed and used. If Agilent Technologies receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, Agilent Technologies will replace software media which does not execute its programming instructions due to such defects.
Agilent Technologies does not warrant that the operation of Agilent Technologies products will be uninterrupted or error free. If Agilent Technologies is unable, within a reasonable time, to repair or replace any product to a condition as warranted, customer will be entitled to a refund of the purchase price upon prompt return of the product.
The Agilent Technologies products may contain remanufactured parts equivalent to new in performance or may have been subject to incidental use.
The warranty period begins on the date of delivery or on the date of installation if installed by Agilent Technologies. If customer schedules or delays Agilent Technologies installation more than 30 days after delivery, warranty begins on the 31st day from delivery.
Warranty does not apply to defects resulting from (a) improper or inadequate maintenance or calibration, (b) software, interfacing, parts or supplies not supplied by Agilent Technologies, (c) unauthorized modification or misuse, (d) operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the product, or (e) improper site preparation or maintenance.
To the extent allowed by local law, the above warranties are exclusive and no other warranty or condition, whether written or oral, is expressed or implied and Agilent Technologies specifically disclaims any implied warranties or conditions of merchantability, satisfactory quality, and fitness for a particular purpose.
Agilent Technologies will be liable for damage to tangible property per incident up to the greater of $300,000 or the actual amount paid for the product that is the subject of the claim, and for damages for bodily injury or death, to the extent that all such damages are determined by a court of competent jurisdiction to have been directly caused by a defective Agilent Technologies product.
To the extent allowed by local law, the remedies in this warranty statement are customer's sole and exclusive remedies. Except as indicated above, in no event will Agilent Technologies or its suppliers be liable for loss of data or for direct, special, incidental, consequential (including lost profit or data), or other damage, whether based in contract, tort, or otherwise.
For consumer transactions in Australia and New Zealand: the warranty terms contained in this statement, except to the extent lawfully permitted, do not exclude, restrict or modify and are in addition to the mandatory statutory
2
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
rights applicable to the sale of this product to you. For any assistance, contact your nearest Agilent Technologies Sales Office.
Assistance
Product maintenance agreements and other customer assistance agreements are available for Agilent Technologies products.
Certification
Agilent Technologies certifies that this product met its published specifications at the time of shipment [from the factory]. Agilent Technologies further certifies that its calibration measurements are traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST), to the extent allowed by the Institute's calibration facility, and to the calibration facilities of other International Standards Organization members.
© Agilent Technologies, Inc. 1999-2002 3
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Printing History
New editions are complete revisions of the manual. Update packages, which are issued between editions, contain additional and replacement pages to be merged into the manual by the customer. The dates on the title page change only when a new edition is published. No information is incorporated into a reprinting unless it appears as a prior update; the edition does not change when an update is incorporated.
The software revision code printed before the date indicates the version level of the software product at the time the manual or update was issued. Many product updates and fixes do not require manual changes and, conversely, manual corrections may be done without accompanying product changes. Therefore, do not expect a one to one correspondence between product updates and manual updates.
Edition 1
For Agilent 4070 System Software Revision B.02.00, June 1999
Edition 2
For Agilent 4070 System Software Revision B.02.10, June 2000
Edition 3
For Agilent 4070 System Software Revision B.03.00, September 2000
Edition 4
For Agilent 4070 System Software Revision B.03.00, March 2001
Edition 5
For Agilent 4070 System Software Revision C.03.01, September 2001
Edition 6
For Agilent 4070 System Software Revision C.03.01, April 2002
4 Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Safety Summary
The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation, service, and repair of this instrument. Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific warnings elsewhere in this manual may impair the protections provided by the equipment. In addition, it violates safety standards of design, manufacture, and intended use of the instrument. Agilent Technologies, Inc. assumes no liability for customer's failure to comply with these requirements.
NOTE
Agilent 4072A/4073A complies with INSTALLATION CATEGORY II for main input and INSTALLATION CATEGORY I for measurement input terminals, and POLLUTION DEGREE 2 defined in IEC 1010-1.
The 4072A/4073A is INDOOR USE product. The 4072A/4073A is CLASS 1 LASER product based on IEC 825-1 for optical wave:
AEL power is less than 0.2 mW. Wavelength is 650 nm of continuous wave.
GROUND THE INSTRUMENT
To minimize shock hazard, the instrument chassis and cabinet must be connected to an electrical ground. The power terminal and the power cable must meet International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) safety standards.
DO NOT OPERATE IN AN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE
Do not operate the instrument in the presence of flammable gases or fumes. Operation of any electrical instrument in such an environment constitutes a definite safety hazard.
KEEP AWAY FROM LIVE CIRCUITS
Operation personnel must not remove instrument covers. Component replacement and internal adjustments must be made by qualified maintenance personnel. Do not replace components with power cable connected. Under certain conditions, dangerous voltages may exist even with the power cable removed. To avoid injuries, always disconnect power and discharge circuits before touching them.
DO NOT SERVICE OR ADJUST ALONE
Do not attempt internal service or adjustment unless another person, capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation, is present.
DO NOT SUBSTITUTE PARTS OR MODIFY INSTRUMENT
Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards, do not install substitute parts or perform any unauthorized modification to the instrument. Return the instrument to a Agilent Technologies Sales and Service Office for services and repair to ensure that safety features are maintained.
DANGEROUS PROCEDURE WARNINGS
Warnings, such as in the example below, precede potentially dangerous procedures throughout this manual. Instructions contained in the warnings must be followed.
WARNING Dangerous voltages, capable of causing death, are present in this instrument. Use extreme caution when handling, testing, and adjusting.
5 Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Safety Symbols
The general definitions of safety symbols used on equipment or in manuals are listed below.
Instruction manual symbol: the product will be marked with this symbol when it is necessary for the user to refer to the instruction manual in order to protect against damage to the instrument.
Indicates dangerous voltage and potential for electrical shock. Do not touch terminals that have this symbol when instrument is on.
Protective conductor terminal.
It is intended for connection to an external protective conductor for protection against electric shock in case of a fault or the terminal of a protective earth electrode.
Frame or chassis terminal. A connection to the frame (chassis) of the equipment which normally includes all exposed metal structures.
Alternating current.
Direct current.
Electrical shock.
CAT1 WARNING CAUTION NOTE
ON (Supply).
OFF (Supply).
Means INSTALLATION CATEGORY I. Measurement terminals on the testheads comply with INSTALLATION CATEGORY I.
The warning sign denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure, practice, condition or the like, which, if not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in injury or death to personnel.
The caution sign denotes a hazard. It calls attention to an operating procedure, practice, condition or the like, which, if not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in damage to or destruction of part or all of the product.
The note sign denotes important information. It calls attention to a procedure, practice, condition or the like, which is essential to highlight.
Electrical Work Types
The definitions of electrical work types are as follows.
Work Type 3 Work Type 4
Energized circuits are exposed and inadvertent contact with uninsulated energized parts is possible. Potential exposure does not exceed 30 Vrms, 42.4 Vpeak, 60 Vdc, and 240 VA.
Energized circuits are exposed and inadvertent contact with uninsulated energized parts is possible. Potential exposure can exceed 30 Vrms, 42.4 Vpeak, 60 Vdc, 240 VA, or hazardous RF current.
6 Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
In This Manual
Purpose
CAUTION The information in this manual is provided for use by trained service personnel only. To avoid electrical shock, do not perform any procedures in this manual unless qualified to do so.
This manual contains installation information for the Agilent 4072A and 4073A tester. For information about site preparations that the customer must perform, see the Pre-Installation Guide. For information about service information used to repair the 4072A/4073A, refer to the Service Guide. For information regarding calibrating the 4072A/4073A, refer to the System Calibration Guide.
Audience
This manual is intended for Agilent customer engineers who perform the 4072A/4073A tester installation or service personal who maintain the 4072A/4073A.
Contents
This manual provides procedures and information necessary to install and verify the 4072A/4073A tester. Chapter 1 , "General Information," describes what to do before installation, equipment required to install the 4072A/4073A, and the installation sequence. Chapter 2 , "Installing System Cabinet," describes how to install the system cabinet. Chapter 3 , "Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals," describes how to mount the system controller, peripherals, Agilent 4284A, Agilent 3458A, Agilent 81110A, Agilent 8110A, and Agilent 8114A into the system cabinet. Chapter 4 , "Connecting Testhead to the Cabinet," describes how to install the testhead. Chapter 5 , "Setting Up Agilent E3172A/AJ/B and Agilent E3173A," describes how to set up the Agilent E3172A/AJ/B and E3173A system controller. Chapter 6 , "Installing Software (for C.03.01)," describes how to install and customize the system software. This chapter also provides installation information for the GPIB interface cards and the optical interface card. Chapter 7 , "Verifying Tester Operation," describes how to confirm the 4072A/4073A configuration and operation. Appendix A , "Agilent E3171A/AJ, E3172A/AJ/B, and E3173A Factory Settings," describes software revisions, customization, and other settings for the E3171A/AJ, E3172A/AJ/B, or E3173A system controller. Appendix B , "Miscellaneous Operations," provides information that may be used after the initial installation. Appendix C , "Installing Software (for B.03.01 or Earlier)," describes how to install and customize the system software. This chapter also provides installation information for the GPIB interface cards and the optical interface card. Appendix D , "Error Messages," describes the error messages that may be returned when an error occurs during the 4072A/4073A operation.
7 Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Other Manuals
The following manuals are available for servicing the 4072A/4073A. Agilent 4072A/4073A Service Guide (Agilent part number E3102-90500) Agilent 4072A/4073A System Calibration Guide (Agilent part number E3102-90510) Agilent 4072A/4073A Pre-Installation Guide (Agilent publication number 5968-4911E)
For information on user operation and programming of the 4072A/4073A, see the following manuals. Agilent 4070 User's Guide (Agilent part number E3102-90000) Agilent 4070 Programming Guide for BASIC Users (Agilent part number E3102-90010) Agilent 4070 Programming Reference for BASIC Users (Agilent part number E3102-90110) Agilent 4070 Programming Guide for C Users (Agilent part number E3102-90020) Agilent 4070 Programming Reference for C Users (Agilent part number E3102-90120) Agilent 4070 Maintenance Guide (Agilent part number E3102-90200)
8 Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Contents
1. General Information Before Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Requirements for Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Installation Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Serial Number Prefixes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2. Installing System Cabinet To Unpack and Move Agilent 4072A/4073A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 To Connect PDU to Site Power Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Power Source Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Connecting Main Power Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 To Confirm PDU and EMO Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Performing PDU and EMO Operation Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 To check PDU that is E3160-60265, E3160-60266, E3160-60267, or E3160-60268. . . . . . 41 To check PDU that is E3160-60065, E3160-60066, E3160-60067, or E3160-60068. . . . . . 45 Power Outlet and Power Cord Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
3. Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals Rack Mount Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Cabinet Configuration 1 (with Monitor Rack Mount). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Cabinet Configuration 2 (without E4411B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Cabinet Configuration 3 (with E4411B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Without System Controller Rack Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 With System Controller Rack Mount. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Contents of Rack Mount Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Rack Mount Kit for Agilent 4284A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Rack Mount Kit for Agilent 3458A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Rack Mount Kit for Pulse Generator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 First Pulse Generator Integration Kit (Agilent E3153A option 001). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Rack Mount Kit for Agilent 8110A (Agilent E3153A option 002) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Rack Mount Kit for Agilent 81110A (Agilent E3153A option 003) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Rack Mount Kit for Agilent 8114A (Agilent E3153A option 004) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Upgrade Kit for Agilent 81110A Rack Mount Kit (Agilent E3153A option 100) . . . . . . . . 68 Upgrade Kit for Agilent 81110A and C3600 controller Rack Mount Kit (Agilent E3153A option 101) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Rack Mount Kits for 17-inch Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Rack Mount Kits for Flat Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Rack Mount Kit for System Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Rack Mount Kit for CD-ROM Drive (For JP10G-) and DDS Drive (For JP30G-, JP20H-) . . 76 Rack Mount Accessories for Agilent E4411B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 To Mount System Instruments (Agilent 4284A/Agilent 3458A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 To Mount Pulse Generator (Agilent 8110A/81110A/8114A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 To Install First Pulse Generator Integration Kit (E3153A option 001) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 To Mount Agilent 8110A and Agilent 8114A (E3153A option 002/004). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 To Install Upgrade Kit for Agilent 81110A Rack Mount Kit (E3153A option 100). . . . . . . . . 85
9
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Contents
To Install Upgrade Kit for Agilent 81110A Rack Mount Kit (E3153A option 101). . . . . . . . . .88 To Mount Agilent 81110A (E3153A option 003). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94 GPIB Address and Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 Connecting Power Cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 To Mount 17-inch Color Monitor and Keyboard Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 Removing Front Panel and Support Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 Removing Front Door and Setting Up the Rack Mount Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 Installing 17-Inch Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Installing Keyboard Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 Setting Up Keyboard and Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 To Mount Flat Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 Installing Rack mount kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 To Mount System Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 To Install E3156A/B Rack Mount Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 To Install E3156C Rack Mount Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 To Mount CD-ROM Drive (For JP10G-). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 To Mount DDS Drive (For JP30G-, JP20H-). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 To Mount Spectrum Analyzer (Agilent E4411B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
4. Connecting Testhead to the Cabinet Required Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 To Connect Air Duct, Optical Fiber Cables, and Ground Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 To Connect Testhead Power Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 To Connect CMU (Agilent 4284A) Test Leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 To Connect DVM (Agilent 3458A) Test Leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 To Connect Pulse Generator (Agilent 8110A/81110A/8114A) Test Leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 To Connect Trigger Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 To Connect Signal Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 To Connect Agilent E4411B Spectrum Analyzer Test Leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 To Check the Testhead Power Supply and Instrument Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
5. Setting Up Agilent E3172A/AJ/B and Agilent E3173A To Set Up Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 To Check System Controller and Peripheral Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 To Set Up Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
6. Installing Software (for C.03.01) Software Installation Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 System Software Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144 Before Software Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 Installing HP-UX and Other Application Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Minimum and Recommended Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Compatible OS revisions and application software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Installing HP-UX 11i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
10 Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Contents
Installing C/ANSI C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Installing Patches for HP-UX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Installing 4070/SPECS Software Configuration Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Installing SICL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Installing BASIC/UX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Installing 4070 System Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Customizing for Agilent 4072A/4073A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Step 1. Customizing HP-UX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Executing config.hpux Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Customizing the Common Desktop Environment (CDE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Step 2. Configuring SICL and Installing GPIB Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Executing the iosetup Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Step 3. Customizing BASIC/UX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Step 4. Customizing for Japanese Environment (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Step 5. Customizing 4070 System Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Customizing rmbrc File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Executing install Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Installing Optical Interface Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Editing /etc/opt/hp4070/config/1 File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Editing /etc/opt/hp4070/config/PCONFIG File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Editing /etc/opt/hp4070/config/pgconnection File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Executing /opt/hp4070/install/configure Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Customizing for Pulse Generator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Installing E4411B Control Software (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Loading E4411B Control Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Customizing E4411B Control Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Verifying E4411B Control Software Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Further Customization Required for Agilent SPECS Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Creating New User Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
7. Verifying Tester Operation To Turn On Agilent 4072A/4073A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 To Confirm Agilent 4072A/4073A Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 To Confirm the Agilent 4072A/4073A Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Confirmation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Displaying and Printing the Test Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
A. Agilent E3171A/AJ, E3172A/AJ/B, and E3173A Factory Settings Software Revision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Installed Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Customizing HP-UX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Basic Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Logical Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Drivers and Kernel Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
11
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Contents
Common Desktop Environment (CDE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216 Installing Driver and Customizing SICL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Installing Drivers (for E3171A/AJ Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217 Customizing SICL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217 Customizing BASIC/UX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218 The /etc/dt/config/Xsession.d/0000.rmb File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218 The /usr/lib/X11/app-defaults/Rmb File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218 The /etc/X11/rgb.txt File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218 The /etc/opt/rmb/rmb8_03rc File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219 The /etc/dt/config/Xsession.d/9000.kanji File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219 Customizing 4070 System Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220 The /etc/opt/rmb/rmb8_04rc and /etc/opt/rmb/rmb8_03rc File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220 The /etc/rc.config.d/hp4070 File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220 The /opt/hp4070/install/install Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
The /etc/opt/hp4070/config/1 File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221 The /opt/hp4070/install/configure Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221 Sample User Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222 The hp4070 User Environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222 The specs User Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222 The hpsrvc User Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
B. Miscellaneous Operations To Mount Testhead on Wafer Prober . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 Fully Automatic Wafer Prober . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 Manual and Semi-Automatic Wafer Prober . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 Connecting Chuck Connection Output Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 To Connect External Instrument Interlock Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 To Change Line Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228 To Change Line Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229 To Update Testhead Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230 To Back Up and Recover System Software Using Ignite-UX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 Backing Up System Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 Recovering System Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
C. Installing Software (for B.03.01 or Earlier) Software Installation Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237 System Software Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238 Before Software Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241 Installing HP-UX and Other Application Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 Minimum and Recommended Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 Compatible OS revisions and application software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243 Installing HP-UX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244 Installing Patches and Software Configuration Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244 Installing SICL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244 Installing HP BASIC/UX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
12
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Contents
Installing the 4070 System Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Customizing for Agilent 4072A/4073A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Step 1. Customizing HP-UX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Executing config.hpux Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Customizing Common Desktop Environment (CDE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Step 2. Configuring SICL and Installing GPIB Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Executing the iosetup Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Installing Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Step 3. Customizing HP BASIC/UX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Step 4. Customizing for Japanese Environment (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Step 5. Customizing 4070 System Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Executing install Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Installing Optical Interface Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Editing /etc/opt/hp4070/config/1 File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Editing /etc/opt/hp4070/config/PCONFIG File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Editing /etc/opt/hp4070/config/pgconnection File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Executing /opt/hp4070/install/configure Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Customizing for Pulse Generator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
D. Error Messages 1-xxxxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 2-xxxxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 3-xxxxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 4-xxxxxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 5-xxxxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 6-xxxxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 7-xxxxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 8-xxxxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 42-xxxxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
13 Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Contents
14 Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Figures
Figure 1-1 . Agilent 4072A/4073A Tester Installation Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Figure 2-1 . PDU Locations and Power Cable Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Figure 2-2 . PDU Panel of the main switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Figure 2-3 . PDU and EMO Circuit Diagram (200 V option). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Figure 2-4 . PDU and EMO Circuit Diagram (208 V option). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Figure 2-5 . PDU and EMO Circuit Diagram (220/240 V option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Figure 2-6 . Power Outlet Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Figure 2-7 . Component Locations for PDU and EMO Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Figure 2-8 . Fan protector switch for E3160-60065, E3160-60066, E3160-60067, and E3160-60068 . 40 Figure 2-9 . Positions of EMO, Cabinet Fan, and Testhead Fan Protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Figure 2-10 . GFCI Indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Figure 2-11 . Positions of EMO, Cabinet Fan, and Testhead Fan Protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Figure 2-12 . GFCI Indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Figure 3-1 . Rack Mount Positions in the System Cabinet (No Pulse Generator Installed) . . . . . . . . . . 55 Figure 3-2 . Rack Mount Positions (Agilent 8110A/8114A + 745i or 745/132L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Figure 3-3 . Rack Mount Positions (Agilent 81110A/8114A + 745i or 745/132L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Figure 3-4 . Rack Mount Positions (Agilent 81110A/8114A + C3600/C3700 without DDS drive) . . . 59 Figure 3-5 . Rack Mount Positions (Agilent 81110A/8114A + C3600/C3700 with DDS drive) . . . . . . 59 Figure 3-6 . Rack Mount Positions (E4411B + 81110A/8114A without System Controller) . . . . . . . . 60 Figure 3-7 . Rack Mount Positions (E4411B + 81110A/8114A with System Controller) . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Figure 3-8 . Rack Mount Positions (E4411B + 81110A/8114A with C3600/C3700 + DDS) . . . . . . . . 62 Figure 3-9 . Attaching Rack Flanges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Figure 3-10 . PGU rack mount kit Installation Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Figure 3-11 . Attaching the Trigger Distributor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Figure 3-12 . Attaching the Rack Flanges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Figure 3-13 . Installing Pulse Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Figure 3-14 . E3153A option 101 Upgrade Kit Installation Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Figure 3-15 . Attaching Rack Flanges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Figure 3-16 . Installing Agilent 81110A Pulse Generator (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Figure 3-17 . Installing Agilent 81110A (Front View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Figure 3-18 . Installing Agilent 81110A (Rear View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Figure 3-19 . GPIB Cable Connection (Agilent 8110A and Agilent 8114A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Figure 3-20 . GPIB Cable Connection (Agilent 81110A and Agilent 8114A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Figure 3-21 . Connecting Positions of the Power Cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Figure 3-22 . System Cabinet Part Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Figure 3-23 . Installing 17-inch Color Monitor and Keyboard Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Figure 3-24 . Flange for 745/132L (E3160-01219). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Figure 3-25 . Installing CD-ROM Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Figure 3-26 . Installing DDS Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Figure 3-27 . Installing DDS Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Figure 3-28 . Installing Rear Panel for DDS Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Figure 4-1 . Part Locations for the Testhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Figure 4-2 . System Cabinet Part Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Figure 4-3 . Testhead Power Cable Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Figure 4-4 . Connecting Agilent 4284A to Testhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
15
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Figures
Figure 4-5 . Connecting Agilent 3458A to Testhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Figure 4-6 . Trigger Distributor Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Figure 4-7 . Pulse Generator Configuration (with no Agilent 8114A). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Figure 4-8 . Pulse Generator Configuration (with one Agilent 8114A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Figure 4-9 . Pulse Generator Configuration (with two Agilent 8114As) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Figure 4-10 . Connecting PG Cables (For 8110A and 8114A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Figure 4-11 . Connecting PG Cables (For Agilent 81110A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Figure 4-12 . Connecting Signal Cables to Testhead Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Figure 4-13 . Connecting Agilent E4411B to Testhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Figure 6-1 . 4070 Software Installation Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Figure 6-2 . System Software Directory Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Figure 6-3 . SD Install and Specify Source Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Figure 6-4 . Note Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Figure 6-5 . SD Install Window for Adding New Codeword. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Figure 6-6 . Codeword Entry Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Figure 6-7 . SD Install Window with Install Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Figure 6-8 . Install Analysis Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Figure 6-9 . Install Window for Loading Filesets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Figure 6-10 . Install Window for Loading Completed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Figure 6-11 . SD Install and Specify Source Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Figure 6-12 . SD Install Window with Install Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Figure 6-13 . Confirmation Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Figure 6-14 . Install Analysis Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Figure 6-15 . SD Install and Specify Source Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Figure 6-16 . SD Install Window with Configuration Tool Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Figure 6-17 . SD Install Window with Install Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Figure 6-18 . Install Analysis Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Figure 6-19 . Install Window for Loading Completed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Figure 6-20 . SD Install and Specify Source Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Figure 6-21 . SD Install Window with Install Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Figure 6-22 . Install Analysis Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Figure 6-23 . Install Window for Loading Completed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Figure 6-24 . SD Install and Specify Source Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Figure 6-25 . SD Install Window with Install Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Figure 6-26 . Install Analysis Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Figure 6-27 . Install Window for Loading Completed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Figure 6-28 . SD Install and Specify Source Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Figure 6-29 . SD Install Window with 4070 System Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Figure 6-30 . SD Install Window with Install Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Figure 6-31 . Install Analysis Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Figure 6-32 . Install Window for Loading Completed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Figure 6-33 . Confirmation Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Figure 6-34 . SD Install and Specify Source Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Figure 6-35 . SD Install Window with 4070 System Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Figure 6-36 . SD Install Window with Install Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
16
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Figures
Figure 6-37 . Install Analysis Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Figure 6-38 . Install Window for Loading Completed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Figure 6-39 . Agilent 4072A/4073A Customization Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Figure 6-40 . I/O Setup for HP-UX Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Figure 6-41 . Agilent E2078 High Speed HP-IB Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Figure 6-42 . I/O Setup for HP-UX Window with File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Figure 6-43 . Accept Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Figure 6-44 . Build Kernel Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Figure 6-45 . Removing Front Panel and Side Cover (C3600/C3700) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Figure 6-46 . Optical Interface Card Installation (C3600/C3700) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Figure 6-47 . The /etc/opt/hp4070/config/1 File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Figure 6-48 . The /etc/opt/hp4070/config/PCONFIG File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Figure 6-49 . The /etc/opt/hp4070/config/pgconnection File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Figure 6-50 . SD Install and Specify Source Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Figure 6-51 . SD Install Window with 4070 System Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Figure 6-52 . SD Install Window with Install Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Figure 6-53 . Confirmation Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Figure 6-54 . Install Analysis Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Figure 6-55 . Install Window for Loading Completed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Figure 6-56 . System Administration Manager (SAM) Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Figure 6-57 . Accounts for Users and Group Screen of SAM Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Figure 6-58 . Accounts for Users and Group Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Figure 6-59 . Add a User Account Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Figure 6-60 . Set User Password Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Figure 6-61 . Note Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Figure 7-1 . Component Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Figure 7-2 . Tester Management Panel with hp4070 Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Figure 7-3 . Tester Management Panel Login Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Figure 7-4 . Diagnostics Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Figure 7-5 . Quick Formatter Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Figure B-1 . Chuck Connection Output Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Figure B-2 . Intlk Connector Connection Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Figure B-3 . Tester Management Panel with hp4070 Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Figure B-4 . Testhead Firmware Revision on Tester Management Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Figure C-1 . 4070 Software Installation Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Figure C-2 . System Software Directory Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Figure C-3 . Agilent 4072A/4073A Customization Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Figure C-4 . I/O Setup for HP-UX Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Figure C-5 . Agilent E2078 High Speed HP-IB Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Figure C-6 . Agilent E2071D High Speed HP-IB Configuration Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Figure C-7 . Agilent E2071 High Speed HP-IB Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Figure C-8 . I/O Setup for HP-UX Window with File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Figure C-9 . Accept Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Figure C-10 . Build Kernel Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Figure C-11 . System Administration Manager (SAM) Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
17
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Figures
Figure C-12 . Kernel Configuration Screen for SAM Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Figure C-13 . Kernel Configuration Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Figure C-14 . Removing Driver from Kernel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Figure C-15 . Creating New Kernel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Figure C-16 . Confirmation Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Figure C-17 . Reboot the System Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Figure C-18 . Note Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Figure C-19 . System Administration Manager (SAM) Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Figure C-20 . Kernel Configuration Screen of SAM Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Figure C-21 . Kernel Configuration Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Figure C-22 . Adding Driver to Kernel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Figure C-23 . Confirmation Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Figure C-24 . Confirmation Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Figure C-25 . Creating New Kernel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Figure C-26 . Confirmation Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Figure C-27 . Reboot the System Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Figure C-28 . Note Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Figure C-29 . I/O Setup for HP-UX Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Figure C-30 . Accept Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Figure C-31 . Success Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Figure C-32 . Build Kernel Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Figure C-33 . Optical Interface Card Component Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Figure C-34 . Optical Interface Card Setup Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Figure C-35 . Removing Front Panel and Top Cover (745/132L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Figure C-36 . Optical Interface Card Installation (745/132L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Figure C-37 . Optical Interface Card Installation (745i) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
18 Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Tables
Table 1-1. Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Table 1-2. Serial Number Prefixes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Table 2-1. Agilent 4072A/4073A Line Voltage Option and Power Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Table 2-2. Maximum Current of Power Outlets (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Table 2-3. Maximum Current of Power Outlets (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Table 2-4. Power Cords for Instruments, Controller, TH PS, and Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Table 3-1. Maximum Number of Installed Pulse Generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Table 3-2. Configuration vs. Required Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Table 3-3. Maximum Number of Installed Pulse Generators (with E4411B + 8110A/81110A/8114A without System Controller) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Table 3-4. Maximum Number of Installed Pulse Generators (with E4411B + 8110A/81110A/8114A with System Controller) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Table 3-5. Contents of Rack Mount Kit for Agilent 4284A (Agilent E3151A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Table 3-6. Contents of Rack Mount Kit for Agilent 3458A (Agilent E3152A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Table 3-7. Contents of Pulse Generator Integration Kit (Agilent E3153A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Table 3-8. Contents of first Pulse Generator Integration Kit (Agilent E3153A option 001) . . . . . . . . . 65 Table 3-9. Contents of Rack Mount Kit for Agilent 8110A (Agilent E3153A option 002) . . . . . . . . . . 66 Table 3-10. Contents of Rack Mount Kit for Agilent 81110A (Agilent E3153A option 003) . . . . . . . . 66 Table 3-11. Contents of Rack Mount Kit for Agilent 8114A (Agilent E3153A option 004) . . . . . . . . . 67 Table 3-12. Contents of Upgrade Kit for Agilent 81110A Rack Mount Kit (Agilent E3153A option 100) 68 Table 3-13. Contents of Upgrade Kit for Agilent 81110A Rack Mount Kit (Agilent E3153A option 101) 69 Table 3-14. Contents of Rack Mount Kit for HP A2287A (Agilent E3155A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Table 3-15. Contents of Rack Mount Kit for HP A4330A (Agilent E3155B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Table 3-16. Contents of Rack Mount Kit for HP A4490A (Agilent E3155C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Table 3-17. Contents of Rack Mount Kit for HP D2838W (Agilent E3155D). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Table 3-18. Contents of Rack Mount Kit for HP D8900A (Agilent E3155E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Table 3-19. Rack Mount Accessories for HP D8906A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Table 3-20. Contents of Rack Mount Kit for Flat Panel Display (Agilent E3155F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Table 3-21. Contents of Rack Mount Kit for 745i Controller (Agilent E3156A). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Table 3-22. Contents of Rack Mount Kit for 745/132L Controller (Agilent E3156B). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Table 3-23. Contents of Rack Mount Kit for C3600/C3700 Controller (Agilent E3156C) . . . . . . . . . . 75 Table 3-24. Rack Mount Accessories for HP C2944D, HP C2948A, or HP C4310A (Agilent E3157A) . 76 Table 3-25. Rack Mount Accessories for HP C6364A (Agilent E3157B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Table 3-26. Contents of Rack Mount Accessories for Agilent E4411B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Table 3-27. GPIB Address of Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Table 3-28. GPIB Interface Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Table 3-29. GPIB Address of Pulse Generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Table 4-1. Parts for Connecting Testhead to the System Cabinet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Table 4-2. Trigger Distributor Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Table 4-3. Pulse Generator Channel Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Table 4-4. Default Setting of PG Cable Connections (with no Agilent 8114A). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Table 4-5. Default Setting for PG Cable Connections (with one Agilent 8114A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
19
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Tables
Table 4-6. Default Setting for PG Cable Connections (with two Agilent 8114As) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Table 4-7. LEDs for the Testhead Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 Table 6-1. Hardware requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Table 6-2. Software Revision for C3700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Table 6-3. Software Revision for C3600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Table 6-4. Example of parameter for PCI GPIB card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178 Table 6-5. Example of parameter for 2nd PCI GPIB card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178 Table A-1. Software Revision for Agilent E3171A/AJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213 Table A-2. Software Revision for Agilent E3172A/AJ/B Option 102. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213 Table A-3. Software Revision for Agilent E3172A/AJ/B Option 110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213 Table A-4. Software Revision for Agilent E3173A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213 Table A-5. Logical Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215 Table A-6. Drivers and Kernel Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216 Table A-7. GPIB Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217 Table A-8. hp4070 Action Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222 Table A-9. hpsrvc Action Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222 Table B-1. Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228 Table C-1. Hardware requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 Table C-2. Software Revision for 745/132L and 745i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243 Table C-3. Software Revision for C3600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243 Table C-4. Example of parameter for PCI GPIB card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249 Table C-5. Example of parameter for 2nd PCI GPIB card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
20 Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
1 General Information
21 Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
General Information
This manual provides procedures and information necessary to install and verify the Agilent 4072A/4073A parametric tester.
This chapter provides an overview of the preparation, requirements, and installation sequence. It consists of the following sections:
· "Before Installation"
· "Requirements for Installation"
· "Installation Sequence"
· "Serial Number Prefixes"
Chapter 2 provides the system cabinet installation procedure. Chapter 3 provides procedures for mounting the system controller, peripherals, Agilent 4284A precision LCR meter, Agilent 3458A digital multimeter, Agilent 81110A pulse generator, Agilent 8110A pulse generator, Agilent 8114A pulse generator, and Agilent E4411B spectrum analyzer into the system cabinet. Chapter 4 provides procedures for connecting the system cabinet and the testhead. Chapter 5 and chapter 6 provide software installation procedures. Chapter 5 describes how to set up the Agilent E3172A/AJ/B and E3173A system controller. Chapter 6 describes how to install and customize HP-UX, BASIC/UX, SICL, and the Agilent 4070 system software. Chapter 7 provides instructions for verifying proper tester operation.
NOTE
The software installation process depends on which system controller is being used. Before installation, identify which system controller is being used. If using the E3172A/AJ/B or E3173A system controller, see chapter 5. If a system controller other than E3172A/AJ/B or E3173A is being used, see chapter 6.
To check which system controller is being used, find the label on the rear panel of the system controller. If the E3171A/AJ, E3172A/AJ/B, or E3173A is used, the label will read "Agilent E3171A(or AJ)", "Agilent E3172A(, AJ, or B)", or "Agilent E3173A".
Appendix A provide the information on software revisions, customization, and other settings for the E3171A/AJ, E3172A/AJ/B, or E3173A. Appendix B provides information that you may use after installation is completed. Appendix C describes how to install and customize HP-UX, BASIC/UX, SICL, and the Agilent 4070 system software for the Agilent 4070 software revision B.03.01 or earlier. Appendix D describes the error messages that may be returned when an error occurs during 4072A/4073A operation.
22
Chapter 1
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
General Information Before Installation
Before Installation
Before installing the 4072A/4073A, the following procedures must be performed, as described in the Agilent 4072A/4073A Pre-Installation Guide. · Site Preparation:
Before the 4072A/4073A arrives at the installation site, an Agilent customer engineer must call the customer or visit the site, and make sure that the site preparation has been performed as described in the Agilent 4072A/4073A Pre-Installation Guide. · Unpacking: After receiving the 4072A/4073A, the following must be done by the customer. 1. Unpack the system cabinet. 2. Move the 4072A/4073A to the installation location. For more information, see the Agilent 4072A/4073A Pre-Installation Guide.
Chapter 1
23
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
General Information Requirements for Installation
Requirements for Installation
The following is required for installing the 4072A/4073A: · cross slot screwdrivers (pozidrive or phillips screwdrivers) · cross slot screwdriver (ISO No.1; The shaft must be longer than 25 cm.) · flat-blade screwdriver · nut driver (H8) · spanner (H8) · hex L screwdrivers (H3 and H5) · Torx® screwdriver (T-25) · wire strippers · 3/8-inch wrench · 5/16-inch wrench · slip-joint pliers · hand-held multimeter · tape measure · Agilent 4072A/4073A Pre-Installation Guide · Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide · Agilent 4072A/4073A Service Guide
24
Chapter 1
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
General Information Installation Sequence
Installation Sequence
Figure 1-1 shows the installation sequence and the chapter numbers that describe the related installation steps in detail. Install the 4072A/4073A according to the following installation sequence. For further details, refer to the appropriate chapter.
Figure 1-1 Agilent 4072A/4073A Tester Installation Sequence
Start
Install system cabinet
(Chapter 2)
Are rackmount kits
ordered?
No
Connect testhead to system
cabinet (Chapter 4)
Rack-mount instruments,
system controller,
Yes
and peripherals
(Chapter 3)
Is system controller Agilent E3172A/AJ?
Is software revision
No
C.03.01 or later?
No
Install software (Appendix C)
Yes
Set up Agilent E3172A/AJ
(Chapter 5)
Yes
Install software (Chapter 6)
Verify tester operation (Chapter 7)
End
Chapter 1
25
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
General Information Serial Number Prefixes
Serial Number Prefixes
Agilent Technologies uses a two-part serial number which is stamped on the serial number plate attached to the product. The first five letters and digits are the serial number prefix and the last five digits are the suffix. The first two letters indicate the country where the product was manufactured. The prefix changes when a significant change is made to the product. The suffix is assigned sequentially and is unique to each product.
Some sections, paragraphs, tables, and figures in this manual have the serial number prefix information as follows:
Table 1-1 Abbreviations
Abbreviations JP10GJP20GJP30GJP10H-
JP20H-
JP10FJP20FJP10J-
Description
Agilent E3102A (4072A) with a serial number prefix of JP10G Agilent E3102A (4072A) with a serial number prefix of JP20G Agilent E3102A (4072A) with a serial number prefix of JP30G Agilent E3103A (4073A) with a serial number prefix of JP10H or Agilent E3172A/AJ (C3600) with a serial number prefix of JP10H Agilent E3103A (4073A) with a serial number prefix of JP20H or Agilent E3172A/AJ (C3600) with a serial number prefix of JP20H Agilent E3171A/AJ (745/132L) with a serial number prefix of JP10F Agilent E3171A/AJ (745/132L) with a seiral number prefix of JP20F Agilent E3172B (C3600) with a serial number prefix of JP10J- or Agilent E3173A (C3700) with a serial number prefix of JP10J-
The following shows the changes of each serial number prefix. Table 1-2 Serial Number Prefixes
Agilent Product No. Serial No. Prefix
Changes
E3102A (4072A)
JP10G JP20G JP30G
Initial release (No shelter plate) 81110A supporta · Agilent E3172A (C3600 workstation) supportb
E3103A (4073A)
JP10H JP20H
· PDU modification (power outlet protector and fan protectors) Initial releasea · Agilent E3172A (C3600 workstation) supportb
E3171A/AJ (745/132L)
E3172A/AJ (C3600) E3172B (C3600) E3173A (C3700)
JP10F JP20F JP10H JP20H JP10J JP10J
· PDU modification (power outlet protector and fan protectors) Initial release PCI bus support Initial release FDD deletetion Initial release Initial release
a. The system cabinet includes the E3153A option 100. b. The system cabinet includes the E3153A option 101.
26
Chapter 1
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
2 Installing System Cabinet
27 Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing System Cabinet
This chapter provides information for installing the system cabinet. This part of the installation process consists of the following main steps: 1. unpacking and moving the Agilent 4072A/4073A to its final location 2. connecting the power distribution unit (PDU) to the site power line 3. confirming operation of the PDU and emergency off (EMO) circuit This chapter describes these main steps: · "To Unpack and Move Agilent 4072A/4073A" · "To Connect PDU to Site Power Line" · "To Confirm PDU and EMO Operation" · "Power Outlet and Power Cord Specifications"
28
Chapter 2
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing System Cabinet To Unpack and Move Agilent 4072A/4073A
To Unpack and Move Agilent 4072A/4073A
To unpack the 4072A/4073A, see the Agilent 4072A/4073A Pre-Installation Guide.
The system cabinet and its accessories (vinyl cover intact) must be moved close to the installation location, such as the entrance of the clean room. The system cabinet is equipped with casters to allow movement of the cabinet to its final location.
WARNING
When moving the system cabinet on its casters, do not allow the casters to become caught on cables or debris, or in cracks in the floor. The cabinet has a high center of gravity, and momentum caused by pushing or pulling can cause the cabinet to tip over, resulting in serious injury to personnel and damage to the equipment.
System cabinet
Cables, debris, or cracks
Chapter 2
29
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing System Cabinet To Unpack and Move Agilent 4072A/4073A
CAUTION Fully raise the leveling feet when the cabinet is moved. If not, the leveling feet may be damaged. Confirm the leveling position before moving the system cabinet.
Leveling foot
WARNING
After the system cabinet is moved to its final location and before performing any other installation steps, stabilize the cabinet by lowering the leveling feet until they are in contact with the floor. Failure to observe this warning can result in serious injury to personnel and damage to the equipment.
Leveling foot
30
Chapter 2
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing System Cabinet To Connect PDU to Site Power Line
To Connect PDU to Site Power Line
The power distribution unit (PDU) is the primary unit for controlling and distributing ac power. The PDU must be connected to the correct power line (source) using the main power cable. This section describes the power requirements for the PDU and how to make this connection.
CAUTION
Before connecting the main power cable to the site power line, check if the correct line voltage is applied to the site power line using a hand-held multimeter.
If you are going to connect the main power cable to the site power line directly, check with the site power line administrator first.
Power Source Requirements
The power source requirements for the installation site depend on the Agilent E3102A/E3103A line voltage option selected.
Table 2-1 shows the applicable line voltage, maximum input current of the PDU, and allowable diameters for the main power cable for each line voltage option. Table 2-1 Agilent 4072A/4073A Line Voltage Option and Power Cable
Option No.
Applicable Line Voltage
Agilent Part No. of PDU
Maximum Current
Allowable Diameter of Main Power Cable
(in mm)
E3102A/E3103A option 200a
200 Vac
E3160-60265b E3160-60065c
20 A
16.5 to 18.5
E3102A/E3103A option 208a
208 Vac
E3160-60266b E3160-60066c
24 A
16.5 to 18.5
E3102A/E3103A option 220d
220 Vac
E3160-60267b E3160-60067c
20 A
6.5 to 10.0
E3102A/E3103A option 240d
240 Vac
E3160-60268b E3160-60068c
20 A
6.5 to 10.0
a. A 4-meter main power cable is furnished with the 4072A/4073A. The cable has a 30 A rating with a NEMA L6-30P plug.
b. If the serial number of the 4072A/4073A is JP30G- or JP20H-, these PDUs are included. c. These PDUs are the old type, which has a different to that of the new type. For details, refer to the
section "To Confirm PDU and EMO Operation" on page 34. d. The customer needs to prepare a main power cable and plug that satisfy the local installation code
safety requirements, and that provide a means for earth grounding. For Japan, the customer needs to prepare a main power cable and plug that satisfy the Electrical Appliance and Material Control Law. The power cable must have a 20 A rating.
Chapter 2
31
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing System Cabinet To Connect PDU to Site Power Line
Connecting Main Power Cable
WARNING
Main power cable installation must be performed by trained service personnel only. Incorrect installation will result in serious injury to operating personnel and damage to the equipment.
Connect the ground wire for the main power cable to the earth ground terminal at the installation site.
NOTE
Before starting the following procedure, prepare a main power cable that satisfies the requirements shown in table 2-1. Then, the PDU side of the main power cable must be prepared as follows:
1. Cut the wires of the main power as shown in the following figure. 2. Attach a ring terminal to the ground wire of the main power cable.
üõü õü
ø÷÷
ïCüõüôüð
32
Chapter 2
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing System Cabinet To Connect PDU to Site Power Line
Use the following procedure to connect the power distribution unit (PDU) to the power line (source) at the installation site.
1. Set the breaker for the switch board to OFF. 2. Open the rear door of the system cabinet with the key provided. 3. Set the main switch, main breaker and emergency breaker to OFF. 4. Remove the two screws at the left of the main switch, and remove the main switch. 5. Remove the PDU side panel. 6. Loosen the cable clamp. 7. Pass the main power cable through the cable clamp opening. 8. Connect the wires to the main switch as shown in figure 2-1. 9. Fasten the cable clamp securely. 10. Reinstall the PDU side panel (removed in step 5). 11. Reinstall the main switch (removed in step 4). 12. Connect the main power cable to the power line (source) at the installation site. 13. Connect the ground wire of the rear door to the ground point at the installation site.
Figure 2-1 PDU Locations and Power Cable Connection
Inside of rear door
Instrument power outlets
DVM and CMU power outlets (200/208 V option)
Controller power outlets
Power distribution unit (PDU)
Power distribution unit (PDU)
Main switch (rear)
Screw
~LINE
Main switch ON position OFF position
Inside
Line (black) Neutral (white)
Ground (green and yellow)
Fan protector
Fan Protector
Emergency
breaker
Emergency Breaker
Error
Cabinet Fan
EMO
Emergency
Error
Protector Interface TH Fan
UPS Cntrl
TH PS
Over Voltage System SW
EMO protector
Emergency
interface
terminal
~LINE
NL
Cabinet fan error LED
Testhead fan error LED
Screw
Over voltage LED
System switch
531 L5 L3 L1
N
PE
N
L6 L4 L2 642
Main switch (rear)
Main breaker
Main power cable
To site power line
Testhead power Testhead fan Cable clamp supply (TH PS) assembly (attached on the cover)
Chapter 2
33
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing System Cabinet To Confirm PDU and EMO Operation
To Confirm PDU and EMO Operation
Electrical Work Type 3:
WARNING 24 V is forced to the uninsulated parts of the EMO rear panel. Do not touch these parts. After connecting the power distribution unit (PDU) to the power line (source) at the installation site, you must confirm the operation of the PDU and emergency off (EMO) circuit, as described in this section. The EMO circuit places the 4072A/4073A in a safe shutdown condition when the circuit is activated. This circuit is activated automatically when certain conditions occur or when you manually press the EMO button, which is the large red button at the top front of the system cabinet. There are two type of PDU. Before you confirm the operation of the PDU, check the part number. The part number is displayed on the panel of the main switch. Figure 2-2 PDU Panel of the main switch
Part number
Figure 2-3 through figure 2-5 are overall circuit diagrams of the PDU and EMO circuits for 200 V, 208 V, and 220/240 V options.
34
Chapter 2
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing System Cabinet To Confirm PDU and EMO Operation
Figure 2-3 PDU and EMO Circuit Diagram (200 V option)
E3160-60265
LINE NEUTRAL
EARTH
Main switch
Main breaker
G
Main contactor M
C
NO
Emergency breaker
Relay7
Trans. AC 24V
OVT Detect
EMO protector
Relay1
EMO Detect
Relay4
Power outlet protector
Trans.
for opt. 200V
Power outlet protector
Power outlet protector
Fan protector
Relay8
Instrument power outlets
200 V
DVM and CMU power outlets
220 V
Controller power outlets
220 V
200 V
EMO panel EMO SW LINE
INSTRUMENT POWER
OFF SW
ON SW
(White)
(Green)
+5V
(Green)
Ext.cntrl System SW
Ext.alarm 1:[NC] Ext.alarm 2:[NO]
Relay6 Relay3
Relay5
Relay2
+5V
Fan speed sensor
+ Fan speed sensor
TH PS Testhead fan Cabinet fan (3ea)
E3160-60065
LINE NEUTRAL
EARTH
Main switch
Main breaker
G
Main contactor M
C
NO
Emergency breaker
Relay7
Trans. AC 24V
OVT Detect
EMO protector
Relay1
EMO Detect
Relay4
Power outlet protector
Trans.
for opt. 200V
Power outlet protector
Power outlet protector
Relay8
Instrument power outlets
200 V
DVM and CMU power outlets
220 V
Controller power outlets
220 V
200 V
EMO panel EMO SW LINE
INSTRUMENT POWER
OFF SW
ON SW
(White)
(Green)
+5V
(Green)
Ext.cntrl System SW
Ext.alarm 1:[NC] Ext.alarm 2:[NO]
Relay6 Relay3
Relay2
Relay5
+5V
Fan speed sensor
+ Fan speed sensor
TH PS
Testhead fan protector
Testhead fan Cabinet protector
Cabinet fan (3ea)
Chapter 2
35
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing System Cabinet To Confirm PDU and EMO Operation
Figure 2-4 PDU and EMO Circuit Diagram (208 V option)
E3160-60266
LINE NEUTRAL
EARTH
Main switch
Main breaker
G
Main contactor M
Trans.
for opt. 208V
Power outlet protector
Power outlet protector
Power outlet protector
Instrument power outlets
208 V
DVM and CMU power outlets
220 V
Controller power outlets
220 V
Emergency breaker
C
NO
Relay7
Trans.
AC 24V
OVT Detect
EMO protector
Relay1
EMO Detect
Relay4
Fan protector
Relay8
200 V
EMO panel
EMO SW LINE
INSTRUMENT POWER
OFF SW
ON SW
(White)
(Green)
+5V
(Green)
Ext.cntrl System SW
Ext.alarm 1:[NC] Ext.alarm 2:[NO]
Relay6 Relay3
Relay2
Relay5
+5V
E3160-60066
LINE NEUTRAL
EARTH
Main switch
Main breaker
Main contactor M
G
C
NO
Emergency breaker
Relay7
Trans.
AC 24V
OVT Detect
EMO protector
Relay1
EMO Detect
Relay4
Fan speed sensor
+ Fan speed sensor
TH PS Testhead fan Cabinet fan (3ea)
Power outlet protector
Trans.
for opt. 208V
Power outlet protector
Power outlet protector
Relay8
Instrument power outlets
208 V
DVM and CMU power outlets
220 V
Controller power outlets
220 V
200 V
EMO panel
EMO SW LINE
INSTRUMENT POWER
OFF SW
ON SW
(White)
(Green)
+5V
(Green)
Ext.cntrl System SW
Ext.alarm 1:[NC] Ext.alarm 2:[NO]
Relay6 Relay3
Relay2
Relay5
+5V
Fan speed sensor
+ Fan speed sensor
TH PS
Testhead fan protector Testhead fan
Cabinet protector Cabinet fan (3ea)
36
Chapter 2
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing System Cabinet To Confirm PDU and EMO Operation
Figure 2-5 PDU and EMO Circuit Diagram (220/240 V option)
E3160-60267 (220V) / E3160-60268 (240V)
LINE NEUTRAL
EARTH
Main switch
Main breaker
Main contactor
M Trans.
for opt. 220/240V
G
Power outlet protector
Power outlet protector
Instrument power outlets
220/240 V
Controller power outlets
220/240 V
Emergency breaker
C
NO
Relay7
Trans.
AC 24V
OVT Detect
EMO protector
Relay1
EMO Detect
Relay4
Fan protector
Relay8
200 V
EMO panel
EMO SW
LINE
INSTRUMENT POWER
OFF SW
ON SW
(White)
(Green)
+5V
(Green)
Ext.cntrl System SW
Ext.alarm 1:[NC] Ext.alarm 2:[NO]
Relay6 Relay3
Relay2
Relay5
+5V
E3160-60067 (220V) / E3160-60068 (240V)
LINE NEUTRAL
EARTH
Main switch
Main breaker
Main contactor
M
G
Emergency breaker
C
NO
Relay7
Trans.
AC 24V
OVT Detect
EMO protector
Relay1
EMO Detect
Relay4
Fan speed sensor
+ Fan speed sensor
TH PS Testhead fan Cabinet fan (3ea)
Trans.
for opt. 220/240V
Power outlet protector
Power outlet protector
Relay8
Instrument power outlets
220/240 V
Controller power outlets
220/240 V
200 V
EMO panel
EMO SW LINE
INSTRUMENT POWER
OFF SW
ON SW
(White)
(Green)
+5V
(Green)
Ext.cntrl System SW
Ext.alarm 1:[NC] Ext.alarm 2:[NO]
Relay6 Relay3
Relay2
Relay5
+5V
Fan speed sensor
+ Fan speed sensor
TH PS
Testhead fan protector Testhead fan
Cabinet protector Cabinet fan (3ea)
Chapter 2
37
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing System Cabinet To Confirm PDU and EMO Operation
The procedures in this section confirm the operation of the following: · ground-fault circuit interrupter (for option 200 only) · main breaker · emergency breaker · main switch · system switch · LINE indicator · INSTRUMENT POWER ON/OFF switches · controller power outlets · instrument power outlets · DVM and CMU power outlets (for option 200 and 208 only)
EMO button · ext alarm 1 and 2 terminals · ext control terminals · EMO protector · fan protector · power outlet protector For the location of the components shown in this procedure, see figure 2-6 and figure 2-7. Figure 2-6 Power Outlet Locations
Instrument power outlets
DVM and CMU power outlets (200/208 V option)
Controller power outlets
Power distribution unit (PDU)
38
Chapter 2
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing System Cabinet To Confirm PDU and EMO Operation
Figure 2-7
Component Locations for PDU and EMO Check
Front door side
Rear door side
Top Emergency off (EMO) panel
EMO
EMO button
INSTRUMENT POWER ON/OFF switch
LINE indicator
Bottom
Testhead power supply (TH PS) (TH PS Secondary Unit front panel)
LED (Power) (Caution) (Error)
8 12 10 16 20 To testhead
INTLK connector
10
Main switch ON position OFF position
Right
~LINE
Power distribution unit (PDU)
Right (middle)
Right (top)
Controller DVM and CMU Instrument
power outlets
power outlets (200/208 V option) power outlets
Fan protector-1 Emergency breaker
6
2
4
EMO protector Emergency interface terminal
Main breaker
Bottom
Fan Protector
Fan protector-2
Emergency Breaker
Error Cabinet
Fan
EMO Protector
Error
Emergency Interface TH Fan
UPS Cntrl
TH PS
Over Voltage System SW
~LINE
Cabinet fan error LED
Testhead fan error LED Over voltage LED System switch
3 3 3 3
3
5
Main power cable
Power line at installation site
power outlet protector
Directly connected by connectors on each unit
Front
TH PS secondary unit
Rear
TH PS primary unit
Rear door Power cable
Testhead fan assembly Cabinet fan assembly
Chapter 2
39
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing System Cabinet To Confirm PDU and EMO Operation
If the part number of PDU is E3160-60065, E3160-60066, E3160-60067, or E3160-60068, the fan protector switches are separated by function for the TH fan and the cabinet fan like figure 2-8. Figure 2-8 Fan protector switch for E3160-60065, E3160-60066, E3160-60067, and E3160-60068
40
Chapter 2
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Performing PDU and EMO Operation Check
Installing System Cabinet To Confirm PDU and EMO Operation
NOTE
When all steps of the following procedure are completed, the PDU is ready for use.
If you have any problems performing this operation check, see the Agilent 4072A/4073A Service Guide to troubleshoot the PDU.
NOTE
The PDU has two type. Before you check the function of PDU and EMO operation, confirm the part number of PDU.
To check PDU that is E3160-60265, E3160-60266, E3160-60267, or E3160-60268.
1. Disconnect all power cords from the power outlets in the system cabinet, and turn off all the instruments, controller, and peripherals.
2. Set the following:
Switch board breaker
OFF position
Main breaker
OFF position
Emergency breaker
OFF position
Main switch
OFF position
EMO button
Normal ("Out") position
EMO protector
"In" position
Fan protector-1
"In" position
Fan protector-2
"In" position
Power outlet protector
"In" position
To set the EMO button on the EMO panel to the "Out" position, rotate the switch in a clockwise direction.
The position of the EMO, cabinet fan, and testhead fan protectors are exchanged by pressing the protector button.
Figure 2-9 Positions of EMO, Cabinet Fan, and Testhead Fan Protectors Yellow
Circuit protector "In" position
Circuit protector "Out" position
Chapter 2
41
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing System Cabinet To Confirm PDU and EMO Operation
3. For the E3102A/E3103A option 200 only, check the ground-fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) as follows:
a. Set the main breaker to the ON position. Confirm that the yellow push-button, labeled "GFCI Indicator", is in its normal position ("In" position).
b. Press the red push-button, labeled "Breaker Test Switch", to force earth leakage current. Confirm that the main breaker turns off (moved to middle position), and the GFCI indicator has moved to the "Out" position to indicate the earth leakage condition.
c. Set the main breaker to the ON position (reset the GFCI indicator) as follows:
i. Set the main breaker lever to the OFF position. The GFCI indicator moves to the "In" position. ii. Set the main breaker lever to the ON position.
Figure 2-10 GFCI Indicator
GFCI (yellow) "In" position
GFCI (yellow) "Out" position
Breaker test switch (red)
Main breaker "ON" position
Main breaker middle position
4. Check the main breaker, emergency breaker, main switch, LINE indicator, system switch, and controller power outlets as follows:
a. Set the power board breaker to the ON position. b. Set the main breaker to the ON position. c. Set the emergency breaker to the ON position. d. Set the main switch to the ON position. e. Confirm if the over voltage LED turns on. If so, check the source power line. f. Confirm that the LINE indicator on the EMO panel turns on. g. Press the system switch, and confirm that the green LED in the system switch turns on.
NOTE
Do steps d through g within 20 seconds. After 20 seconds, the cabinet fan error LED turns on. Set the main switch to the OFF position and repeat steps d through g.
h. Confirm that the proper voltage is applied to the controller power outlets, using a hand-held multimeter.
i. Confirm that no voltage is being applied to the instrument power outlets.
j. (For options 200 and 208 only) Confirm that no voltage is being applied to the DVM and CMU power outlets.
42
Chapter 2
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing System Cabinet To Confirm PDU and EMO Operation
5. Check the INSTRUMENT POWER ON/OFF switches, instrument power outlets, DVM and CMU power outlets, and power outlet protector as follows:
a. Press the INSTRUMENT POWER ON switch on the EMO panel. b. Confirm that the green LED in the INSTRUMENT POWER ON switch turns on. c. Confirm that the proper voltage is applied to the instrument power outlets using a hand-held multimeter. d. (For options 200 and 208 only) Confirm that the proper voltage is applied to the DVM and CMU power
outlets using a hand-held multimeter. e. Press the power outlet protector to set it to the "Out" position. See figure 2-9. f. Confirm that no voltage is applied to the instrument power outlets. g. (For options 200 and 208 only) Confirm that no voltage is applied to the DVM and CMU power outlets. h. Press the power outlet protector to set it to the "In" position. See figure 2-9. i. Press the INSTRUMENT POWER OFF switch on the EMO panel. j. Confirm that the green LED in the INSTRUMENT POWER ON switch turns off. k. Confirm that no voltage is applied to the instrument power outlets. l. (For options 200 and 208 only) Confirm that no voltage is applied to the DVM and CMU power outlets. m. Press the INSTRUMENT POWER ON switch. 6. Check the EMO button and ext alarm 1 and 2 terminals as follows:
a. Check the conductivity of the ext alarm 1 and 2 terminals on the PDU using a hand-held multimeter. The resistance between the ext alarm 1 terminals must be set at approximately 0 , and the resistance between the ext alarm 2 terminals must be set very high.
b. Press the EMO button. c. Confirm that the emergency breaker is set to the OFF position, and confirm that the LINE indicator and the
green LED in the INSTRUMENT POWER ON switch is turned off. d. Check the conductivity of the ext alarm 1 and 2 terminals in the emergency off condition. The resistance
between the ext alarm 1 terminals must be set very high, and the resistance between the ext alarm 2 terminals must be set at approximately 0 . e. Press the INSTRUMENT POWER ON switch, and confirm that the green LED in the INSTRUMENT POWER ON switch does not turn on. f. Rotate the EMO button in a clockwise direction to set it to the "Out" position (normal position). 7. Check the ext control terminals as follows:
a. Confirm that the LINE indicator is turned off. b. Remove the shorting bar connected between the ext control terminals. c. Confirm that you cannot set the emergency breaker to the ON position. d. Reinstall the shorting bar on the ext control terminals. e. Set the emergency breaker to the ON position, and confirm that the LINE indicator turns on. f. Press the system switch, and confirm that the green LED in the system switch turns on.
Chapter 2
43
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing System Cabinet To Confirm PDU and EMO Operation
NOTE
Do steps e through f within 20 seconds. After 20 seconds, the cabinet fan error LED turns on. Set the emergency breaker to the OFF position and repeat steps e through f.
g. Press the INSTRUMENT POWER ON switch, and confirm that the green LED in the INSTRUMENT POWER ON switch turns on.
8. Check the EMO protector as follows:
a. Press the EMO protector to set it to the "Out" position. See figure 2-9. b. Confirm that the emergency breaker is set to the OFF position, and also confirm that the LINE indicator and
the green LED in the INSTRUMENT POWER ON switch turn off. c. Press the EMO protector to set it to the "In" position. d. Set the emergency breaker to the ON position, and confirm that the LINE indicator turns on. e. Press the system switch, and confirm that the green LED in the system switch turns on.
NOTE
Do steps d through e within 20 seconds. After 20 seconds, the cabinet fan error LED turns on. Set the emergency breaker to the OFF position and repeat steps d through e.
f. Press the INSTRUMENT POWER ON switch, and confirm that the green LED in the INSTRUMENT POWER ON switch turns on.
9. Check the fan protector as follows:
a. Press the fan protector-1 to set it to the "Out" position. See figure 2-9.
b. Confirm the conditions of the following in a few minutes:
LINE indicator
On
Green LED
Off
in the INSTRUMETN POWER ON switch
Cabinet fan
Stopped
Cabinet fan error LED (red)
Lit
Testhead fan
Stopped
Testhead fan error LED (red)
Lit
c. Press the fan protector -1 to set it to the "In" position.
d. Set the emergency breaker to the OFF position, and wait at least 3 seconds; then set it to the ON position. Confirm that the LINE indicator turns on.
e. Press the system switch, and confirm that the green LED in the system switch turns on.
NOTE
Do steps d through e within 20 seconds. After 20 seconds, the cabinet fan error LED turns on. Repeat steps d through e.
f. Press the INSTRUMENT POWER ON switch, and confirm that the green LED in the INSTRUMENT POWER ON switch turns on.
g. Confirm that the cabinet fan and the testhead fan operate.
44
Chapter 2
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing System Cabinet To Confirm PDU and EMO Operation
h. Repeat steps a through g to check the fan protector -2 switch. 10. Set the main switch, emergency breaker, and main breaker to the OFF position.
To check PDU that is E3160-60065, E3160-60066, E3160-60067, or E3160-60068.
1. Disconnect all power cords from the power outlets in the system cabinet, and turn off all the instruments, controller, and peripherals.
2. Set the following:
Switch board breaker
OFF position
Main breaker
OFF position
Emergency breaker
OFF position
Main switch
OFF position
EMO button
Normal ("Out") position
EMO protector
"In" position
Cabinet fan protector
"In" position
Testhead fan protector
"In" position
Power outlet protector
"In" position
To set the EMO button on the EMO panel to the "Out" position, rotate the switch in a clockwise direction.
The position of the EMO, cabinet fan, and testhead fan protectors are exchanged by pressing the protector button.
Figure 2-11 Positions of EMO, Cabinet Fan, and Testhead Fan Protectors Yellow
Circuit protector "In" position
Circuit protector "Out" position
Chapter 2
45
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing System Cabinet To Confirm PDU and EMO Operation
3. For the E3102A/E3103A option 200 only, check the ground-fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) as follows:
a. Set the main breaker to the ON position. Confirm that the yellow push-button, labeled "GFCI Indicator", is in its normal position ("In" position).
b. Press the red push-button, labeled "Breaker Test Switch", to force earth leakage current. Confirm that the main breaker turns off (moved to middle position), and the GFCI indicator has moved to the "Out" position to indicate the earth leakage condition.
c. Set the main breaker to the ON position (reset the GFCI indicator) as follows:
i. Set the main breaker lever to the OFF position. The GFCI indicator moves to the "In" position. ii. Set the main breaker lever to the ON position.
Figure 2-12 GFCI Indicator
GFCI (yellow) "In" position
GFCI (yellow) "Out" position
Breaker test switch (red)
Main breaker "ON" position
Main breaker middle position
4. Check the main breaker, emergency breaker, main switch, LINE indicator, system switch, and controller power outlets as follows:
a. Set the power board breaker to the ON position. b. Set the main breaker to the ON position. c. Set the emergency breaker to the ON position. d. Set the main switch to the ON position. e. Confirm if the over voltage LED turns on. If so, check the source power line. f. Confirm that the LINE indicator on the EMO panel turns on. g. Press the system switch, and confirm that the green LED in the system switch turns on.
NOTE
Do steps d through g within 20 seconds. After 20 seconds, the cabinet fan error LED turns on. Set the main switch to the OFF position and repeat steps d through g.
h. Confirm that the proper voltage is applied to the controller power outlets, using a hand-held multimeter.
i. Confirm that no voltage is being applied to the instrument power outlets.
j. (For options 200 and 208 only) Confirm that no voltage is being applied to the DVM and CMU power outlets.
46
Chapter 2
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing System Cabinet To Confirm PDU and EMO Operation
5. Check the INSTRUMENT POWER ON/OFF switches, instrument power outlets, DVM and CMU power outlets, and power outlet protector as follows:
a. Press the INSTRUMENT POWER ON switch on the EMO panel. b. Confirm that the green LED in the INSTRUMENT POWER ON switch turns on. c. Confirm that the proper voltage is applied to the instrument power outlets using a hand-held multimeter. d. (For options 200 and 208 only) Confirm that the proper voltage is applied to the DVM and CMU power
outlets using a hand-held multimeter. e. Press the power outlet protector to set it to the "Out" position. See figure 2-9. f. Confirm that no voltage is applied to the instrument power outlets. g. (For options 200 and 208 only) Confirm that no voltage is applied to the DVM and CMU power outlets. h. Press the power outlet protector to set it to the "In" position. See figure 2-9. i. Press the INSTRUMENT POWER OFF switch on the EMO panel. j. Confirm that the green LED in the INSTRUMENT POWER ON switch turns off. k. Confirm that no voltage is applied to the instrument power outlets. l. (For options 200 and 208 only) Confirm that no voltage is applied to the DVM and CMU power outlets. m. Press the INSTRUMENT POWER ON switch. 6. Check the EMO button and ext alarm 1 and 2 terminals as follows:
a. Check the conductivity of the ext alarm 1 and 2 terminals on the PDU using a hand-held multimeter. The resistance between the ext alarm 1 terminals must be set at approximately 0 , and the resistance between the ext alarm 2 terminals must be set very high.
b. Press the EMO button. c. Confirm that the emergency breaker is set to the OFF position, and confirm that the LINE indicator and the
green LED in the INSTRUMENT POWER ON switch is turned off. d. Check the conductivity of the ext alarm 1 and 2 terminals in the emergency off condition. The resistance
between the ext alarm 1 terminals must be set very high, and the resistance between the ext alarm 2 terminals must be set at approximately 0 . e. Press the INSTRUMENT POWER ON switch, and confirm that the green LED in the INSTRUMENT POWER ON switch does not turn on. f. Rotate the EMO button in a clockwise direction to set it to the "Out" position (normal position). 7. Check the ext control terminals as follows:
a. Confirm that the LINE indicator is turned off. b. Remove the shorting bar connected between the ext control terminals. c. Confirm that you cannot set the emergency breaker to the ON position. d. Reinstall the shorting bar on the ext control terminals. e. Set the emergency breaker to the ON position, and confirm that the LINE indicator turns on. f. Press the system switch, and confirm that the green LED in the system switch turns on.
Chapter 2
47
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing System Cabinet To Confirm PDU and EMO Operation
NOTE
Do steps e through f within 20 seconds. After 20 seconds, the cabinet fan error LED turns on. Set the emergency breaker to the OFF position and repeat steps e through f.
g. Press the INSTRUMENT POWER ON switch, and confirm that the green LED in the INSTRUMENT POWER ON switch turns on.
8. Check the EMO protector as follows:
a. Press the EMO protector to set it to the "Out" position. See figure 2-9. b. Confirm that the emergency breaker is set to the OFF position, and also confirm that the LINE indicator and
the green LED in the INSTRUMENT POWER ON switch turn off. c. Press the EMO protector to set it to the "In" position. d. Set the emergency breaker to the ON position, and confirm that the LINE indicator turns on. e. Press the system switch, and confirm that the green LED in the system switch turns on.
NOTE
Do steps d through e within 20 seconds. After 20 seconds, the cabinet fan error LED turns on. Set the emergency breaker to the OFF position and repeat steps d through e.
f. Press the INSTRUMENT POWER ON switch, and confirm that the green LED in the INSTRUMENT POWER ON switch turns on.
9. Check the cabinet fan protector as follows:
a. Press the cabinet fan protector to set it to the "Out" position. See figure 2-11.
b. Confirm the conditions of the following in a few minutes:
LINE indicator
On
green LED
Off
in the INSTRUMETN POWER ON switch
cabinet fan
Stopped
cabinet fan error LED (red)
Lit
c. Press the cabinet fan protector to set it to the "In" position.
d. Set the emergency breaker to the OFF position, and wait at least 3 seconds; then set it to the ON position. Confirm that the LINE indicator turns on.
e. Press the system switch, and confirm that the green LED in the system switch turns on.
NOTE
Do steps d through e within 20 seconds. After 20 seconds, the cabinet fan error LED turns on. Repeat steps d through e.
f. Press the INSTRUMENT POWER ON switch, and confirm that the green LED in the INSTRUMENT POWER ON switch turns on.
48
Chapter 2
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing System Cabinet To Confirm PDU and EMO Operation
10. Check the testhead fan protector as follows:
a. Press the testhead fan protector to set it to the "Out" position. See figure 2-9.
b. Confirm the condition of the following:
testhead fan
Stopped
testhead fan error LED (red)
Lit
c. Press the testhead fan protector to set it to the "In" position.
d. Press the INSTRUMENT POWER OFF switch.
e. Press the INSTRUMENT POWER ON switch and confirm that the green LED in the INSTRUMENT POWER ON switch turns on.
f. Confirm that the testhead fan operates.
11. Set the main switch, emergency breaker, and main breaker to the OFF position.
Chapter 2
49
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing System Cabinet Power Outlet and Power Cord Specifications
Power Outlet and Power Cord Specifications
The 4072A/4073A has three types of power outlets:
· instrument power outlets (eight power outlets)
· controller power outlets (eight power outlets)
· (For options 200 and 208 only) DVM and CMU power outlets (four power outlets)
The power outlets are used to supply ac power to the instruments, controller, and peripherals installed in the system cabinet. The maximum current for the power outlets depends on the line voltage selection options (E3102A/E3103A options 200, 208, 220, and 240) as shown in table 2-2 and table 2-3.
Check the current consumption for instruments and peripherals installed in the system cabinet to make sure the maximum current for each outlet is sufficient. Also, check the total current consumed by all the instruments, controller, and peripherals connected to the power outlets. Total current must be less than the total current shown in table 2-2 and table 2-3. Table 2-2 Maximum Current of Power Outlets (1)
Option No.
E3102A/E3103A option 200 E3102A/E3103A option 208 E3102A/E3103A option 220 E3102A/E3103A option 240
Instrument Power Outlets
Total Current
8A 8A 8A 8A
Maximum Current for Each Outlet
6A 6A 6A 6A
Controller Power Outlets
Total Current
6A 6A 6A 6A
Maximum Current for Each Outlet
6A 6A 6A 6A
Table 2-3 Maximum Current of Power Outlets (2)
Option No.
DVM and CMU Power Outlets
Total Current Maximum Current for Each Outlet
E3102A/E3103A option 200
2A
2A
E3102A/E3103A option 208
2A
2A
E3102A/E3103A option 220
-
-
E3102A/E3103A option 240
-
-
50
Chapter 2
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing System Cabinet Power Outlet and Power Cord Specifications
CAUTION
Before you turn on the 4072A/4073A, make sure that the line voltage selector switch for each instrument is set correctly. See the Operation Manual for each instrument for instructions on how to set these switches.
Also, make sure that the power cords, for instruments, controller, and peripherals installed in the system cabinet, are completely connected to the power outlets.
The following table lists the power cords used to connect the instruments, controller, testhead power supply (TH PS), and peripherals to the system cabinet power outlets.
Table 2-4 Power Cords for Instruments, Controller, TH PS, and Peripherals
Line Voltage (in Vac) 200/208/220/240
Agilent Part Number 8120-1625
Type of Plug IEC 320 C14
NOTE
If you need to enable the emergency off capability of the 4072A/4073A for the system controller, connect the power cord for the controller to a controller power outlet.
Chapter 2
51
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing System Cabinet Power Outlet and Power Cord Specifications
52
Chapter 2
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
3 Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller,
and Peripherals
53 Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals
This chapter describes how to mount the system controller, 17-inch color monitor, flat panel display, CD-ROM drive, DDS drive, Agilent 3458A digital multimeter, Agilent 4284A precision LCR meter, Agilent 8110A, Agilent 81110A, and Agilent 8114A pulse generator, and Agilent E4411B spectrum analyzer into the system cabinet. This chapter contains the following sections: · "Rack Mount Kits" · "To Mount System Instruments (Agilent 4284A/Agilent 3458A)" · "To Mount Pulse Generator (Agilent 8110A/81110A/8114A)" · "To Mount 17-inch Color Monitor and Keyboard Shelf" · "To Mount Flat Panel Display" · "To Mount System Controller" · "To Mount CD-ROM Drive (For JP10G-)" · "To Mount DDS Drive (For JP30G-, JP20H-)" · "To Mount Spectrum Analyzer (Agilent E4411B)"
54
Chapter 3
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals Rack Mount Kits
Rack Mount Kits
This section describes three cabinet configurations as follows: · cabinet configuration 1 (with monitor rack mount) · cabinet configuration 2 (without the E4411B spectrum analyzer) · cabinet configuration 3 (with the E4411B spectrum analyzer) Figure 3-1 through figure 3-8 shows the front view of the system cabinet, and the position of the system controller, 17-inch color monitor, CD-ROM drive, DDS drive, the 3458A digital multimeter, and the 4284A precision LCR meter without the 8110A, 81110A, 8114A pulse generator, and the E4411B spectrum analyzer.
Cabinet Configuration 1 (with Monitor Rack Mount)
Figure 3-1 shows the position where the system controller, 17-inch color monitor, CD-ROM drive, DDS drive, the 3458A, 4284A are to be installed when the 17-inch monitor is mounted in the system cabinet.
NOTE
If the 17-inch color monitor is mounted in the system cabinet, the pulse generator and spectrum analyzer cannot be mounted in the system cabinet.
NOTE
The external CD-ROM drive cannot be mounted into the system cabinet of the 4072A (JP20G-) and 4073A (JP10H-) but can be mounted into the system cabinet of the 4072A (JP10G-).
NOTE
The external DDS drive only can be mounted into the system cabinet of the 4072A (JP30G-) and 4073A (JP20H-).
Figure 3-1 Rack Mount Positions in the System Cabinet (No Pulse Generator Installed)
Agilent E3155A,B,C, D,E,G
Agilent E3157A, B
Agilent E3156A, B, C
Agilent E3151A Agilent E3152A
17-inch monitor
Keyboard & mouse (on keyboard shelf) CD-ROM, DDS drive 745i, 745/132L, C3600, or C3700 controller (system controller)
Agilent 4284A precision LCR meter Agilent 3458A digital multimeter
Chapter 3
55
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals Rack Mount Kits
Cabinet Configuration 2 (without E4411B)
Figure 3-2 through figure 3-5 shows the position where the 8110A or 81110A and 8114A pulse generators are to be installed. Up to five 8110As or 81110As can be installed without the 8114A. Up to four 8110As or 81110As can be installed with one 8114A, and up to two 8110As or 81110As with two 8114As.
NOTE
You cannot install the 8110As and 81110As simultaneously into the same 4072A/4073A system cabinet.
If the E3102A/E3103A option 025 and 026 rack mount option, for the C3600/C3700 system controller and the DDS drive, are ordered, up to four 8110As or 81110As can be installed without the 8114A. For details about PGU configuration, refer to the Table 3-1.
Table 3-1 Maximum Number of Installed Pulse Generators
Number of Agilent 8114A
Number of Agilent 8110A or Agilent 81110A
(When 745/132L or C3600/C3700 is mounted.)
Number of Agilent 8110A or Agilent 81110A
(When C3600/C3700 with DDS drive is mounted.)
0
5
4
1
4
3
2
2
1
The 8110As, 81110A, or 8114As are installed in the upper part of the cabinet, and named PG 1, PG 2, PG 3, PG 4, and PG 5, starting from the bottom PG. With one 8114A, the 8114A is installed in the bottom position, and named PG 1. With two 8114As, the first 8114A is installed in the bottom position, and named PG 1, the second is installed in the top position, and named PG # (# is the largest number of the PGs). For example, when one 8110A or 81110A and two 8114As are installed, the first 8114A is PG 1, the 8110A or 81110A is PG 2, and the second 8114A is PG 3 from the bottom PG.
The 81110As are mounted opposite with the system cabinet for air cooling. You cannot install the 8110As and 81110As simultaneously into the same 4072A/4073A system cabinet. If the serial number of the 4072A/4073A prefixed with JP20G-, JP30G-, JP10H-, or JP20H-, the 81110A can be mounted into the system cabinet. If the serial number of the 4072A prefixed with JP10G-, the E3153A option 100 or 101 cabinet upgrade kit is needed to install the 81110A.
If the serial number of 4072A/4073A prefixed with JP30G- or JP20H-, the C3600/C3700 system controller can be mounted into the system cabinet. If the serial number of 4072A/4073A prefixed with JP10G-, JP20G-, or JP10H-, the E3153A option 101 cabinet upgrade kit and the E3156C rack mount kit are needed to install the C3600/C3700 system controller.
Table 3-2 shows the relations between the configuration and required options. Choose appropriate options by using this support matrix, and refer to the chapters corresponding to installing them.
56
Chapter 3
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals Rack Mount Kits
Table 3-2 Configuration vs. Required Options
Configuration
Required Options
Model Number/ Serial Number
Mounted System Controller
Installed Pulse Generator
E3153A PG Integration Kit 001a 002a 003a 004a 100b 101c
No PG
8114A only
745i
8110A only
745/132L 8110A and 8114A
81110A only
4072A/JP10G
81110A and 8114A No PG
8114A only
C3600
8110A only
C3700
8110A and 8114A
81110A only
81110A and 8114A
No PG
8114A only
745i
8110A only
745/132L 8110A and 8114A
81110A only
4072A/JP20G
81110A and 8114A
4073A/JP10H
No PG
8114A only
C3600
8110A only
C3700
8110A and 8114A
81110A only
81110A and 8114A
No PG
8114A only
745i
8110A only
745/132L 8110A and 8114A
81110A only
4072A/JP30G
81110A and 8114A
4073A/JP20H
No PG
8114A only
C3600
8110A only
C3700
8110A and 8114A
81110A only
81110A and 8114A
a. To install the option 001/002/003/004, See "To Mount Pulse Generator (Agilent 8110A/81110A/8114A)" on page 82.
b. To install the option 100, See "To Install Upgrade Kit for Agilent 81110A Rack Mount Kit (E3153A option 100)." on page 85.
c. To install the option 101, See "To Install Upgrade Kit for Agilent 81110A Rack Mount Kit (E3153A option 101)." on page 88.
Chapter 3
57
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals Rack Mount Kits
Figure 3-2
Rack Mount Positions (Agilent 8110A/8114A + 745i or 745/132L)
8110A pulse generator (Agilent E3153A #002)
PG1
745i or 745/132L system controller
8114A pulse generator (Agilent E3153A #004)
Figure 3-3
Rack Mount Positions (Agilent 81110A/8114A + 745i or 745/132L) 81110A
PG1
8114A
745i or 745/132L
58
Chapter 3
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals Rack Mount Kits
Figure 3-4
Rack Mount Positions (Agilent 81110A/8114A + C3600/C3700 without DDS drive)
81110A pulse generator
PG1
8114A pulse generator
C3600 or C3700 controller
Figure 3-5 Rack Mount Positions (Agilent 81110A/8114A + C3600/C3700 with DDS drive)
81110A pulse generator
PG1
8114A pulse generator DDS drive
C3600 or C3700 controller
Chapter 3
59
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals Rack Mount Kits
Cabinet Configuration 3 (with E4411B)
There are two configuration when installing the E4411B spectrum analyzer into the system cabinet as follows: · without the system controller rack mount · with the system controller rack mount In the each configuration, the number of pulse generator to be installed into the system cabinet is different.
Without System Controller Rack Mount Figure 3-6 shows the position where the E4411B spectrum analyzer and pulse generators are to be installed when the system controller is not mounted in the system cabinet. Table 3-3 shows the maximum number of installed pulse generators in the system cabinet.
NOTE
You cannot install the 8110As and 81110As simultaneously into the same 4072A/4073A system cabinet.
Table 3-3
Maximum Number of Installed Pulse Generators (with E4411B + 8110A/81110A/8114A without System Controller)
Number of Agilent 8114A
0 1 2
Number of Agilent 8110A or Agilent 81110A
5 4 2
Figure 3-6
Rack Mount Positions (E4411B + 81110A/8114A without System Controller)
8110A or 81110A
8114A E4411B
60
Chapter 3
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals Rack Mount Kits
With System Controller Rack Mount Figure 3-7 and figure 3-8 shows the position where the E4411B spectrum analyzer and pulse generators are to be installed when the system controller is rackmounted in the system cabinet. The Table 3-4 shows the maximum number of installed pulse generators in the system cabinet.
NOTE
You cannot install the 8110As and 81110As simultaneously into the same 4072A/4073A system cabinet.
If the E3102A/E3103A option 025 and 026 rack mount option, for the C3600/C3700 system controller and the DDS drive, are ordered, only one 8110A, 81110A, or 8114A can be installed in the system cabinet. For details about PGU configuration, refer to the Table 3-4.
Table 3-4
Maximum Number of Installed Pulse Generators (with E4411B + 8110A/81110A/8114A with System Controller)
Number of Agilent 8114A
0 1 2
Number of Agilent 8110A or Agilent 81110A (When 745i, 745/132L, or C3600/C3700
without DDS is mounted)
2
1
0
Number of Agilent 8110A or Agilent 81110A (When C3600/C3700 with DDS is
mounted)
1
0
--
Figure 3-7
Rack Mount Positions (E4411B + 81110A/8114A with System Controller)
E4411B
8110A or 81110A
8114A
System Controller (745i, 745/132L, C3600, C3700)
Chapter 3
61
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals Rack Mount Kits
Figure 3-8
Rack Mount Positions (E4411B + 81110A/8114A with C3600/C3700 + DDS)
E4411B
8110A or 81110A
8114A DDS drive
System Controller (C3600/C3700)
62
Chapter 3
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals Contents of Rack Mount Kit
Contents of Rack Mount Kit
Rack mount kits for mounting the system instruments, system controller, and peripherals into the system cabinet are shown below. For the contents of each rack mount kit, see table 3-5 through table 3-26. · Agilent E3151A rack mount kit for the Agilent 4284A LCR meter · Agilent E3152A rack mount kit for the Agilent 3458A multimeter · Agilent E3153A rack mount kit for the Agilent 8110A/81110A/8114A pulse generator · Agilent E3155A rack mount kit for the HP A2287A 17-inch monitor · Agilent E3155B rack mount kit for the HP A4330A 17-inch monitor · Agilent E3155C rack mount kit for the HP A4490A 17-inch monitor · Agilent E3155D rack mount kit for the HP D2838W 17-inch monitor · Agilent E3155E rack mount kit for the HP D8900A 17-inch monitor · Agilent E3155F rack mount kit for the flat panel display · rack mount accessories for the HP D8906A 17-inch monitor · Agilent E3156A rack mount kit for the 745i controller · Agilent E3156B rack mount kit for the 745/132L controller · Agilent E3156C rack mount kit for the C3600/C3700 controller · Agilent E3157A rack mount kit for the CD-ROM drive (For JP10G-) · Agilent E3157B rack mount kit for the DDS drive (For JP30G-, JP20H-) · rack mount accessories for the Agilent E4411B spectrum analyzer
Chapter 3
63
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals Contents of Rack Mount Kit
Rack Mount Kit for Agilent 4284A
Table 3-5 lists the accessories furnished with the E3151A rack mount kit. They are used to mount the 4284A into the system cabinet.
Table 3-5 Contents of Rack Mount Kit for Agilent 4284A (Agilent E3151A)
Description Screw M4×12 BNC-T (m-f-f) type adapter Agilent 16048E test leads Screw 10-32 Power cord, universal GPIB cable, 1 m Flange Support rail extension adaptera Support rail
a. This part is used for the 4071A (JP10D-).
Part Number Quantity
0515-1718
4
1250-2405C
3
16048-60002
1
2680-0278C
8
8120-1625
1
8120-3445
1
E3160-01215
2
E3160-01258
2
E3160-01261
2
Rack Mount Kit for Agilent 3458A
Table 3-6 lists the accessories furnished with the E3152A rack mount kit. They are used to mount the 3458A into the system cabinet.
Table 3-6 Contents of Rack Mount Kit for Agilent 3458A (Agilent E3152A)
Description Screw M4×12 Screw 10-32 Power cord, universal GPIB cable, 1 m Test leads (BNC-banana-plug cable) Flange Support rail extension adaptera Support rail
a. This part is used for the 4071A (JP10D-).
Part Number Quantity
0515-1718
4
2680-0278C
8
8120-1625
1
8120-3445
1
E3120-61683
1
E3160-01216
2
E3160-01258
2
E3160-01261
2
64
Chapter 3
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals Contents of Rack Mount Kit
Rack Mount Kit for Pulse Generator
Table 3-7 lists the contents of the E3153A pulse generator integration kit. The E3153A option 001 is used to install the first pulse generator. Option 002, 003, and 004 are used to mount the 8110A, 81110A, or 8114A into the system cabinet. Option 100 is used to upgrade the system cabinet to install the 81110A into the system cabinet. Option 101 is used to upgrade the system cabinet to install the 81110A and the C3600 system controller into the system cabinet.
Table 3-7 Contents of Pulse Generator Integration Kit (Agilent E3153A)
Product No. Option No.
Description
E3153A
001
first pulse generator integration kit
002
Rack mount kit for the 8110A
003
Rack mount kit for the 81110A
004
Rack mount kit for the 8114A
100
Upgrade kit for the 81110A rack mount kit
101
Upgrade kit for the 81110A with the C3600
First Pulse Generator Integration Kit (Agilent E3153A option 001)
Table 3-8 lists the accessories furnished with the integration kit for the first pulse generator. They are used to mount the first pulse generator into the system cabinet.
Table 3-8 Contents of first Pulse Generator Integration Kit (Agilent E3153A option 001)
Description
Part Number Quantity
BNC-triaxial adapter
1250-0595
2
Cable tie Zipper tube, 3m
1400-0493C
4
1400-2242
1
Screw 10-32
2680-0278C
5
GPIB cable, 2 m
8120-3446
1
zip lock sealing
8710-1576
1
1-to-2 adapter
E3125-61042
3
BNC cable for pulse switch Trigger distributor
E3125-61607
7
E3150-61021
1
BNC(f)-to-BNC(m) cable assembly, 115 cm, white
E3150-61602
2
Covera
E3160-04063
1
a. This part is installed on the top of the pulse generator which is the 8110A.
Chapter 3
65
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals Contents of Rack Mount Kit
Rack Mount Kit for Agilent 8110A (Agilent E3153A option 002)
Table 3-9 lists the accessories furnished with the rack mount kit for the 8110A. They are used to mount the 8110A into the system cabinet.
Table 3-9 Contents of Rack Mount Kit for Agilent 8110A (Agilent E3153A option 002)
Description
BNC(f)-to-BNC(m) cable assembly, 115 cm, yellow BNC(f)-to-BNC(m) cable assembly, 115 cm, blue Screw M4×12 Screw 10-32 Power cord GPIB cable, 50 cm PG cable, 4.6 m Label Flange Support rail
Part Number Quantity
04062-61604
1
04062-61608
1
0515-1718
4
2680-0278C
4
8120-1763
1
8120-3444
1
E3150-61601
2
E3150-89101
1
E3160-01251
2
E3160-01263
2
Rack Mount Kit for Agilent 81110A (Agilent E3153A option 003)
Table 3-10 lists the accessories furnished with the rack mount kit for the 81110A. They are used to mount the 81110A into the system cabinet.
Table 3-10 Contents of Rack Mount Kit for Agilent 81110A (Agilent E3153A option 003)
Description BNC(f)-to-BNC(m) cable assembly, 115 cm, yellow BNC(f)-to-BNC(m) cable assembly, 115 cm, blue Screw M4×12 Screw 10-32 Screw 10-32×.75 Power cord GPIB cable, 50 cm PG cable, 4.6 m Label Support rail Cover Flange, right Flange, left
Part Number Quantity
04062-61604
1
04062-61608
1
0515-1718
4
2680-0278C
8
2680-0320
4
8120-1763
1
8120-3444
1
E3150-61601
2
E3150-89101
1
E3160-01267
2
E3160-04102
1
E3160-60100
1
E3160-60101
1
66
Chapter 3
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals Contents of Rack Mount Kit
Rack Mount Kit for Agilent 8114A (Agilent E3153A option 004)
Table 3-11 lists the accessories furnished with the rack mount kit for the 8114A. They are used to mount the 8114A into the system cabinet.
Table 3-11 Contents of Rack Mount Kit for Agilent 8114A (Agilent E3153A option 004)
Description BNC(f)-to-BNC(m) cable assembly, 115 cm, yellow BNC(f)-to-BNC(m) cable assembly, 115 cm, blue Feed through, 50 Screw M4×12 Nut 10-32 Screw 10-32 Power cord GPIB cable, 1 m Transition time converter PG cable, 4.6 m BNC cable for transition time converter, 50 cm Label Support rail Flange, right Flange, left
Part Number Quantity
04062-61604
1
04062-61608
1
04192-61002
1
0515-1718
6
0590-0804
8
2680-0278C
10
8120-1763
1
8120-3445
1
E3150-61022
1
E3150-61601
1
E3150-61603
1
E3150-89101
1
E3160-01263
2
E3160-01298
1
E3160-01299
1
Chapter 3
67
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals Contents of Rack Mount Kit
Upgrade Kit for Agilent 81110A Rack Mount Kit (Agilent E3153A option 100)
Table 3-12 lists the accessories furnished with the upgrade kit for the 81110A rack mount kit. They are used to upgrade the system cabinet for mounting the first 81110A into the system cabinet.
Table 3-12 Contents of Upgrade Kit for Agilent 81110A Rack Mount Kit (Agilent E3153A option 100)
Description
Part Number Quantity
Screw M4 L8 Nut M5×0.8 Nut 10-32
0515-1012
4
0535-0081
8
0590-0804
14
Screw 10-32 Screw 10-32×.75
2680-0278C
41
2680-0320
4
Chassis for mounting shelter plate, right
E3160-00150
1
Chassis for mounting shelter plate, left Front panel for TH PS
E3160-00151
1
E3160-00208
1
Front panel Blank panela
E3160-00257
1
E3160-00258
1
Shelter plate
E3160-00606
1
Cover for the DVM airflow
E3160-00607
2
Angle for mounting shelter plate, right
E3160-00608
1
Angle for mounting shelter plate, left
E3160-00609
1
Rear plate for TH PS
E3160-00610
1
Rear plate for system controllerb Rear plate for CMUb
E3160-00611
1
E3160-00612
1
Rear plate for DVMb
E3160-00613
1
Flange
E3160-01219
2
Hinge, right
E3160-01265
1
Hinge, left Cover for the top of the 81110A
E3160-01266
1
E3160-04065
1
Blank panel
E3160-04066
1
Fan cover for the system controller
E3160-04101
1
a. This part is used at the top position installed pulse generator in the system cabinet. b. These parts are used when each instrument is not installed in the system cabinet.
68
Chapter 3
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals Contents of Rack Mount Kit
Upgrade Kit for Agilent 81110A and C3600 controller Rack Mount Kit (Agilent E3153A option 101)
Table 3-13 lists the accessories furnished with the upgrade kit for the 81110A rack mount kit. They are used to upgrade the system cabinet for mounting the first 81110A into the system cabinet.
Table 3-13 Contents of Upgrade Kit for Agilent 81110A Rack Mount Kit (Agilent E3153A option 101)
Description
Part Number Quantity
Screw M4 L8 Nut M5×0.8 Nut 10-32
0515-1012
4
0535-0081
8
0590-0804
14
Screw 10-32 Screw 10-32×.75
2680-0278C
36
2680-0320
4
Chassis for mounting shelter plate, right
E3160-00152
1
Chassis for mounting shelter plate, left Front panel for TH PS
E3160-00153
1
E3160-00208
1
Blank panela
E3160-00258
1
Cover for the DVM airflow
E3160-00607
2
Rear plate for TH PS
E3160-00610
1
Rear plate for DVMb
E3160-00613
1
Angle for mounting shelter plate, left
E3160-00618
1
Angle for mounting shelter plate, right Shelter plate
E3160-00619
1
E3160-00620
1
Rear plate for C3600b
E3160-00621
1
Rear plate for CMUb Hinge, right
E3160-00622
1
E3160-01265
1
Hinge, left
E3160-01266
1
Cover for the top of the 81110A
E3160-04065
1
Front panel
E3160-04068
1
a. This part is used at the top position installed pulse generator in the system cabinet. b. These parts are used when each instrument is not installed in the system cabinet.
Chapter 3
69
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals Contents of Rack Mount Kit
Rack Mount Kits for 17-inch Monitors
There are six types of rack mount kits for use with four different types of 17-inch monitors, as shown in the tables below. Table 3-14 lists the accessories furnished with the E3155A rack mount kit. They are used to mount the HPA2287A 17-inch monitor into the system cabinet.
Table 3-14 Contents of Rack Mount Kit for HP A2287A (Agilent E3155A)
Description Screw 10-32 Power cord, universal Support shelf Keyboard shelf Front panel Support rail extension adaptera Support rail Cover Front door, small
a. This part is used for the 4071A (JP10D-).
Part Number Quantity
2680-0278C
12
8120-1625
1
E3160-00161
1
E3160-00166
1
E3160-00261
1
E3160-01258
2
E3160-01262
2
E3160-04061
1
E3160-65035
1
Table 3-15 lists the accessories furnished with the E3155B rack mount kit. They are used to mount the HP A4330A 17-inch monitor into the system cabinet.
Table 3-15 Contents of Rack Mount Kit for HP A4330A (Agilent E3155B)
Description Screw 10-32 Power cord, universal Belt Installation guide Support shelf Keyboard shelf Front panel Support rail extension adaptera Support rail Front door, small
a. This part is used for the 4071A (JP10D-).
Part Number Quantity
2680-0278C
12
8120-1625
1
9223-0678
1
E3155-90002
1
E3160-00165
1
E3160-00166
1
E3160-00263
1
E3160-01258
2
E3160-01262
2
E3160-65035
1
70
Chapter 3
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals Contents of Rack Mount Kit
Table 3-16 lists the accessories furnished with the E3155C rack mount kit. They are used to mount the HP A4490A 17-inch monitor into the system cabinet.
Table 3-16 Contents of Rack Mount Kit for HP A4490A (Agilent E3155C)
Description Screw 10-32 Power cord, universal Belt Installation guide Keyboard shelf Support shelf Front panel, right side Front panel, left side Support rail Front door, small
Part Number Quantity
2680-0278C
6
8120-1625
1
9223-0678
1
E3155-90012
1
E3160-00166
1
E3160-00170
1
E3160-00264
1
E3160-00265
1
E3160-01218
2
E3160-65035
1
Table 3-17 lists the accessories furnished with the E3155D rack mount kit. They are used to mount the HP D2838W 17-inch monitor into the system cabinet.
Table 3-17 Contents of Rack Mount Kit for HP D2838W (Agilent E3155D)
Description Screw 10-32 Power cord, universal Belt Installation guide Support shelf Keyboard shelf Front panel, right side Front panel, left side Support rail extension adaptera Support rail Front door, small
a. This part is used for the 4071A (JP10D-).
Part Number Quantity
2680-0278C
8
8120-1625
1
9223-0678
1
E3155-90022
1
E3160-00174
1
E3160-00177
1
E3160-00268
1
E3160-00269
1
E3160-01258
2
E3160-01261
2
E3160-65035
1
Chapter 3
71
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals Contents of Rack Mount Kit
Table 3-18 lists the accessories furnished with the E3155E rack mount kit. They are used to mount the HP D8900A 17-inch monitor into the system cabinet.
Table 3-18 Contents of Rack Mount Kit for HP D8900A (Agilent E3155E)
Description Screw 10-32×.5 Screw 10-32×.75 Power cord, universal Belt Installation guide Keyboard shelf Support shelf Front panel Support rail Front door, small
Part Number Quantity
2680-0278C
8
2680-0320
4
8120-1625
1
9223-0678
1
E3155-90030
1
E3160-00179
1
E3160-00185
1
E3160-00275
1
E3160-01264
2
E3160-65035
1
Table 3-19 lists the rack mount accessories. They are used to mount the HP D8906A 17-inch monitor into the system cabinet.
Table 3-19 Rack Mount Accessories for HP D8906A
Description Screw 10-32×.5 Screw 10-32×.75 Power cord, universal Belt Installation guide Keyboard shelf Support shelf Front panel Support rail Front door, small
Part Number Quantity
2680-0278C
8
2680-0320
4
8120-1625
1
9223-0678
1
E3155-90030
1
E3160-00179
1
E3160-00195
1
E3160-00295
1
E3160-01264
2
E3160-65035
1
72
Chapter 3
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals Contents of Rack Mount Kit
Rack Mount Kits for Flat Panel Display
Table 3-20 lists the accessories furnished with the E3155F rack mount kit. They are used to mount the flat panel display to the system cabinet.
Table 3-20 Contents of Rack Mount Kit for Flat Panel Display (Agilent E3155F)
Description
Part Number Quantity
Screw M4×8
0515-2079
8
Cable tie
1400-0249
10
Screw bolt, 10-32
2680-0607
4
Washer
3050-0893
8
Washera
3050-1013
8
Washer
3050-0226
4
Monitor extension cable (3m)
E3120-61687
1
Installation guide
E3155-90042
1
USB extension cable (16ft)
E3160-61691
2
Side panel (large)
E3160-65021
1
Side panel (small)
E3160-65022
1
Long arm with four bolts
E3160-65023
1
Short arm
E3160-65024
1
Fixing set
E3160-65025
2
FPD attachment set
E3160-65026
1
Keyboard tray assembly
E3160-65027
1
Cover
E3160-65028
1
a. These parts are used when the flat panel display leans.
Chapter 3
73
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals Contents of Rack Mount Kit
Rack Mount Kit for System Controller
There are three types of rack mount kits for use with different types of system controllers, as shown in the table below.
Table 3-21 lists the accessories furnished with the E3156A rack mount kit. It is used to mount the 745i controller into the system cabinet.
Table 3-21 Contents of Rack Mount Kit for 745i Controller (Agilent E3156A)
Description Screw M4×12 Screw 10-32 ITF buffer/speaker module Power cord, universal Monitor extension cable Flange Support rail extension adaptera Support rail
a. This part is used for the 4071A (JP10D-).
Model/Part Number Quantity
0515-1718
4
2680-0278C
8
HP 46081A
1
8120-1625
1
E3120-61687
1
E3160-01215
2
E3160-01258
2
E3160-01262
2
Table 3-22 lists the accessories furnished with the E3156B rack mount kit. They are used to mount the 745/132L controller into the system cabinet.
Table 3-22 Contents of Rack Mount Kit for 745/132L Controller (Agilent E3156B)
Description
Part Number
Screw M4×12
0515-1718
Screw 10-32
2680-0278C
Power cord, universal
8120-1625
Monitor extension cable
E3120-61687
4-meter RS12-PS12 cable
E3120-61685
Flangea
E3160-01215
Flangeb
E3160-01219
Support rail extension adapterc
E3160-01258
Support rail
E3160-01262
a. This part is used for the 4071A and 4072A (JP10G-). b. This part is used for the 4072A (JP20G-) and 4073A(JP10H-). c. This part is used for the 4071A (JP10D-).
Quantity 4 8 1 1 2 2 2 2 2
74
Chapter 3
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals Contents of Rack Mount Kit
Table 3-23 lists the accessories furnished with the E3156C rack mount kit. They are used to mount the C3600/C3700 controller into the system cabinet.
NOTE
If the serial number of 4072A/4073A is JP30G- or JP20H-, the E3156C rack mount kit can be mounted into the system cabinet. If the serial number of 4072A/4073A is JP10G-, JP20G-, or JP10H-, the E3153A option 101 cabinet upgrade kit is needed before installing the E3156C rack mount kit.
Table 3-23 Contents of Rack Mount Kit for C3600/C3700 Controller (Agilent E3156C)
Description Screw M3×0.5 Screw 8-32 Screw 10-32 Power cord, universal Monitor extension cable (3m) Installation guide Support rail Cover Frame USB extension cable
Part Number 0515-0914 2510-0120 2680-0278C 8120-1625
E3120-61687 E3156-90001 E3160-01269 E3160-04099 E3160-60103 E3160-61691
Quantity 6 2 6 1 1 1 2 1 1 2
Chapter 3
75
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals Contents of Rack Mount Kit
Rack Mount Kit for CD-ROM Drive (For JP10G-) and DDS Drive (For JP30G-, JP20H-)
Table 3-24 lists the accessories furnished with the E3157A rack mount kit. It is used to mount the CD-ROM drive into the system cabinet. If you mount the HP C2944D, HP C2948A, or HP C4310A CD-ROM drive into the system cabinet, use the following parts.
NOTE
The E3157A was discontinued in April 2000. The external CD-ROM drive cannot be mounted into the system cabinet of 4072A (JP20G- and JP30G-) and 4073A (JP10H- and JP20H-) but into the system cabinet of 4072A (JP10G-).
Table 3-24 Rack Mount Accessories for HP C2944D, HP C2948A, or HP C4310A (Agilent E3157A)
Description
Screw 10-32 Power cord, universal Support shelf Support shelfa Front panelb Front panela Support rail extension adapterc Support raila Support rail Cover
a. This part is for rack mounting the HP C4310A. b. This part is for rack mounting the HP C2944D or HP C2948A. c. This part is used for the 4071A (JP10D-).
Part Number Quantity
2680-0278C
8
8120-1625
1
E3160-00164
1
E3160-00171
1
E3160-00262
1
E3160-00266
1
E3160-01258
2
E3160-01261
2
E3160-01262
2
E3160-04062
1
76
Chapter 3
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals Contents of Rack Mount Kit
Table 3-25 lists the accessories furnished with the E3157B rack mount kit. It is used to mount the DDS drive into the system cabinet. If you rack-mount the HP C6364A DDS drive into the system cabinet, use the following parts.
NOTE
If the serial number of 4072A/4073A is JP30G- or JP20H-, the E3157B rack mount kit can be mounted into the system cabinet. If the serial number of 4072A/4073A is JP10G-, JP20G-, or JP10H-, the E3153A option 101 cabinet upgrade kit is needed before installing the E3157B rack mount kit.
Table 3-25 Rack Mount Accessories for HP C6364A (Agilent E3157B)
Description
Part Number Quantity
Nut hex M5×0.8
0535-0081
2
Sheet nuta
0590-0804
12
Screw 10-32
2680-0278C
8
Support shelf
E3160-00190
1
Chassisb
E3160-00193
1
Front panel
E3160-00286
1
Rear panelb
E3160-00623
1
Support rail
E3160-01263
2
Bracket, leftb
E3160-01288
1
Bracket, rightb
E3160-01289
1
Flangec
E3160-01298
1
Flangec
E3160-01299
1
Bracketc
E3160-09003
1
a. Four sheet nuts are used for fixing the shelter plate (E3160-00620). b. These parts are not used when you install the rack mount kit into the system cabinet which
has serial number prefix JP10G. c. These parts are used for the 8114A pulse generator.
Chapter 3
77
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals Contents of Rack Mount Kit
Rack Mount Accessories for Agilent E4411B
Table 3-26 lists the rack mount accessories for the E4411B spectrum analyzer. They are used to mount the E4411B into the system cabinet.
Table 3-26 Contents of Rack Mount Accessories for Agilent E4411B
Description Screw M4×8 Sheet nut Screw 10-32 Power cord, universal Stopper Support shelf BNC cable, 4.6 m Support rail
Part Number Quantity
0515-2079
1
0590-0804
10
2680-0278C
10
8120-1625
1
E3150-06001
1
E3150-20001
1
E3150-61601
1
E3160-01263
2
78
Chapter 3
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals To Mount System Instruments (Agilent 4284A/Agilent 3458A)
To Mount System Instruments (Agilent 4284A/Agilent 3458A)
This section describes how to mount the 4284A or 3458A into the system cabinet.
NOTE
To mount the customer's 4284A or 3458A into the system cabinet, perform all the procedures in this section.
If the E3102A/E3103A option 011 or 012 rack mount option, for the 4284A and 3458A, is ordered, the system instruments are mounted into the system cabinet at the factory. To connect the system instruments with the system controller, use step 4 of the following procedure.
NOTE
When used with the 4072A/4073A, the 4284A must be equipped with options 001 and 006.
To install the 4284A or 3458A, use the following procedures:
1. Attach the rack flanges.
a. Remove the side strips from both sides of the instrument. b. Attach a rack flange (1) to each side of the instrument using four screws (2). The rack flanges and screws
are included in the rack mount kit. c. Remove the four feet and two tilt stands from the bottom cover of the instrument.
Figure 3-9 Attaching Rack Flanges
Bottom cover
(2) (1)
Side strip
Chapter 3
79
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals To Mount System Instruments (Agilent 4284A/Agilent 3458A)
2. Install the system instruments into the system cabinet.
a. Remove the blank panel from the location where you will install the instrument. For the location of system instruments, see figure 3-1. Keep the torx screws; these will be used to attach the instrument rack flanges.
b. Install the support rails into the system cabinet. At the factory, clip-on nuts are attached to the front and rear columns of the system cabinet for installing the rails.
c. Position and slide the instrument on the support rails.
d. Secure the instrument rack flanges to the system cabinet. At the factory, clip-on nuts are attached to the front columns of the system cabinet for attaching the rack flanges.
e. If you are installing the 4284A (CMU), confirm the fuse. If it is for 100 V/120 V (3 A/250 V/time delay, Agilent part number 2110-0381), change it to 220/240 V fuse (2 A/250 V/time delay, Agilent part number 2110-0303).
f. If you are installing the 3458A (DVM), confirm the fuse. If it is for 100 V/120 V (1.5 A/no time delay, Agilent part number 2110-0043), change it to 220 V/240 V fuse (500 mAT, slow blow, Agilent part number 2110-0202).
g. Connect the power cord between the system instrument and an instrument power outlet.
NOTE
When using the E3102A/E3103A option 200 or 208, connect the power cord to the DVM and CMU power outlet.
3. Check the system instrument GPIB address. The 4072A/4073A system software assigns the GPIB addresses as shown in table 3-27.
Table 3-27 GPIB Address of Instruments
Instrument 4284A (CMU) 3458A (DVM)
GPIB Address 17 22
NOTE
If you need to set an additional GPIB address for an instrument, first install the Agilent 4070 system software, then edit the configuration file (/etc/opt/hp4070/config/1) to change the GPIB address value. See chapter 6.
80
Chapter 3
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals To Mount System Instruments (Agilent 4284A/Agilent 3458A)
4. Connect the GPIB cables between the system controller and the system instruments. Table 3-28 lists the connections for the GPIB interface cards installed in the system controller, and the logical unit number initially assigned for each interface by the 4070 system software.
· If the system controller is installed in the system cabinet:
Use 1-meter GPIB cables to connect the system controller to an instrument, and to interconnect the system instruments.
Use a 4-meter GPIB cable to connect the system controller to the wafer prober. · If the system controller is not installed in the system cabinet:
Use 4-meter GPIB cables to connect the system controller to an instrument in the cabinet, and to connect the system controller to the wafer prober.
Use 1-meter GPIB cables to interconnect the system instruments in the system cabinet. Table 3-28 GPIB Interface Connection
GPIB Interface
Connected Devices
Agilent E2071D (EISA) system controller, 4284A (CMU), 3458A (DVM), 8110A, Agilent E2078A (PCI) 81110A, 8114A, E4411B, and other instruments
Agilent E2071D (EISA) Automatic wafer prober Agilent E2078A (PCI)
Logical Unit No. 7
25
Chapter 3
81
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals To Mount Pulse Generator (Agilent 8110A/81110A/8114A)
To Mount Pulse Generator (Agilent 8110A/81110A/8114A)
This section describes how to mount the 8110A, 81110A, or 8114A into the system cabinet. Before mounting the pulse generators, installing the first pulse generator integration kit is required. Update kit for the 81110A rack mount kit must also be installed before mounting the 81110A.
NOTE
To mount the customer's 8110A, 81110A, or 8114A into the system cabinet, perform the following procedures in this section.
If the E3102A option 500 and 550, 551, or 552 are ordered, the integration kit, pulse generators, and upgrade kit for the 81110A rack mount kit are mounted into the system cabinet at the factory. To connect the system instruments with the system controller, see "GPIB Address and Cables".
Figure 3-10 shows the installation sequence of rack mount kit for pulse generators. Install the rack mount kit according to the following installation sequence.
Figure 3-10 PGU rack mount kit Installation Sequence
Start
Is system controller
If the serial number is JP30G~
No
installed into the system
or JP20H~, E3153A option 101
cabinet?
are already installed.
Yes
Is system controller
No
Yes
C3600 or C3700?
Is Pulse generator 81110A?
Install E3153A option 100
Yes
rack mount kit into the
system cabinet.
Install E3153A option 101 rack mount kit into the system cabinet.
No
Install E3153A option 001 first PG integration kit.
Install E3153A option 002, 003, 004 rack mount kit for PG. End
82
Chapter 3
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals To Mount Pulse Generator (Agilent 8110A/81110A/8114A)
To Install First Pulse Generator Integration Kit (E3153A option 001)
This section describes how to install the first pulse generator integration kit. Attach the trigger distributor using screws. Figure 3-11 shows the installation location for the trigger distributor. Figure 3-11 Attaching the Trigger Distributor
Trigger distributor
Support rail
Transition time converter
To Mount Agilent 8110A and Agilent 8114A (E3153A option 002/004)
To install the 8110A or 8114A, use the following procedures: 1. Attach the rack flanges.
a. Remove the side strips from both sides of the instrument. b. Attach a rack flange (1) to each side of the instrument using two screws (2). The rack flanges and screws are
included in the rack mount kit. c. Remove the four feet and two tilt stands from the bottom cover of the instrument.
Figure 3-12 Attaching the Rack Flanges Bottom cover
(2) (1)
Side strip
Chapter 3
83
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals To Mount Pulse Generator (Agilent 8110A/81110A/8114A)
2. Install the pulse generators into the system cabinet. a. Remove the blank panel from the location where you will install the pulse generator. For the location of the pulse generators, see figure 3-2. Keep the torx screws; these will be used to attach the instrument rack flanges. b. Install the support rails into the system cabinet. At the factory, clip-on nuts are attached to the front and rear columns of the system cabinet for installing the rails. c. Position and slide the pulse generator on the support rails. Attach the cover furnished in the integration kit with the pulse generator 8110A and installed on the top of the pulse generators. d. Secure the pulse generator rack flanges to the system cabinet. At the factory, clip-on nuts are attached to the front columns of the system cabinet for attaching the rack flanges. e. (8114A only) If you install two 8110As, attach the blank panel (E3160-04065) upside second 8114A. f. Connect the power cord between the pulse generator and an instrument power outlet. See figure 3-21. g. (8114A only) Attach the transition time converter behind the 8114A. Figure 3-11 shows the position of the transition time converter. Figure 3-13 Installing Pulse Generator
Cover
8110A
8114A
84
Chapter 3
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals To Mount Pulse Generator (Agilent 8110A/81110A/8114A)
To Install Upgrade Kit for Agilent 81110A Rack Mount Kit (E3153A option 100).
This section describes how to install the upgrade kit for the 81110A rack mount kit and the 745i or 745/132L system controller. The upgrade kit must be installed before mounting the 81110A.
NOTE
To mount the customer's 81110A and the 745i or 745/132L controller into the system cabinet, perform all the procedures in this section.
If the E3102A/E3103A is ordered, the upgrade kit for the 81110A rack mount kit is installed into the system cabinet at the factory. To connect the system instruments with the system controller, see "GPIB Address and Cables".
To install the upgrade kit for the 81110A rack mount kit, use the following procedures:
1. Remove the right and left side panels of the cabinet.
2. Remove the PDU assembly, testhead fan assembly, and all instruments.
3. Install two hinges to attach the chassis for mounting the shelter plate at the rear of the system cabinet. (Four screws and nuts)
4. Install two chassis for mounting the shelter plate. 5. Install two covers for the DVM airflow. (Four
(Eight screws and four nuts)
screws)
Chapter 3
85
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals To Mount Pulse Generator (Agilent 8110A/81110A/8114A)
6. Install two angles for mounting the shelter plate. 7. Install the shelter plate. (Four screws) (Four screws and nuts)
8. Install the front panel. (Two screws and nuts)
9. Install the fan cover for the system controller. (Three screws) If the system controller is 745i, you do not need to install this cover.
10. Install the right and left side panels.
11. Install the rear plate for the TH PS. (Two nuts M5)
86
Chapter 3
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals To Mount Pulse Generator (Agilent 8110A/81110A/8114A)
12. Replace the front panel for the TH PS. 13. If the controller, DVM, or CMU is not mounted,
install the rear panel for each instrument. (Two nuts M5)
Chapter 3
87
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals To Mount Pulse Generator (Agilent 8110A/81110A/8114A)
To Install Upgrade Kit for Agilent 81110A Rack Mount Kit (E3153A option 101).
This section describes how to install the upgrade kit for the 81110A rack mount kit and the C3600/C3700 system controller. The upgrade kit must be installed before mounting the 81110A.
This section has two procedures. The installation procedure depends on the DDS rack mount kit.
If you do not need to install the DDS rack mount kit, use the CASE A procedure.
If you are going to install the DDS rack mount kit with the C3600/C3700 rack mount kit, some parts of the E3157B rack mount kit must be installed at the same time. To install the upgrade kit for the 81110A rack mount kit with E3157B, use the CASE B procedure.
NOTE
To mount the customer's 81110A and the C3600/C3700 controller into the system cabinet, perform all the procedures in this section.
If the E3102A/E3103A is ordered, the upgrade kit for the 81110A rack mount kit is installed into the system cabinet at the factory. To connect the system instruments with the system controller, see "GPIB Address and Cables".
Figure 3-14 E3153A option 101 Upgrade Kit Installation Sequence
Start
Is system controller C3600 or C3700?
Install E3153A option 100
No
rack mount kit into the
system cabinet.
Yes
Do you install the DDS driver into the cabinet?
No
Use the CASE A procedure.
Yes
Use the CASE B procedure.
88
Chapter 3
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals To Mount Pulse Generator (Agilent 8110A/81110A/8114A)
CASE A To install Upgrade kit for the 81110A and C3600/C3700 rack mount kit.
1. Remove the right and left side panels of the cabinet.
2. Remove the PDU assembly, testhead fan assembly, and all instruments.
3. Install two hinges to attach the chassis for mounting the shelter plate at the rear of the system cabinet. (Four screws and nuts)
4. Install two chassis for mounting the shelter plate. 5. Install two covers for the DVM airflow. (Four
(Eight screws and four nuts)
screws)
Chapter 3
89
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals To Mount Pulse Generator (Agilent 8110A/81110A/8114A)
6. Install two angles for mounting the shelter plate. 7. Install the shelter plate. (Four screws) (Four screws and nuts)
8. Install the front panel. (Two screws and nuts)
9. Install the right and left side panels.
10. Install the rear plate for the TH PS. (Two nuts M5)
11. Replace the front panel for the TH PS.
12. If the controller, DVM, or CMU is not mounted, install the rear panel for each instrument. (Two nuts M5)
90
Chapter 3
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals To Mount Pulse Generator (Agilent 8110A/81110A/8114A)
CASE B To install Upgrade kit for the 81110A,C3600/C3700, and DDS rack mount kit.
1. Remove the right and left side panels of the cabinet.
2. Remove the PDU assembly, testhead fan assembly, and all instruments.
3. Install two hinges to attach the chassis for mounting the shelter plate at the rear of the system cabinet. (Four screws and nuts)
4. Install two chassis for mounting the shelter plate. 5. Install two covers for the DVM airflow. (Four
(Eight screws and four nuts)
screws)
Chapter 3
91
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals To Mount Pulse Generator (Agilent 8110A/81110A/8114A)
6. Install two brackets to the chassis. These parts are furnished with the E3157B DDS rack mount kit.
7. Install two angles for mounting the shelter plate. (Four screws and nuts)
8. Install the shelter plate. (Two screws)
9. Install the support rails into the system cabinet. These parts are furnished with the E3157B DDS rack mount kit.
10. Install the front panel. (Two screws and nuts)
11. Install the right and left side panels.
92
Chapter 3
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals To Mount Pulse Generator (Agilent 8110A/81110A/8114A)
12. Install the rear plate for the TH PS. (Two nuts M5)
13. If the controller, DVM, or CMU is not mounted, install the rear panel for each instrument. (Two nuts M5)
14. Replace the front panel for the TH PS.
Chapter 3
93
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals To Mount Pulse Generator (Agilent 8110A/81110A/8114A)
To Mount Agilent 81110A (E3153A option 003)
To install the 81110A, use the following procedures: 1. Attach the rack flanges and side cover to the 81110A.
a. Remove the side strips from both sides of the 81110A. b. Attach a rack flange to each side of the 81110A using four screws. The rack flanges and screws are included
in the rack mount kit. c. Remove the four feet and two tilt stands from the bottom cover of the 81110A. d. Attach a side cover to each side of the 81110A using two screws.
Figure 3-15 Attaching Rack Flanges
Cover
81110A Front
Screw(M4x12)
Screw(M5L16) Flange
2. Install the 81110A into the system cabinet. a. Remove the blank panel from the location where you will install the 81110A. For the location of 81110As, see figure 3-2. Keep the torx screws; these will be used to attach the 81110A rack flanges. b. Install the support rails into the system cabinet. At the factory, clip-on nuts are attached to the front and rear columns of the system cabinet for installing the rails. c. Connect the power cord, clock trigger cable (yellow), and GPIB cable at the rear of the 81110A. d. Pass these cables, connected at the rear of the 81110A, to the front of the 81110A. e. Position and slide the 81110A on the support rails so that the rear of the 81110A comes to the front of the system cabinet. f. Remove the small plate on the front cover with two screws to pass the 2m GPIB connecting cable between the bottom of the 81110A and the other instruments. g. Attach the front cover furnished in the rack mount kit. h. Secure the 81110A rack flanges to the system cabinet using four screws. At the factory, clip-on nuts are attached to the front columns of the system cabinet for attaching the rack flanges. i. Connect the power cable to the instrument power outlets. See figure 3-21.
94
Chapter 3
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals To Mount Pulse Generator (Agilent 8110A/81110A/8114A)
Figure 3-16 Installing Agilent 81110A Pulse Generator (1)
Cable
Figure 3-17 Installing Agilent 81110A (Front View)
Figure 3-18 Installing Agilent 81110A (Rear View)
Chapter 3
95
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals To Mount Pulse Generator (Agilent 8110A/81110A/8114A)
GPIB Address and Cables
1. Check the pulse generator GPIB address. The 4070 system software assigns the GPIB addresses as shown in table 3-29.
Table 3-29 GPIB Address of Pulse Generators
Pulse Generator GPIB Address
PG 1 (Master PG)
10
PG 2
11
PG 3
12
PG 4
13
PG 5
14
NOTE
If you need to set an additional GPIB address for an instrument, first install the Agilent 4070 system software, then edit the configuration file (/etc/opt/hp4070/config/1) to change the GPIB address value. See chapter 6.
2. Connect the GPIB cables between the system controller and the pulse generators. If the installed pulse generators are the 8110A and 8114A, connect the GPIB cables as shown in figure 3-19.
Figure 3-19 GPIB Cable Connection (Agilent 8110A and Agilent 8114A)
GPIB Cable (2.0 m)
GPIB Cable (1.0 m)
PG5 PG4 PG3 PG2 PG1
Rear of CPU (745/132L)
Agilent 4284A CMU
Agilent 3458A DVM
GPIB Cable (0.5 m)
Rear of Monitor
GPIB Cable (4.0 m) To Prober
Rear of CPU (745/i)
To Prober
To Agilent 4284A CMU
PG5
PG4 PG3
GPIB Cable (0.5 m)
PG2
PG1
GPIB Cable (2.0 m)
GPIB Cable (1.0 m)
GPIB Cable (4.0 m)
Rear of Monitor
Rear of CPU (745/132L)
Agilent 4284A CMU
Agilent 3458A DVM
Rear of CPU (745/i)
To Prober
96
Chapter 3
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals To Mount Pulse Generator (Agilent 8110A/81110A/8114A)
If the installed pulse generators are the 81110A and 8114A, connect the GPIB cables as shown in figure 3-20.
NOTE
Pass the GPIB cable between the bottom of the 81110A and 4284A through the right hole of the cover.
Figure 3-20 GPIB Cable Connection (Agilent 81110A and Agilent 8114A)
Front of Cabinet
Rear of Cabinet
PG5 PG4 PG3 PG2 PG1
GPIB Cable
To GPIB
(0.5 m) connector of PG1
GPIB Cable (2.0 m)
GPIB Cable (1.0 m)
81110A x 5
PG5 PG4 PG3 PG2 PG1
81110A 81110A 81110A 81110A 81110A Rear of CPU (C3600)
Agilent 4284A CMU
Agilent 3458A DVM
Rear of Monitor
To 4284
To Prober
Rear of CPU (745/132L PCI) To Prober
Rear of CPU (745/132L EISA)
To Prober
GPIB Cable (4.0 m)
Rear of CPU (745/i)
To 4284
Front of Cabinet
PG5
PG4
PG3
PG2
PG1 8114A
GPIB Cable (0.5 m)
To GPIB connector of PG1
GPIB Cable (2.0 m)
GPIB Cable (1.0 m)
81110A x 4 8114A x 1
Rear of Cabinet
PG5 PG4 PG3 PG2
PG1
81110A 81110A 81110A 81110A
8114A Rear of CPU
(C3600)
Agilent 4284A CMU
To Prober
GPIB Cable (4.0 m)
Agilent 3458A DVM
Front of Cabinet
Rear of Cabinet
PG4 8114A
PG4
8114A
GPIB Cable (1.0 m)
PG3
PG3
81110A
PG2
PG1 8114A
PG2 PG1
81110A 8114A
GPIB Cable (0.5 m)
To GPIB connector of PG1
GPIB Cable (2.0 m)
Rear of CPU (C3600)
To Prober
GPIB Cable (1.0 m)
81110A x 2 8114A x 2
Agilent 4284A CMU
Agilent 3458A
DVM
GPIB Cable
(4.0 m)
To GPIB connector
of other instrument
Chapter 3
97
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals To Mount Pulse Generator (Agilent 8110A/81110A/8114A)
Connecting Power Cords
This section describes how to connect the power cords between instruments and power outlets.
1. Connect the power cords between instruments and power outlets inside the system cabinet. The positions of the power cords are shown in figure 3-21.
2. Secure the power cables to the pillar with the furnished cable ties in the system cabinet.
Figure 3-21 Connecting Positions of the Power Cords
Instruments power outlets (200/208/220/240V)
Rear
Side panel B
A
8114A 3458A1 4284A1 TH PS E4411B Monitor
CPU CD-ROM
Controller power outlets (220V for 200/208/220V, 240V for 240V option)
81110A or 8110A
DVM and CMU power outlets (220V) (only for 200/208V)
4284A 3458A 1: Only for 220/240V
98
Chapter 3
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals To Mount 17-inch Color Monitor and Keyboard Shelf
To Mount 17-inch Color Monitor and Keyboard Shelf
This section describes how to mount the 17-inch color monitor, keyboard, and mouse.
Removing Front Panel and Support Shelf
This procedure is for the E3102A/E3103A option 020 only.
NOTE
If the E3102A/E3103A option 020 is ordered, the rack mount kit is already installed into the system cabinet at the factory. However, the 17-inch monitor is not mounted into the system cabinet at the factory, and must be installed at the installation site. Before mounting the 17-inch monitor, you must remove the front panel and support shelf.
1. Remove the front panels, which are installed at the monitor rack mount position, from the system cabinet using a torx screwdriver. Keep the four torx screws. These are used to reattach the front panel to the system cabinet.
2. Remove the support shelf from the system cabinet. See figure 3-23.
Removing Front Door and Setting Up the Rack Mount Kit
This procedure is for the E3155A/B/C/D/E/G only.
NOTE
The rack mount kit and the 17-inch monitor must be installed at the installation site. Even if the E3155A/B/C/D/E/G rack mount kit is ordered with the E3102A/E3103A, the rack mount kit is not installed in the 4072A/4073A system cabinet at the factory.
Before mounting the 17-inch monitor, mount the 17-inch monitor rack mount kit using the following procedures:
1. Remove the left side panel by removing the screws at the bottom of the side panel and at the top of the PDU, then lift up the left side panel.
2. Remove the ground wire by removing the nut at the bottom of the front door. 3. Remove the center poles of the front door hinges, and remove the front door. 4. Remove the four blank panels at the monitor and keyboard shelf location using a torx screwdriver.
Keep the torx screws. These are used to attach the monitor front panel and keyboard shelf to the system cabinet. 5. Remove the hinge at the "without monitor" location shown in figure 3-22.
Chapter 3
99
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals To Mount 17-inch Color Monitor and Keyboard Shelf
Figure 3-22 System Cabinet Part Location
Hinge (without monitor) Hinge (with monitor)
Rackmount position for the PG Rackmount position for the PG Rackmount position for the PG Rackmount position for the PG Rackmount position for the PG
Rackmount position for CD-ROM (JP10G-)
Rackmount position for system controller
Rackmount position for the CMU
Rackmount position for the DVM
Hinge
Lock (without monitor) Lock (with monitor)
1203 mm (47.36 in) 714 mm (28.11 in) 158 mm (6.24 in) 603 mm (23.74 in) 736 mm (28.99 in)
6. Attach the hinge at the "with monitor" location. 7. Remove the right side panel by removing the two screws at the bottom of the side panel, then lift up the side
panel. 8. Remove the front door lock at the "without monitor" location shown in Figure 3-22. 9. Attach the front door lock at the "with monitor" location. 10. Install the support rails into the system cabinet using screws. At the factory, clip-on nuts are attached to the
front and rear columns of the system cabinet for installing the support rails. 11. Install the small front door included in the rack mount kit. 12. Attach the ground wire at the bottom of the front door. 13. Reinstall the right side panel. 14. Reinstall the left side panel.
100
Chapter 3
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals To Mount 17-inch Color Monitor and Keyboard Shelf
Installing 17-Inch Monitor
1. Place the support shelf on the floor. 2. (HP A4330A, HP A4490A, HP D2838W, HP D8900A, or HPD8906A) Pass the belt through the opening on the
support shelf. 3. (HP A2287A, HP A4330A, or HP A4490A) Remove the foot of the 17-inch monitor. 4. Put the 17-inch monitor on the support shelf. 5. (HP A4330A, HP A4490A, HP D2838W, HP D8900A, or HP D8906A) Secure the monitor on the support shelf
using the belt as shown in figure 3-23. (HP A2287A) Secure the monitor on the support shelf using the cover. 6. Hold the support shelf up, place it on the support rails, and slide it into the cabinet. 7. When using the E3155C rack mount kit, fix the support shelf to the support rails using torx screws. 8. Attach the front panel using the four torx screws removed earlier. 9. Connect the video cable. If the system controller is installed outside of the cabinet, use an extension cable. 10. Connect the power cord between the monitor and a controller power outlet.
Figure 3-23 Installing 17-inch Color Monitor and Keyboard Shelf
Ratchet buckle
Support rail 17-inch monitor
Front panel Keyboard shelf
Belt Support shelf
Small front door
Chapter 3
101
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals To Mount 17-inch Color Monitor and Keyboard Shelf
Installing Keyboard Shelf
1. Place the keyboard shelf in the location shown in figure 3-23. 2. Attach the keyboard shelf to the system cabinet using four torx screws. At the factory, clip-on nuts are attached
to the front columns of the system cabinet for installing the keyboard shelf.
Setting Up Keyboard and Mouse
1. Place the keyboard and mouse on the keyboard shelf. 2. Pass the keyboard and mouse cables through the opening under the keyboard shelf. 3. Connect the keyboard and mouse cables to the system controller. If the system controller is installed outside of
the cabinet, use an extension cable.
102
Chapter 3
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals To Mount Flat Panel Display
To Mount Flat Panel Display
This section describes how to mount the flat panel display, keyboard, and mouse.
NOTE
The rack mount kit and the flat panel display must be installed at the installation site. Even if the E3155F rack mount kit is ordered with the E3102A/E3103A, the rack mount kit is not installed in the 4072A/4073A system cabinet at the factory.
To mount the flat panel display, use the following procedures:
Installing Rack mount kit
This section describes how to mount the rack mount kit with FPD to the side of the system cabinet.
1. Remove the side panel of cabinet.
2. Attach the large panel to the cabinet.
NOTE
You can install the panel to the both side of system cabinet.
3. (Optional) If you mount the arm at the left side of cabinet, assemble the long arm and small panel by four bolts.
4. Attach the long arm to the cabinet.
Chapter 3
103
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals To Mount Flat Panel Display
5. Fix the long arm to the large plate using hex wrench.
6. Attach the short arm from underneath.
7. Attach the inner ring by the short screw.
8. Attach the two support rings by long screws.
9. Attach the lever at the suitable position not to interfering with the arm.
10. Attach the keyboard tray assembly.
104
Chapter 3
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals To Mount Flat Panel Display
11. Attach the inner ring by short screw.
12. Attach the two support rings by long screws.
13. Attach the lever.
14. Pass the keyboard cable through.
15. Pass the keyboard cable through behind the keyboard tray.
Chapter 3
105
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals To Mount Flat Panel Display
16. Pass through the mouse cable.
17. Fasten the cables by the cable tie to the keyboard tray.
18. Put the FPD on the keyboard tray.
19. Attach the two attachment by four screws (0515-2079) and washers (3050-0893) to fix the FPD.
20. Connect the power cable and display cable to the 21. Fix the cables to the keyboard tray by cable tie. FPD.
106
Chapter 3
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals To Mount Flat Panel Display
22. Fix the cables to the long arm by three cable ties. 23. Tie the cables by two cable ties.
24. Pass the cables to the hole of side panel.
25. Attach the side cover.
26. Fix the side cover by the four screws (0515-2079) 27. Final. and washers (3050-0893).
Chapter 3
107
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals To Mount System Controller
To Mount System Controller
This section describes how to mount the system controller into the system cabinet.
NOTE
If the E3102A/E3103A option 023 and E3171A/AJ are ordered at the same time or the E3102/E3103A option 025 and E3172A/AJ/B or E3173A are ordered at the same time, the system controller is installed into the system cabinet at the factory. In this case, the following installation is not required.
If the E3156A/B/C is ordered, the rack mount kit and system controller are not installed into the system cabinet. You must install the rack mount kit and system controller.
To mount the system controller, use the following procedures:
To Install E3156A/B Rack Mount Kit
This section describes how to mount the rack mount kit for the 745i or 745/132L system controller into the system cabinet. The E3156A is used for the 745i system controller. The E3156B is used for the 745/132L system controller.
1. Remove the side strips from both sides of the system controller. 2. Screw a rack flange to each side of the system controller.
NOTE
If the system cabinet has the 81110A pulse generator integration kit, use E3160-01219 flange. If the cabinet don't include the above integration kit, use E3160-01215 flange.
Figure 3-24 Flange for 745/132L (E3160-01219)
E3160-01219
3. Remove the blank panel from the system controller location. Keep the four torx screws; these are used to attach the system controller to the system cabinet.
4. Install the rails into the system cabinet. At the factory, clip-on nuts are attached to the front and rear columns of the system cabinet for installing the rails.
5. Slide the system controller on the rails.
6. Attach the system controller rack flanges to the system cabinet using torx screws. At the factory, clip-on nuts are attached to the front columns of the system cabinet for attaching the system controller.
7. Connect the video cable. If the monitor is installed outside of the system cabinet, use an extension cable.
108
Chapter 3
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals To Mount System Controller
8. Connect the keyboard cable. If the monitor is installed outside of the system cabinet, use an extension cable. 9. Connect the power cord between the system controller and a controller power outlet.
To Install E3156C Rack Mount Kit
This section describes how to mount the rack mount kit for the C3600/C3700 system controller into the system cabinet.
1. Remove the Agilent 4280A from system cabinet. 2. Attach the support rail to the system cabinet.
NOTE
These support rails for the controller are set in the opposite direction.
3. Put the HP C3600/C3700 system controller on the frame. Place the bottom of the C3600/C3700 to the left side.
4. Attach the cover to the HP C3600/C3700 system controller.
Chapter 3
109
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals To Mount System Controller
5. Screw in the controller using the two screws (8-32).
6. Screw in Fix the cover using the six screws (M3).
NOTE
Do not raise the controller with the frame vertically after fixing the frame. The flange of the frame may bend.
7. After installing the 4284A, install the system controller along with the notch of the frame into the system cabinet.
8. Attach the system controller flange to the system cabinet using torx screws.
110
Chapter 3
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals To Mount CD-ROM Drive (For JP10G-)
To Mount CD-ROM Drive (For JP10G-)
This section describes how to mount the CD-ROM drive into the system cabinet.
NOTE
The external CD-ROM drive cannot be mounted into the system cabinet of the 4072A (JP20G-) and 4073A (JP10H-) but can be mounted into the system cabinet of the 4072A (JP10G-).
To mount the CD-ROM drive, use the following procedures:
1. Attach the CD-ROM drive on the support shelf, as shown in figure 3-25.
2. Remove the blank panel from the location for the CD-ROM drive. Keep the four torx screws; these are used to attach the panel to the system cabinet.
3. Install the support rails in the system cabinet. At the factory, clip-on nuts are attached to the front and rear columns of the system cabinet for installing the rails.
4. Slide the CD-ROM drive (with the support shelf) on the support rails. The groove at the rear corners of the support shelf must slide on the rails.
5. Attach the front panel to the system cabinet using the torx screws. At the factory, clip-on nuts are attached to the front columns for installing the front panel.
6. Connect the SCSI cable between the SCSI connector on the system controller and the CD-ROM drive.
7. Connect the power cord between the CD-ROM drive and a controller power outlet.
Figure 3-25 Installing CD-ROM Drive
Support shelf Screws
CD-ROM drive Front panel
Support rails
Chapter 3
111
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals To Mount DDS Drive (For JP30G-, JP20H-)
To Mount DDS Drive (For JP30G-, JP20H-)
This section describes how to mount the DDS drive into the system cabinet.
NOTE
The external DDS drive can be mounted into the system cabinet of the 4072A (JP30G-) and 4073A (JP20H-). If the serial numbers do not match, the E3153A option 101 Upgrade kit for the Agilent 81110A Pulse Generator must be installed into the system cabinet to install this DDS rack mount kit.
Mount the DDS drive as follows:
1. Before installing the DDS rack mount kit, two brackets must be installed into the cabinet. To install these brackets, see "To Install Upgrade Kit for Agilent 81110A Rack Mount Kit (E3153A option 101)." on page 88.
2. Connect the SCSI cable to the SCSI connector on the DDS drive. 3. Connect the power cord to the DDS drive. 4. Attach the DDS drive on the support shelf, as shown in figure 3-26. 5. Install the attachment and the support rail for the DDS rack mount kit into the system cabinet. For details, see
"To Install Upgrade Kit for Agilent 81110A Rack Mount Kit (E3153A option 101)." on page 88. 6. Slide the DDS drive (with the support shelf) on the support rails. 7. Attach the front panel to the system cabinet using the torx screws. At the factory, clip-on nuts are attached to
the front columns for installing the front panel. 8. Attach the Chassis (Cover) on the support shelf, as shown in figure 3-27. 9. Attach the rear panel into the system cabinet, as shown in figure 3-28.
Figure 3-26 Installing DDS Drive
DDS drive
Support shelf Screws
Front panel
Support rails
112
Chapter 3
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals To Mount DDS Drive (For JP30G-, JP20H-)
Figure 3-27 Installing DDS Cover
Figure 3-28 Installing Rear Panel for DDS Drive
Chapter 3
113
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals To Mount Spectrum Analyzer (Agilent E4411B)
To Mount Spectrum Analyzer (Agilent E4411B)
This section describes how to mount the spectrum analyzer into the system cabinet.
NOTE
To mount the customer's E4411B into the system cabinet, perform all the procedures in this section.
If the E3102A option SP1 rack mount option for the E4411B, is ordered, the spectrum analyzer is mounted into the system cabinet at the factory.
To mount the system controller, use the following procedures:
2 1 3
1. Remove the arm of E4411B following the procedures as shown in the above figure.
2. Put the E4411B on the frame.
3. Attach the stopper by one screw (M4×8).
4. Attach the support rail by four screws and sheet nuts.
114
Chapter 3
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals To Mount Spectrum Analyzer (Agilent E4411B)
5. Install the frame with the E4411B into the system 6. Screw four screws and sheet nuts to fix the frame
cabinet.
with the E4411B.
7. Connect the power cable and GPIB cable.
Chapter 3
115
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Rack-Mounting Instruments, System Controller, and Peripherals To Mount Spectrum Analyzer (Agilent E4411B)
116
Chapter 3
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
4 Connecting Testhead to the Cabinet
117 Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Connecting Testhead to the Cabinet
This chapter describes how to connect the testhead to the system cabinet. This part of the installation process consists of the following main steps: 1. connecting the air duct, optical fiber cables, and ground wire 2. connecting the testhead power cable 3. connecting the measurement cables (test leads) 4. checking the operation of the testhead power supply (TH PS) This chapter also contains the following sections: · "Required Parts" · "To Connect Air Duct, Optical Fiber Cables, and Ground Wire" · "To Connect Testhead Power Cable" · "To Connect CMU (Agilent 4284A) Test Leads" · "To Connect DVM (Agilent 3458A) Test Leads" · "To Connect Pulse Generator (Agilent 8110A/81110A/8114A) Test Leads" · "To Connect Agilent E4411B Spectrum Analyzer Test Leads" · "To Check the Testhead Power Supply and Instrument Operation"
CAUTION Before performing the procedures described in this section, turn OFF the testhead power switch, and remove the power cord from the testhead power supply.
118
Chapter 4
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Connecting Testhead to the Cabinet Required Parts
Required Parts
Table 4-1 lists the parts required to connect the testhead to the system cabinet. Verify that the parts are furnished with the Agilent 4072A/4073A.
Table 4-1 Parts for Connecting Testhead to the System Cabinet
Description
Part Number
Quantity
Fitting for air ducta Air ducta Optical fiber cable assemblya (pair) Ground wirea Testhead power cableb For Agilent 4284A BNC-T (m-f-f) type adapterc Agilent 16048E test leadsc For Agilent 3458A Test leads (BNC-banana-plug cable)d For Agilent 8110A, Agilent 81110A, or Agilent 8114A BNC-triaxial adaptere 1-to-2 adapter
BNC cable for pulse switche BNC(f)-to-BNC(m) cable assembly, 115 cm, yellowg BNC(f)-to-BNC(m) cable assembly, 115 cm, bluei PG cable, BNC cable 4.6 mi BNC(f)-to-BNC(m) cable assembly, 115 cm, whitee feed through, 50 k BNC cable for transition time converter, 50 cmk For Agilent E4411B Test leads (BNC cable, 4.6 m)l Type N(m)-to-BNC(f) adapterl
E3120-60008 E3120-40005 E3120-61602 E3120-61678 E3160-60007
1250-2405C 16048-60002
E3120-61683
1250-0595 E3125-61042 E3125-61607 04062-61604 04062-61608 E3150-61601 E3150-61602 04192-61002 E3150-61603
E350-61601 1250-0780
2 1 1 1 1
2 1
1
up to 2f up to 3f up to 7f
1h 1h 1 or 2j up to 2 1h 1h
1 1
a. The air duct assembly includes the air duct and fittings. The optical fiber cables and the ground wire are passed through the air duct assembly.
b. The testhead power cable is connected to the testhead power supply at the factory. c. The 16048E and a BNC-T-type adapter are included with the Agilent E3102A/E3103A option 011. d. The test leads (BNC-banana-plug cable) are included with the Agilent E3102A/E3103A option 012. e. These parts are included with the Agilent E3102A/E3103A option 500. f. The required quantity depends on the number of pulse generators and connections with the testhead. g. These parts are included with the Agilent E3102A/E3103A option 550. h. For each 8110A, 81110A, or 8114A. This quantity depends on the number of 8110As, 81110As, or 8114As. i. These parts are included with the Agilent E3102A/E3103A option 550, 551, and 552. j. Two parts are required for each 8110A or 81110A. One part is required for each 8114A. k. These parts are included with the Agilent E3102A/E3103A option 552. l. These parts are included with the Agilent E3102A/E3103A option SP1.
Chapter 4
119
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Connecting Testhead to the Cabinet To Connect Air Duct, Optical Fiber Cables, and Ground Wire
To Connect Air Duct, Optical Fiber Cables, and Ground Wire
This section describes how to connect the air duct (and the optical fiber and ground cables that run through the air duct) between the testhead and system cabinet. Figure 4-1 and figure 4-2 show the part locations for the testhead and system cabinet, respectively.
Figure 4-1
Part Locations for the Testhead
Bottom cover
Air duct opening
Testhead power cable opening
Power switch
Bottom cover
Hex screws
Top cover (with bottom cover removed)
In To testhead CPU board
Out
Optical fiber cables
To optical I/F card in system Controller
In Out
Hex screws Ground wire
Connectors for optical fiber cables
Testhead CPU board Air duct
OUT
IN
Nut
To system cabinet
Stud for ground wire
120
Chapter 4
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Connecting Testhead to the Cabinet To Connect Air Duct, Optical Fiber Cables, and Ground Wire
To connect the testhead to the system cabinet, use the following procedure.
1. Connect the ground wire and optical fiber cables to the system cabinet.
a. Open the rear door of the system cabinet. b. Remove the groove cover, as shown in figure 4-2. c. Put the ground wire and the optical fiber cables into the groove at the bottom of the system cabinet, as
shown in figure 4-2. d. Reinstall the cover.
The optical fiber cables are now ready to be connected to the system controller, as described in chapter 5 or chapter 6. e. Pull the ground wire so that it can be connected to the rear door. f. Remove the nut from the screw located in the lower-right corner of the opened rear door. g. Connect the ground wire to the rear door using the nut.
Figure 4-2 System Cabinet Part Locations
Opened rear door
Cabinet fan
Groove
Cover
Inside cabinet
Instrument power outlets
DVM and CMU power outlets (200/208 V option)
Controller power outlets
Power distribution unit (PDU) Testhead power supply (TH PS)
Screws
Cable Tie
Ground wire
Screw for ground wire Air duct opening
Testhead fan assembly Optical fiber cables
2. Connect the air duct to the system cabinet. a. Place the end of the air duct on the air duct opening. b. Attach the air duct using the four screws provided with the air duct fitting.
3. Close the rear door and reinstall the inner plate and bottom cover of the testhead. a. Close the rear door of the system cabinet. b. Reinstall the testhead inner plate using eight hex screws (M6). c. Reinstall the testhead bottom cover using eight hex screws (M4).
Chapter 4
121
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Connecting Testhead to the Cabinet To Connect Testhead Power Cable
To Connect Testhead Power Cable
This section describes how to connect the testhead power cable between the testhead and the system cabinet. Figure 4-3 shows the part locations for the testhead.
1. Open the rear door of the system cabinet. 2. Pull out the testhead power cable connector assembly from the system cabinet. The other side of the cable is
connected to the testhead power supply at the factory. 3. Using a cable tie, secure the testhead power cable, as shown in figure 4-2. 4. Pull the cable out near the bottom of the system cabinet, then close the system cabinet rear door. 5. Connect the connectors as shown in figure 4-3:
· 12-pin connector to "E" connector. · 16-pin connector to "C" connector. · 10-pin connector to "B" connector. · 8-pin connector to "A" connector. · 20-pin connector to "F" connector. · Attach the two ground wires at screw hole "D", using the screw provided with the testhead. 6. Screw the four screws on the connector assembly.
Figure 4-3 Testhead Power Cable Connection
Power switch
Air duct
Screw holes
Testhead power cable opening
D F
Screw holes
Screws
Connector assembly Ground wires 20 12 16 10 8
Screws
Cable clamp
To front panel of testhead power supply (secondary unit)
A
E
C
B
8 pin connector
A
10 pin connector
B
16 pin connector
C
Ground wires
D
12 pin connector
E
20 pin connector
F
122
Chapter 4
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Connecting Testhead to the Cabinet To Connect CMU (Agilent 4284A) Test Leads
To Connect CMU (Agilent 4284A) Test Leads
This section describes how to connect the capacitance measurement unit (CMU) test leads between the testhead and system cabinet. Figure 4-4 shows the system cabinet part locations.
Figure 4-4
Connecting Agilent 4284A to Testhead
System cabinet front side
System cabinet rear side
4284A
16048E Testhead power supply
Cable tie
Cable (with BNC connectors) opening 16048E test leads testhead side connection Orange
Red Black Gray
BNC-T adapter
AUX 7 (CMH) AUX 8 (CML)
1. Open the front door of the system cabinet. 2. Remove the front panel, which is installed under the TH PS. 3. Connect the 16048E test leads to the UNKNOWN terminals on the 4284A (CMU) front panel. 4. Insert the banana terminal test lead into the ground terminal (), on the left side of the UNKNOWN terminal. 5. Pull the cable through the opening, as shown in figure 4-4. 6. Reinstall the front panel. 7. Close the front door of the system cabinet. 8. Open the rear door of the system cabinet. 9. Pull the cable out near the bottom rear of the system cabinet. 10. Using a cable tie, secure the cable, as shown in figure 4-4. 11. Close the rear door of the system cabinet. 12. Connect the red and orange test leads to the female connectors of a BNC-T (m-f-f) adapter. 13. Connect the male connector of the BNC-T (m-f-f) adapter to the AUX7 (CMH) connector on the testhead side
panel. 14. Connect the gray and black leads to the female connectors of a BNC-T (m-f-f) adapter. 15. Connect the male connector of the BNC-T (m-f-f) adapter to the AUX8 (CML) connector on the testhead side
panel. Do not connect the ring terminal lead.
Chapter 4
123
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Connecting Testhead to the Cabinet To Connect DVM (Agilent 3458A) Test Leads
To Connect DVM (Agilent 3458A) Test Leads
This section describes how to connect the digital voltmeter (DVM) test leads between the testhead and the system cabinet. Figure 4-5 shows the system cabinet part locations.
Figure 4-5
Connecting Agilent 3458A to Testhead
System cabinet front side
3458A
System cabinet rear side
Front/Rear terminal switch
Test leads
Testhead power supply
Cable tie
HI To DVM
LO
Test leads connection
H L
AUX5 (DVM-H) AUX6 (DVM-L)
1. Open the rear door of the system cabinet. 2. Connect the test leads (dual-banana plug side) to the Input (2 Wire) HI and LO terminals on the 3458A (DVM)
rear panel. 3. Pull the test lead "H"-labeled cable and "L"-labeled cable out near the bottom rear of the system cabinet. 4. Using a cable tie, secure the cables, as shown in figure 4-5. 5. Close the rear door of the system cabinet. 6. Connect the test lead "H"-labeled cable to the AUX5 (DVM-H) connector on the testhead side panel. 7. Connect the test lead "L"-labeled cable to the AUX6 (DVM-L) connector on the testhead side panel. 8. Set the Front/Rear Terminal switch to the "In" (retracted) position. The switch is located in the upper-right
corner of the 3458A (DVM) front panel.
124
Chapter 4
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Connecting Testhead to the Cabinet To Connect Pulse Generator (Agilent 8110A/81110A/8114A) Test Leads
To Connect Pulse Generator (Agilent 8110A/81110A/8114A) Test Leads
This section describes how to connect the pulse generator test leads between the testhead and the system cabinet.
To Connect Trigger Cables
This section describes how to connect the trigger cable between the pulse generators and the trigger distributor. Figure 4-6 shows an overview of the trigger distributor. Figure 4-7 through figure 4-9 show the pulse generator configuration.
Figure 4-6
Trigger Distributor Overview
PG 1 TRIGGER OUT Oscilloscope TRIGGER IN
BNC-to-BNC cable 115 cm, white
PG 2 TRIGGER OUT
Block 1
OUTPUT SELECT (-> ENABLE)
To EXT INPUT
SW1
PG2
PG2
To TRIGGER OUT
SW2
PG2 PG3
PG3
PG1
PG2
SW3
PG3
PG4
PG4
To PV TRIGGER
PG2
SW4
PG3 PG4
PG5
PG5
Block 2
OUTPUT SELECT (-> ENABLE)
To CLK IN
To TRIGGER OUT
SW5
PG3
PG3
PG2
SW6
PG3 PG4
PG4
PG3
SW7
PG4 PG5
PG5
BNC-to-BNC cable 115 cm, blue
PG 2 EXT INPUT
PG 3 EXT INPUT
PG 4 EXT INPUT
PG 5 EXT INPUT BNC-to-BNC cable 115 cm, yellow
PG 3 CLK INPUT
PG 4 CLK INPUT
PG 5 CLK INPUT
Figure 4-7
To EXT INPUT PG2/3/4
50 feed through 8114A EXT INPUT
Pulse Generator Configuration (with no Agilent 8114A)
EXT INPUT 8110A/81110A
PG5 PLL REF IN / CLK IN
EXT INPUT 8110A/81110A
PG4 PLL REF IN / CLK IN
EXT INPUT 8110A/81110A
PG3 PLL REF IN / CLK IN
EXT INPUT 8110A/81110A
PG2 TRIGGER OUT
8110A/81110A
PG1 TRIGGER OUT
EXT INPUT 8110A/81110A
PG4 PLL REF IN / CLK IN
EXT INPUT 8110A/81110A
PG3 PLL REF IN / CLK IN
EXIT INPUT 8110A/81110A
PG2 TRIGGER OUT
8110A/81110A
PG1 TRIGGER OUT
EXT INPUT 8110A/81110A
PG3 PLL REF IN / CLK IN
EXT INPUT 8110A/81110A
PG2 TRIGGER OUT
8110A/81110A
PG1 TRIGGER OUT
EXT INPUT 8110A/81110A
PG2 TRIGGER OUT
8110A/81110A
PG1 TRIGGER OUT
Chapter 4 Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
8110A/81110A
PG1 TRIGGER OUT
125
Connecting Testhead to the Cabinet To Connect Pulse Generator (Agilent 8110A/81110A/8114A) Test Leads
Figure 4-8
Pulse Generator Configuration (with one Agilent 8114A)
EXT INPUT 8110A/81110A
PG5 PLL REF IN / CLK IN
EXT INPUT 8110A/81110A
PG4 PLL REF IN / CLK IN
EXT INPUT 8110A/81110A
PG3 PLL REF IN / CLK IN
EXT INPUT 8110A/81110A
PG4 PLL REF IN / CLK IN
EXT INPUT 8110A/81110A
PG3 PLL REF IN / CLK IN
EXT INPUT 8110A/81110A
TRIGGER OUT
PG2
TRIGGER OUT
8114A
PG1
EXIT INPUT 8110A/81110A
TRIGGER OUT
PG2
TRIGGER OUT
8114A
PG1
EXT INPUT 8110A/81110A
PG3 PLL REF IN / CLK IN
EXT INPUT 8110A/81110A
TRIGGER OUT
PG2
TRIGGER OUT
8114A
PG1
EXT INPUT 8110A/81110A
TRIGGER OUT
PG2
TRIGGER OUT
8114A
PG1
Figure 4-9
Pulse Generator Configuration (with two Agilent 8114As)
50ohm feed through EXT INPUT
8114A
PG4
EXT INPUT 8110A/81110A
PG3 PLL REF IN / CLK IN
EXIT INPUT 8110A/81110A
TRIGGER OUT
PG2
TRIGGER OUT
8114A
PG1
TRIGGER OUT
8114A
PG1
50ohm feed through EXT INPUT
8114A
PG3
EXT INPUT 8110A/81110A
TRIGGER OUT
PG2
TRIGGER OUT
8114A
PG1
50ohm feed through EXT INPUT
TRIGGER OUT
8114A
PG2
8114A
PG1
1. Open the rear door of the system cabinet.
2. Connect the trigger cable (BNC-to-BNC cable, 115 cm, white) between PG 1 TRIGGER OUT and the terminal (To TRIGGER OUT PG1) on the trigger distributor.
3. (If connecting more than three PGs and the PG 3 is the 8110A or 81110A) Connect the trigger cable (BNC-to-BNC cable, 115 cm, white) between PG 2 TRIGGER OUT and the terminal (To TRIGGER OUT PG2) on the trigger distributor.
4. Connect the trigger cable (BNC-to-BNC cable, 115 cm, blue) between PG 2/3/4/5 EXT INPUT and the terminal (To EXT INPUT PG2/3/4/5) on the trigger distributor.
(For the 8114A) Connect the 50 feed through between the To EXT INPUT terminal and the PG EXT INPUT.
5. (For the 8110A or 81110A) Connect the trigger cable (BNC-to-BNC cable, 115 cm, yellow) between PG 3/4/5 PLL REF IN/CLK IN and the terminal (To CLK IN PG3/4/5) on the trigger distributor.
126
Chapter 4
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Connecting Testhead to the Cabinet To Connect Pulse Generator (Agilent 8110A/81110A/8114A) Test Leads
NOTE
Do not connect the trigger cables to the To EXT INPUT PG2/3/4/5 and To CLK IN PG3/4/5 terminals discontinuously. Connect to the terminals in consecutive order.
6. Set the trigger distributor switches. The trigger distributor switch settings depend on the number of pulse generators connected to the output terminal on the trigger distributor. The settings of the trigger distributor switches are shown in table 4-2.
Table 4-2 Trigger Distributor Switch Settings
Number for 8110A or 81110A
1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2
Number for 8114A
0
1
2
Block 1
Block 2
SW 1 SW 2 SW 3 SW 4 SW 5 SW 6 SW 7 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF
Chapter 4
127
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Connecting Testhead to the Cabinet To Connect Pulse Generator (Agilent 8110A/81110A/8114A) Test Leads
To Connect Signal Cables
This section describes how to connect the signal cables between the pulse generators and the testhead.
1. Open the rear door of the system cabinet.
2. Tie the PG cables with the cable ties and fix them to the frame of the system cabinet at a point 50 cm from the end of the PG cables.
3. Connect the PG cables, as shown in table 4-3, to the output terminals of the pulse generators.
(For the 8110A) Connect the two PG cables (BNC-to-BNC cable, 4.6 m) to the OUTPUT 1 and OUTPUT 2 terminals on the 8110A rear panel.
(For the 81110A) Connect the two PG cables (BNC-to-BNC cable, 4.6 m) to the OUTPUT 1 and OUTPUT 2 terminals on the 81110A front panel.
(For the 8114A) Connect the 8114A-transition time converter cable (50 cm) to the OUTPUT terminal on the 8114A rear panel, and connect to the transition time converter. Then connect the PG cable (BNC-to-BNC cable, 4.6 m) to the transition time converter.
Table 4-3 Pulse Generator Channel Name
Pulse Generator
PG channel 1 PG channel 2a (OUTPUT 1) (OUTPUT 2)
PG 1
PG11
PG12
PG 2
PG21
PG22
PG 3
PG31
PG32
PG 4
PG41
PG42
PG 5
PG51
PG52
a. The 8114A has only one output channel. These labels are not used for the 8114A.
Figure 4-10 Connecting PG Cables (For 8110A and 8114A)
PG cable
OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2
8110A
Transition time converter Cable tie
128
OUTPUT
8114A
8114A-transition time converter cable
Chapter 4 Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Connecting Testhead to the Cabinet To Connect Pulse Generator (Agilent 8110A/81110A/8114A) Test Leads
Figure 4-11 Connecting PG Cables (For Agilent 81110A)
TRIGGER OUTPUT 1
OUT
OUTPUT 2
4. Pass the PG cables through the opening of the rear door of the system cabinet.
5. Wrap the PG cables in a zipper tube using the zip lock sealing tool and attach to the cabinet.
6. Close the rear door of the system cabinet.
7. Connect the PG cables to the HF ports, AUX ports, pulse switch in ports, or pulse switch control ports on the testhead side using the PG cables, 1 to 2 connector, or BNC-triaxial adapter. See figure 4-12.
Use the pulse switch cable (BNC-to-BNC cable), which is included in the integration kit for the first pulse generator, to connect from the pulse switch out port (PSO 1-7) to the HF port or AUX port.
Figure 4-12 Connecting Signal Cables to Testhead Port
to HF port
PG OUTPUT
PG OUTPUT
PG cable (BNC-to-BNC cable)
HF port (1 - 6)
PG cable (BNC-to-BNC cable)
1 to 2 connecter
HF 1 HF 2 HF 3 | or | or |
HF 4 HF 5 HF 6
to AUX port
PG OUTPUT
PG OUTPUT
PG cable (BNC-to-BNC cable)
AUX port (3 - 8)
PG cable
BNC-triaxial
(BNC-to-BNC cable) adapter
AUX port (1 - 2)
to Pulse Switch In, Control
PG cable
PG OUTPUT
(BNC-to-BNC cable)
PSI 11, 12, 21, 31, 41, 51, 52, 61, 62, 71, 72 PSC 1, 2
Chapter 4
129
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Connecting Testhead to the Cabinet To Connect Pulse Generator (Agilent 8110A/81110A/8114A) Test Leads
NOTE
When installing the 4072A/4073A tester, Agilent Technologies recommends connecting the PG cables to the HF ports using the default setting, shown in table 4-4 through table 4-6.
Table 4-4 Default Setting of PG Cable Connections (with no Agilent 8114A)
PG name
PG 1 (8110A or 81110A)
PG 2 (8110A or 81110A)
PG 3 (8110A or 81110A)
PG 4 (8110A or 81110A)
PG 5 (8110A or 81110A)
Output Terminal OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2
PG Cable PG11 PG12 PG21 PG22 PG31 PG32 PG41 PG42 PG51 PG52
HF Port HF1 HF2 HF3 HF4 HF5 HF6
not connected not connected not connected not connected
Table 4-5 Default Setting for PG Cable Connections (with one Agilent 8114A)
PG name
PG 1 (8114A)
PG 2 (8110A or 81110A)
PG 3 (8110A or 81110A)
PG 4 (8110A or 81110A)
PG 5 (8110A or 81110A)
Output Terminal PG Cable
HF Port
OUTPUT
OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2
PG11
PG21 PG22 PG31 PG32 PG41 PG42 PG51 PG52
HF1
HF2 HF3 HF4 HF5 HF6 not connected not connected not connected
130
Chapter 4
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Connecting Testhead to the Cabinet To Connect Pulse Generator (Agilent 8110A/81110A/8114A) Test Leads
Table 4-6 Default Setting for PG Cable Connections (with two Agilent 8114As)
PG name
PG 1 (8114A)
PG 2 (8114A)
Output Terminal OUTPUT
OUTPUT
PG Cable PG11
PG21
HF Port HF1
HF2
PG 1 (8114A)
OUTPUT
PG11
HF1
PG 2
OUTPUT 1
PG21
HF2
(8110A or 81110A)
OUTPUT 2
PG22
HF3
PG 3 (8114A)
OUTPUT
PG31
HF4
PG 1 (8114A)
OUTPUT
PG11
HF1
PG 2
OUTPUT 1
PG21
HF2
(8110A or 81110A)
OUTPUT 2
PG22
HF3
PG 3
OUTPUT 1
PG31
HF4
(8110A or 81110A)
OUTPUT 2
PG32
HF5
PG 4 (HP 8114A)
OUTPUT
PG41
HF6
Chapter 4
131
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Connecting Testhead to the Cabinet To Connect Agilent E4411B Spectrum Analyzer Test Leads
To Connect Agilent E4411B Spectrum Analyzer Test Leads
This section describes how to connect the spectrum analyzer test leads between the testhead and the system cabinet. Figure 4-13 shows the system cabinet part locations.
Figure 4-13 Connecting Agilent E4411B to Testhead Agilent 4072A/4073A's testhead
HF Port
Agilent E4411B spectrum analyzer
4.6m BNC cable
To cabinet rear
From cabinet rear
4.6m BNC cable type N(m) to BNC(f) adapter
1. Open the rear door of the system cabinet. 2. Connect the test leads cable (4.6 m BNC cable) to the 50 input terminals (type N) on the E4411B front panel
with the type N(m)-to-BNC(f) adapter. 3. Pull the test lead cable out near the bottom rear of the system cabinet. 4. Using a cable tie, secure the cables. 5. Close the rear door of the system cabinet. 6. Connect the test lead cable to the HF port connector on the testhead side panel.
132
Chapter 4
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Connecting Testhead to the Cabinet To Check the Testhead Power Supply and Instrument Operation
To Check the Testhead Power Supply and Instrument Operation
Electrical Work Type 3:
WARNING 24 V is forced to the uninsulated parts of the EMO rear panel. Do not touch these parts.
1. Open the rear door of the system cabinet. 2. Verify that the testhead fan protector and the cabinet fan protector are set to the "In" position.
These protectors are located in the front panel of the power distribution unit. 3. Verify that the power outlet protectors are set to the "In" position.
These protectors are located at the instrument power outlets and DVM and CMU power outlets. 4. Connect the power cord between the testhead power supply and an instrument power outlet. 5. Set the main breaker to the ON position. 6. Set the emergency breaker to the ON position. 7. Set the main switch to the ON position. The LINE indicator on the top of the system cabinet turns on. 8. Verify that the over voltage LED turns on. If so, check the source power line. 9. Press the system switch. The green LED in the system switch turns on.
NOTE
Complete steps 7 through 9 within 20 seconds. After 20 seconds, the cabinet fan error LED turns on. Set the main switch to the OFF position and repeat steps 7 through 9.
10. Press the INSTRUMENT POWER ON switch on the top front of the system cabinet. The green LED in the INSTRUMENT POWER ON switch turns on.
11. Turn on the testhead power supply LINE switch and the testhead power switch.
12. Open the front door of the system cabinet.
13. Check the three LEDs (Power, Caution, Error) on the front panel of the testhead power supply. The LEDs are described in table 4-7.
Chapter 4
133
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Connecting Testhead to the Cabinet To Check the Testhead Power Supply and Instrument Operation
Table 4-7 LEDs for the Testhead Power Supply
LEDs
Description
Power Caution [Green] [Yellow]
Error [Red]
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF Normal condition. ON Testhead power supply output is over current. ON Testhead power supply output is over voltage.
Testhead power supply output has insufficient voltage. Temperature in the testhead power supply is too high. OFF Testhead fan has stopped. Testhead fan has slowed down. Fan protector is open. Overheating has occurred inside the testhead.
NOTE
The power (green) LED must be lit for normal 4072A/4073A operation. If the power LED is not lit, see the Agilent 4072A/4073A Service Guide, and troubleshoot the testhead power supply.
CAUTION
Before turning on the 4072A/4073A, verify that the line voltage selector switch for each instrument is set correctly. For instructions on how to set these switches, see the Operation Manual for each instrument.
Make sure that the power cords for the instruments, controller, and peripherals installed in the system cabinet are completely connected to the power outlets.
14. Turn on the instruments (3458A, 4284A, 8110A or 81110A, 8114A, and E4411B). 15. Wait until the power-on self-test execution is completed. 16. Check the power-on self-test results.
NOTE
If you have a self-test failure, see the service manual for the related equipment, and troubleshoot the equipment.
134
Chapter 4
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
5 Setting Up Agilent E3172A/AJ/B and
Agilent E3173A
135 Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Setting Up Agilent E3172A/AJ/B and Agilent E3173A
This chapter describes how to set up the Agilent E3172A/AJ/B and Agilent E3173A system controller for use with the Agilent 4072A/4073A.
HP-UX, SICL, BASIC/UX, 4070 system software, and Agilent SPECS are installed in the E3172A/AJ/B and E3173A at the factory.
NOTE
To install the system software in a system controller other than the E3172A/AJ/B and E3173A, see chapter 6 or appendix C.
This chapter contains the following sections: · "To Set Up Hardware" · "To Check System Controller and Peripheral Operation" · "To Set Up Software"
136
Chapter 5
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Setting Up Agilent E3172A/AJ/B and Agilent E3173A To Set Up Hardware
To Set Up Hardware
This section describes how to set up the E3172A/AJ/B and E3173A system controller on a table.
NOTE
If you rack-mount the system controller or monitor into the system cabinet, see chapter 3.
To set up the E3172A/AJ/B and E3173A on a table, use the following procedure. 1. Place the system controller on the table. 2. Place the monitor on the system controller. 3. Place the keyboard and mouse in front of the system controller. 4. Connect the power cord between the system controller and a controller power outlet. 5. Connect the video cable between the monitor and the system controller. 6. Connect the power cord between the monitor and a controller power outlet. 7. Connect the keyboard and mouse cables to the system controller. 8. Connect the installation site network cable to the LAN connector.
NOTE
Before connecting the LAN cable, you must get an IP address and hostname for the system controller. Contact the installation site's system and network administrator.
9. If there are any SCSI devices outside of the system controller, connect the SCSI cable between the system controller and the SCSI devices. Connect the power cords between the SCSI devices and controller power outlets.
Chapter 5
137
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Setting Up Agilent E3172A/AJ/B and Agilent E3173A To Check System Controller and Peripheral Operation
To Check System Controller and Peripheral Operation
Electrical Work Type 3:
WARNING 24 V is forced to the uninsulated parts of the EMO rear panel. Do not touch these parts.
To check the E3172A/AJ/B and E3173A system controller and peripherals, use the following procedure. 1. Set the main breaker to the ON position. 2. Set the emergency breaker to the ON position. 3. Set the main switch to the ON position. 4. Press the system switch.
NOTE
Complete the step 3 through 4 within 20 seconds. If it exceeds 20 seconds, the cabinet fan error LED turns on. Set the main switch to the OFF position and repeat step 3 through 4.
5. Turn on the system controller and peripherals. 6. Wait until the power-on self-test execution is completed. 7. Check the self-test results.
NOTE
If you have a self-test failure, see the service manual for the related equipment, and troubleshoot the equipment.
138
Chapter 5
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Setting Up Agilent E3172A/AJ/B and Agilent E3173A To Set Up Software
To Set Up Software
This section describes how to set up the software for the E3172A/AJ/B and E3173A system controller. HP-UX, SICL, BASIC/UX, 4070 system software, and SPECS are installed in the E3172A/AJ/B and E3173A system controller at the factory. A common environment is also customized at the factory. For more information regarding customization, see appendix A.
1. Turn on the monitor. 2. Turn on the SCSI devices, if applicable. 3. Turn on the system controller. HP-UX starts up automatically. 4. During start up, the /sbin/set_parms command runs automatically. Select the time zone settings and then
enter the network information, font server setting, and so on, according to the displayed instructions. 5. This setting is optional.
If an automatic wafer prober is used with the 4072A/4073A tester, and the wafer prober address does not match the /etc/opt/hp4070/config/PCONFIG file, edit the PCONFIG file. 6. This setting is optional. If SPECS is used, execute the /home/hpsrvc/config/config.specs command to customize the SPECS environment. For further details, refer to the Agilent SPECS Installation Guide. 7. This setting is optional. If the Agilent E4411B control software is used, install the E4411B control software and customize the E4411B control software environment. For further details, refer to the "Installing E4411B Control Software (Optional)" in chapter 6.
Chapter 5
139
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Setting Up Agilent E3172A/AJ/B and Agilent E3173A To Set Up Software
140
Chapter 5
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
6 Installing Software (for C.03.01)
141 Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for C.03.01)
This chapter describes how to install the Agilent 4070 system software, and includes software customization and other relevant software installation information. This chapter contains the following sections: · "Software Installation Overview" · "System Software Configuration" · "Before Software Installation" · "Installing HP-UX and Other Application Software" · "Customizing for Agilent 4072A/4073A" · "Creating New User Account"
142
Chapter 6
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for C.03.01) Software Installation Overview
Software Installation Overview
Figure 6-1 shows the overall sequence for installing the 4070 system software. Figure 6-1 4070 Software Installation Sequence
START
Is the HP-UX installed?
No Install the HP-UX
Yes
Is the C/ANSI C used?
Yes
Is the C/ANSI C installed?
No
Install the C/ANSI C
Yes No
Is the SICL installed?
No
Install the SICL
Yes
Is
the BASIC/UX
Yes
used?
No
Install the 4070 system software
Is the BASIC/UX
installed?
Yes
Install
No
the BASIC/UX
Customize the HP-UX, SICL, BASIC/UX, and 4070 system software
Is the SPECS
used?
Install and customize
Yes
the SPECS
No
Is the E4411B control software
used?
Install the E4411B Yes control software
No
Customize user environment
END
See Agilent SPECS Installation Guide
Chapter 6
143
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for C.03.01) System Software Configuration
System Software Configuration
Figure 6-2 shows the directory structure for the 4070 system software. Figure 6-2 System Software Directory Structure
/
etc/
opt/
hp4070/
BASIC/
DISP_CONF
config/ 1 DUMCONFIG1 PCONFIG pgconnection refconfig1
diag/ caldata/
limits/
DIAGLbias DIAGLcg DIAGLdvm DIAGLgndu DIAGLleak DIAGLvi PVLbias PVLcg PVLdvm PVLgndu PVLleak PVLmatrix PVLplevel PVLpparam PVLpsw PVLsmui PVLsmur PVLsmuv
uncertainty/
PVUbias PVUcg PVUdvm PVUgndu PVUsmui PVUsmuv
templates
KEY4070 ccdata ccdata0 csh.login hfportmap modelname pgcaldata pmux portmap profile skewdata
opt/
var/
dev/
hp4070/
opt/
hp4070/
linked
hp4070_3.01/ addon/ bin/ BSDM/
hp4070/
diag/
locks/ sessionid synclock1 sysloglock
opt_s1 opt_s1f0 opt_s1f1 opt_s1f2 opt_s1s0 opt_s1s1 opt_s1s2
MAP PPG START cal4070
diag4070 exph4070 hp4070 idp4070
idpcgen offconf4070 pgconn4070 pv4070
setlf sys4070 view4070
sockets/ online
syslog4070
firmware/
fw1.60.bin pflash
help/
help.hv help.hvk help.xrh help00.ht
idp4.tif idp5.tif
include/ CCtis.h f_rom.h idpcgenrt.h
prober.h tis.h wafer.h
lbin/
autologout cal4070Body conf4070 diagBias4070 diagBody4070 diagCG4070 diagConf4070 diagDVM4070 diagGNDU4070 diagHFM4070
diagIso4070 diagLeak4070 diagOpt4070 diagPGc4070 diagPGo4070 diagPGs4070 diagPGW4070 diagRelay4070 diagTH4070 diagTrg4070
diagVI4070 expmon4070 gjet hp4070Body idpParaBody pgconn4070Body pvBias4070 pvBody4070 pvCG4070 pvDvm4070
pvGndu4070 pvHFM4070 pvLeak4070 pvMatrix4070 pvPSW4070 pvPlevel4070 pvPogo4070 pvPparam4070 pvRefR4070 pvRefV4070
pvRelay4070 pvSetup4070 pvSkew4070 pvSmuI4070 pvSmuOutR4070 pvSmuR4070 pvSmuV4070 tis_offline tis_online
lib/
COM4062 TIS
DPROBER TIS4070
DVR4284 TIS_UTIL
EGX
TSK
EGY
TSK90A
F_ROM
WAFER
IDPCGENRT XYGRAPH
MJC
bitmaps
PARA
libdmyprob.a
TEL
libegx.a
libegy.a libf_rom.a libf_rom.sl libf_romB.sl libhp4062.a libhp4070.a libhp4070.sl libhp4070B.sl libhp4070CC.a libhp4070CC.sl
libidpcgenrt.a libmjc.a libprober.a libtel.a libtsk.a nls
newconfig/
!HWP1570.CFG 4070.hp4070env DIAGLbias DIAGLcg DIAGLdvm DIAGLgndu DIAGLleak DIAGLvi DISP_CONF DUMCONFIG1.org
KEY4070 PCONFIG PVLbias PVLcg PVLdvm PVLgndu PVLleak PVLmatrix PVLplevel PVpparam
PVLpsw PVLsmui PVLsmur PVLsmuv PVUbias PVUcg PVUdvm PVUgndu PVUplevel PVUpparam
PVUsmui PVUsmuv cal4070.rf ccdata0 config.org csh.login.hp4070 diag4070.rf exph4070.rf exrc hfportmap.org
hp4070 hp4070.rf init.hp4070 optDrv.o optPCI.o pgcaldata.org pgconnection.org pmux.org portmap.org profile.hp4070
pv4070.rf rc.config.hp4070 rmbrc skewdata.org view4070.rf
src/ libs prober wafer
unsupported/ bin/
CARD_VERIFY optcrc
demo/ src/ README
hp4070_opt newconfig/ optPCI64.o
144
Chapter 6
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for C.03.01) System Software Configuration
· /opt/hp4070 directory This directory contains the 4070 system core software, and is configured with the following directories. bin This directory contains the executable files that you most commonly execute. lbin This directory contains the executable files that are executed by the front end programs. For example, the programs used by the TIS server, diagnostics, and performance verification are stored in this directory. lib This directory contains the library files that are linked to C and BASIC programs. include This directory contains the header files (include files) that are used by C programs and algorithms. newconfig This directory contains the default files. These include not only the system software files but also HP-UX files related to the 4070 system software. The installation tool copies the files from this directory to the appropriate directory when the installation tool is executed. addon The user-made files that control the additional instruments are stored in this directory. When the system software is installed, there are no files in this directory. install This directory contains the installation tools to install the 4070 system software.
· /opt/hp4070_opt directory newconfig This directory contains the optical interface driver for 64-bits.
· /var/opt/hp4070 directory This directory contains the temporary data files and log files used for the 4070 system software, and is configured with the following directories. sockets This directory contains the socket file that is used for communicating between the TIS server and clients. diag This directory contains the log files and data files that are made during the diagnostics and performance verification. locks This directory contains the lock file that is used for making and managing the test session.
Chapter 6
145
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for C.03.01) System Software Configuration
The 4072/4073A system files are explained below:
/opt/hp4070/bin/hp4070
Executed when you run the TIS server, and also executed when you log into the tester environment.
/opt/hp4070/bin/diag4070
Diagnostics file.
/opt/hp4070/bin/pv4070
Performance verification file.
/etc/opt/hp4070/config/1
Information on the system configuration, such as the optical interface slot number, GPIB address for the system instruments, and so on.
/etc/opt/hp4070/config/pgconnection Connection information between the pulse generator and the testhead.
/etc/opt/hp4070/config/refconfig1 System configuration.
/etc/opt/hp4070/config/PCONFIG
Information on the GPIB address for the automatic wafer probers.
/var/opt/hp4070/syslog4070
TIS server logs are added to this file.
/var/opt/hp4070/diag/log
Diagnostics logs are added to this file.
/var/opt/hp4070/diag/DIAGdata
Diagnostics data is overwritten on this file.
/var/opt/hp4070/diag/PVdata
The latest performance verification data is stored in this file; old data files are copied to PVdata_XX.
146
Chapter 6
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for C.03.01) Before Software Installation
Before Software Installation
Before installing the 4070 system software, Agilent Technologies recommends that the following procedures are performed.
· equipment preparation Before installing the system software, you must prepare the equipment, such as the CD-ROM drive and software media. If you install all of the software, you will need to prepare all of the media for the HP-UX, C/ANSI C, HP BASIC, SICL, and 4070 system software.
· file backup If you install the system software on a hard disk that already has data, Agilent Technologies recommends that you back up all existing programs and data.
· contents check If you install the system software on a hard disk that already has data, you must check the contents of the hard disk. The 4070 system software and the Agilent 4062 system software cannot be executed on the same computer (system controller) because the execution environments are different. If the 4062 system software is installed, uninstall it now.
Chapter 6
147
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for C.03.01) Installing HP-UX and Other Application Software
Installing HP-UX and Other Application Software
Minimum and Recommended Requirements
The minimum and recommended requirements for 4072A/4073A operation are as follows. If the system controller does not meet the following conditions, modify the hardware or software conditions.
· hardware requirements Table 6-1
Hardware requirements
System controller
Model C3600 or C3700
Memory
512 MB
HDD Display
9 GB 1024 × 768 1280 × 1024
· software requirements swap size: system configuration: software selection: file name length: logical volume size:
512 Mbyte
Standard LVM
CDE runtime environment
Long
/stand / /tmp /home /opt /usr /var
112 Mbyte 140 Mbyte 64 Mbyte 20 Mbyte 1536 Mbyte 1544 Mbyte 1024 Mbyte
148
Chapter 6
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for C.03.01) Installing HP-UX and Other Application Software
Kernel parameter:
create_fastlinks 1
dnlc_hash_locks 512
fs_async
1
maxdsiz
0xC0000000
maxdsiz_64bit 0x400000000
maxfiles
200
maxfiles_lim
2048
maxssiz
0x04FB3000
maxssiz_64bit 0x10000000
maxsswapchunks 4096
maxtsiz
0x40000000
maxtsiz_64bit 0x100000000
maxuprc
256
maxusers
128
ninode
4000
shmmax
0x40000000
stape
msgtql
256
Compatible OS revisions and application software
The following table shows OS revision and application software compatibility for the Agilent 4072A/4073A. The checked () box indicates the latest 4070 software revision. Table 6-2 Software Revision for C3700
HP-UX C/ANSI C
SICL
BASIC/UX
4070 System Software
Testhead firmware
Configuration Tool
Agilent SPECS
E4411B Control Software
B.11.11 (Sep 2001)
11i-2.1
C.08.04
C.03.01
1.41 1.57
C.01.03
C.02.51 Y.01.22
Table 6-3 Software Revision for C3600
HP-UX C/ANSI C
SICL
BASIC/UX
4070 System Software
Testhead firmware
Configuration Tool
Agilent SPECS
E4411B Control Software
B.11.11 (Jun 2000 or
Sep 2000)
11i-1.0 11i-2.1
C.08.04
C.03.01
1.41 1.57
C.01.03
C.02.51 Y.01.22
NOTE
When you install these software, use the software media provided by the Agilent technologies.
Chapter 6
149
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for C.03.01) Installing HP-UX and Other Application Software
Installing HP-UX 11i
Start up from the HP-UX install and core OS CD-ROM, and install the HP-UX 11i. For further details, refer to the HP-UX 11i Installation and Updating Guide.
The following CD-ROMs are used for installing the HP-UX 11i.
· hp-ux 11i technical computing operating environment 1 of 2 · hp-ux 11i technical computing operating environment 2 of 2 To install the HP-UX 11i, use the following procedures:
1. Insert the HP-UX 11i CD-ROM 1 into the drive.
2. Stop the autoboot by pressing the space key.
You will see the boot console menu.
3. Search for bootable devices, using the choices displayed (for example, enter search or sea). The bootable devices are displayed as below.
Path Number ----------P0 P1
Device Path ----------------IDE SCSI.6.0
Device Type ----------LTN485S SEAGATE ST34572N
4. Boot from the CD-ROM drive using the command as below. Press n for the interact with IPL.
Main Menu: Enter command > bo IDE Interact with IPL (Y, N, Q)?> n
5. The install kernel will be loaded (takes 3-5 minutes), after which the screen prompts you to enter the keyboard language of your console. Enter 26 and press Return and again to confirm. Enter the number of the language you want: 26 Return
You have selected the keyboard language USB_PS2_DIN_US_English. Please confirm your choice by pressing RETURN or enter a new number: Return
6. Choose Install HP-UX in the welcome screen.
7. Choose the following source location and user interface options in the user interface and media options screen and press OK.
Source Location Options:
Media only installation
User Interface Options:
Advanced installation
8. Proceed through each screen to configure the system in the /opt/ignite/bin/itool screen by using the following procedures:
a. Set the swap size, language, locale, and keyboard in the Basic screen as below:
swap size:
512 MB
language:
English or Japanese
locale:
C or ja_JP.SJIS
keyboard:
USB_PS2_DIN_US_English
150
Chapter 6
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for C.03.01) Installing HP-UX and Other Application Software
b. Set the following item in the Software screen.
Ignite-UX-11-11 Yes
c. Set the following items in the System screen.
· hostname
· IP address
· timezone
· date and time
· root password
· subnet mask and default gateway (if needed)
· domain name server (DNS) (if needed)
· network information service (NIS) (if needed)
d. Set the logical volume size as below:
/stand
112 Mbyte
/
140 Mbyte
/tmp
64 Mbyte
/home
20 Mbyte
/opt
1536 Mbyte
/usr
1544 Mbyte
/var
1024 Mbyte
9. Choose Go!.
10. Choose Go! in the confirmation screen.
HP-UX 11i installation starts.
11. About 20 minutes later, the instruction appears to change the media to the HP-UX 11i CD-ROM 2. Change the media and press Return.
12. The system automatically reboots after all software has been loaded.
Chapter 6
151
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for C.03.01) Installing HP-UX and Other Application Software
Installing C/ANSI C
If C/ANSI C is used for measurement program development, also install all C/ANSI C filesets. The following CD-ROM is used for installing the C/ANSI C. · hp-ux 11i application software 2 of 3 To install the C/ANSI C, use the /usr/sbin/swinstall command: 1. Insert the software media (CD-ROM) into the CD-ROM drive. 2. Log in as a superuser (root). 3. Open a dtterm window. 4. Mount the CD-ROM drive on the controller by using the /sbin/mount command. Before mounting, use the
mkdir command to make /SD_CDROM directory if the /SD_CDROM directory does not exist. # mkdir /SD_CDROM # /sbin/mount /dev/dsk/c0t0d0 /SD_CDROM
5. Load the C/ANSI C filesets using the /usr/sbin/swinstall command as follows: a. Type the /usr/sbin/swinstall command. # /usr/sbin/swinstall The SD install and specify source window appear as shown in figure 6-3.
CAUTION The environment variable LANG must be C when you execute the swinstall command. Otherwise, core dump may occur.
Figure 6-3 SD Install and Specify Source Window
152
Chapter 6
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for C.03.01) Installing HP-UX and Other Application Software b. Press OK in the specify source window. The specify source window disappears, and the following window is displayed. Figure 6-4 Note Window
Press OK. Then the C/ANSI C software is displayed in the SD install window. c. Choose Actions: Add codeword... to enter the codeword for C/ANSI C as shown in figure 6-5.
Figure 6-5 SD Install Window for Adding New Codeword
d. Enter the codeword in the following window as shown in figure 6-6. Click OK. Figure 6-6 Codeword Entry Window
Chapter 6
153
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for C.03.01) Installing HP-UX and Other Application Software
e. Choose B3899BA. f. Choose Actions: Install (analysis)... as shown in figure 6-30.
Figure 6-7 SD Install Window with Install Menu
The install analysis window appears as shown in figure 6-31. Figure 6-8 Install Analysis Window
g. Click Logfile... in the install analysis window. The logfile window appears. h. Check for errors in the logfile. If there is an error, stop the installation and troubleshoot. i. Click OK in the logfile window. The logfile window disappears.
154
Chapter 6
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for C.03.01) Installing HP-UX and Other Application Software
j. Click OK on the install analysis window. The software installation begins. This takes about 10 minutes. Figure 6-9 Install Window for Loading Filesets
k. After the software installation is complete, check for errors in the /var/adm/sw/swagent.log file. To check for errors, click Logfile... on the install window as shown in figure 6-10.
Figure 6-10 Install Window for Loading Completed
l. Click OK in the logfile window. The logfile window disappears. m. Click Done in the install window. The install window disappears. n. Choose File: Exit in the swinstall window. 6. Unmount the CD-ROM drive, if necessary, using the /sbin/umount command.
# /sbin/umount /SD_CDROM 7. Remove the software media (CD-ROM) from the CD-ROM drive, and put it in a safe place.
Chapter 6
155
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for C.03.01) Installing HP-UX and Other Application Software
Installing Patches for HP-UX
After loading HP-UX, install the recommended patches. The following CD-ROM is used for installing the HP-UX 11i. · Agilent 4070/SPECS S/W configuration tool To install these patches, use the /usr/sbin/swinstall command. 1. Insert the software media (CD-ROM) into the CD-ROM drive. 2. Log in as a superuser (root). 3. Open a dtterm window. 4. Mount the CD-ROM drive on the controller by using the /sbin/mount command.
# /sbin/mount /dev/dsk/c0t0d0 /SD_CDROM 5. Load the patch filesets using the /usr/sbin/swinstall command, as follows.
a. Type the /usr/sbin/swinstall command. # /usr/sbin/swinstall
The SD install and specify source window appear as shown in figure 6-11.
CAUTION The environment variable LANG must be C when you execute the swinstall command. Otherwise, core dump may occur.
Figure 6-11 SD Install and Specify Source Window
Press OK. Then the patches are displayed in the SD install window. b. Choose Local CD-ROM in the specify source window.
156
Chapter 6
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for C.03.01) Installing HP-UX and Other Application Software
c. Type the source path name in the Source Depot Path.... For example, if the CD-ROM drive is mounted in SD_CDROM, type the name as follows: /SD_CDROM/PATCH11I.UPD;1
d. Choose all patches. e. Choose Actions: Install (analysis)... as shown in figure 6-12.
Figure 6-12 SD Install Window with Install Menu
f. Click OK in the confirmation window as shown in Figure 6-13 Confirmation Window
The install analysis window appears as shown in figure 6-14. Figure 6-14 Install Analysis Window
Chapter 6
157
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for C.03.01) Installing HP-UX and Other Application Software
g. Click Logfile... in the install analysis window. The logfile window appears. h. Verify that there are no errors in the logfile. If there is an error, stop the installation and troubleshoot. i. Click OK in the logfile window. The logfile window disappears. j. Click OK in the install analysis window. The software installation begins. This takes about 5 minutes. 6. After the software installation is complete, the new kernel is automatically rebuilt. This takes about 10 minutes. 7. After rebuilding the new kernel, the controller boot-up automatically.
158
Chapter 6
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for C.03.01) Installing HP-UX and Other Application Software
Installing 4070/SPECS Software Configuration Tool
The following CD-ROM is used for installing the 4070/SPECS software configuration tool. · Agilent 4070/SPECS S/W configuration tool To install these patches, use the /usr/sbin/swinstall command. 1. Insert the software media (CD-ROM) into the CD-ROM drive. 2. Log in as a superuser (root). 3. Open a dtterm window. 4. Mount the CD-ROM drive on the controller by using the /sbin/mount command.
# /sbin/mount /dev/dsk/c0t0d0 /SD_CDROM 5. Load the configuration tool filesets using the /usr/sbin/swinstall command, as follows.
a. Type the /usr/sbin/swinstall command. # /usr/sbin/swinstall
The SD install and specify source window appear as shown in figure 6-20.
CAUTION The environment variable LANG must be C when you execute the swinstall command. Otherwise, core dump may occur.
Figure 6-15 SD Install and Specify Source Window
b. Choose Local CD-ROM in the specify source window.
c. Type the source path name in the Source Depot Path.... For example, if the CD-ROM drive is mounted in SD_CDROM, type the name as follows:
/SD_CDROM/HPCONFIG.UPD;1
Chapter 6
159
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for C.03.01) Installing HP-UX and Other Application Software
d. Press OK in the specify source window. The specify source window disappears, and the configuration tool software is displayed in the SD install window as shown in figure 6-16. Figure 6-16 SD Install Window with Configuration Tool Software
e. Choose HPCONFIGTOOL. f. Choose Actions: Install (analysis)... as shown in figure 6-17.
Figure 6-17 SD Install Window with Install Menu
The install analysis window appears as shown in figure 6-18.
160
Chapter 6
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Figure 6-18 Install Analysis Window
Installing Software (for C.03.01) Installing HP-UX and Other Application Software
g. Click Logfile... in the install analysis window. The logfile window appears. h. Verify that there are no errors in the logfile. If there is an error, stop the installation and troubleshoot. i. Click OK in the logfile window. The logfile window disappears. j. Click OK in the install analysis window. The software installation begins. This takes about 5 minutes. k. After the software installation is complete, verify that there are no errors in the
/var/adm/sw/swagent.log file. To check for errors, click Logfile... in the install window as shown in figure 6-23.
Figure 6-19 Install Window for Loading Completed
l. Click OK in the logfile window. The logfile window disappears. m. Click Done in the install window. The install window disappears. n. Choose File: Exit in the swinstall window. 6. Unmount the CD-ROM drive, if necessary, using the /sbin/umount command.
# /sbin/umount /SD_CDROM 7. Remove the software media (CD-ROM) from the CD-ROM drive, and put it in a safe place.
Chapter 6
161
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for C.03.01) Installing HP-UX and Other Application Software
Installing SICL
The following CD-ROM is used for installing the SICL. · TAMS I/O Libraries For HP-UX 11i To install SICL, use the /usr/sbin/swinstall command: 1. Insert the software media (CD-ROM) into the CD-ROM drive. 2. Log in as a superuser (root). 3. Open a dtterm window. 4. Mount the CD-ROM drive on the controller by using the /sbin/mount command.
# /sbin/mount /dev/dsk/c0t0d0 /SD_CDROM 5. Load the SICL filesets using the /usr/sbin/swinstall command, as follows.
a. Type the /usr/sbin/swinstall command. # /usr/sbin/swinstall
The SD install and specify source window appear as shown in figure 6-20.
CAUTION The environment variable LANG must be C when you execute the swinstall command. Otherwise, core dump may occur.
Figure 6-20 SD Install and Specify Source Window
Press OK. Then the SICL software is displayed in the SD install window.
162
Chapter 6
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for C.03.01) Installing HP-UX and Other Application Software
b. Choose T72091-32-64. c. Choose Actions: Install (analysis)... as shown in figure 6-21.
Figure 6-21 SD Install Window with Install Menu
The install analysis window appears as shown in figure 6-22. Figure 6-22 Install Analysis Window
d. Click Logfile... in the install analysis window. The logfile window appears. e. Verify that there are no errors in the logfile. If there is an error, stop the installation and troubleshoot. f. Click OK in the logfile window. The logfile window disappears. g. Click OK in the install analysis window. The software installation begins. This takes about 15 minutes.
Chapter 6
163
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for C.03.01) Installing HP-UX and Other Application Software
h. After the software installation is complete, verify that there are no errors in the /var/adm/sw/swagent.log file. To check for errors, click Logfile... in the install window as shown in figure 6-23. Figure 6-23 Install Window for Loading Completed
i. Click OK in the logfile window. The logfile window disappears. j. Click Done in the install window. The install window disappears. k. Choose File: Exit in the swinstall window. 6. Unmount the CD-ROM drive, if necessary, using the /sbin/umount command.
# /sbin/umount /SD_CDROM 7. Remove the software media (CD-ROM) from the CD-ROM drive, and put it in a safe place.
164
Chapter 6
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for C.03.01) Installing HP-UX and Other Application Software
Installing BASIC/UX
The following CD-ROM is used for installing the BASIC/UX. · RMB/UX v.8.04 To install BASIC/UX software, use the /usr/sbin/swinstall command.
NOTE
Before installing BASIC/UX, go to the Read Me Before Installing BASIC/UX manual, which contains some important information for the currently released BASIC/UX.
1. Insert the software media (CD-ROM) into the CD-ROM drive. 2. Log in as a superuser (root). 3. Open a dtterm window. 4. Mount the CD-ROM drive on the controller by using the /sbin/mount command.
# /sbin/mount /dev/dsk/c0t0d0 /SD_CDROM 5. Load the HP BASIC/UX filesets using the /usr/sbin/swinstall command, as follows.
a. Type the /usr/sbin/swinstall command. # /usr/sbin/swinstall
The SD install and specify source window appear as shown in figure 6-24.
CAUTION The environment variable LANG must be C when you execute the swinstall command. Otherwise, core dump may occur.
Figure 6-24 SD Install and Specify Source Window
Press OK. Then the HP BASIC/UX software is displayed in the SD install window.
Chapter 6
165
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for C.03.01) Installing HP-UX and Other Application Software
b. Choose TAMS2047. c. Choose Action: Install (analysis)... as shown in figure 6-25.
Figure 6-25 SD Install Window with Install Menu
The install analysis window appears as shown in figure 6-26. Figure 6-26 Install Analysis Window
d. Click Logfile... in the install analysis window. The logfile window appears. e. Verify that there are no errors in the logfile. If there is an error, stop the installation and troubleshoot. f. Click OK in the logfile window. The logfile window disappears. g. Click OK in the install analysis window. The software installation begins. This takes about 5 minutes.
166
Chapter 6
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for C.03.01) Installing HP-UX and Other Application Software h. After the software installation is complete, verify that there are no errors in the /var/adm/sw/swagent.log file. To check for errors, click Logfile... in the install window as shown in figure 6-27. Figure 6-27 Install Window for Loading Completed
i. Click OK in the logfile window. The logfile window disappears. j. Click Done in the install window. The install window disappears. k. Choose File: Exit in the swinstall window. 6. Unmount the CD-ROM drive, if necessary, using the /sbin/umount command.
# /sbin/umount /SD_CDROM 7. Remove the software media (CD-ROM) from the CD-ROM drive, and put it in a safe place.
Chapter 6
167
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for C.03.01) Installing HP-UX and Other Application Software
Installing 4070 System Software
The following CD-ROM is used for installing the Agilent 4070 system software and optical interface card driver. · Agilent 4070 system software To install the 4070 system software, use the /usr/sbin/swinstall command: 1. Insert the software media (CD-ROM) into the CD-ROM drive. 2. Log in as a superuser (root). 3. Open a dtterm window. 4. Mount the CD-ROM drive on the 4070 system controller using the /sbin/mount command.
# /sbin/mount /dev/dsk/c0t0d0 /SD_CDROM 5. Load the 4070 system software filesets using the /usr/sbin/swinstall command, as follows.
a. Type the /usr/sbin/swinstall command as a superuser. # /usr/sbin/swinstall
The SD install and specify source window appear as shown in figure 6-28.
CAUTION The environment variable LANG must be C when you execute the swinstall command. Otherwise, core dump may occur.
Figure 6-28 SD Install and Specify Source Window
b. Choose Local CD-ROM in the specify source window.
c. Type the source path name in the Source Depot Path.... For example, if the CD-ROM drive is mounted in SD_CDROM, type the name as follows:
/SD_CDROM/HP4070.UPD;1
168
Chapter 6
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for C.03.01) Installing HP-UX and Other Application Software
d. Press OK in the specify source window. The specify source window disappears, and the 4070 system software is displayed in the SD install window as shown in figure 6-29. Figure 6-29 SD Install Window with 4070 System Software
e. Choose HP4070SYS. f. Choose Actions: Install (analysis)... as shown in figure 6-30.
Figure 6-30 SD Install Window with Install Menu
The install analysis window appears as shown in figure 6-31.
Chapter 6
169
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for C.03.01) Installing HP-UX and Other Application Software
Figure 6-31 Install Analysis Window
g. Click Logfile... in the install analysis window. The logfile window appears. h. Verify that there are no errors in the logfile. If there is an error, stop the installation and troubleshoot. i. Click OK in the logfile window. The logfile window disappears. j. Click OK in the install analysis window. The software installation begins. This takes about 5 minutes. k. After the software installation is complete, Verify that there are no errors in the
/var/adm/sw/swagent.log file. To check for errors, click Logfile... in the install window as shown in figure 6-32.
Figure 6-32 Install Window for Loading Completed
l. Click OK in the logfile window. The logfile window disappears. m. Click Done in the install window. The install window disappears. n. Choose Action: Change Source.... The confirmation window appears as shown in figure 6-33.
Figure 6-33 Confirmation Window
170
Chapter 6
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for C.03.01) Installing HP-UX and Other Application Software o. Click Yes. The SD install and specify source window appear as shown in figure 6-34. Figure 6-34 SD Install and Specify Source Window
p. Choose Local CD-ROM in the specify source window. q. Type the source path name in the Source Depot Path.... For example, if the CD-ROM drive is mounted in
SD_CDROM, type the name as follows: /SD_CDROM/HPOPTPCI64.UPD;1
Chapter 6
171
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for C.03.01) Installing HP-UX and Other Application Software
r. Press OK in the specify source window. The specify source window disappears, and the 4070 system software is displayed in the SD install window as shown in figure 6-35. Figure 6-35 SD Install Window with 4070 System Software
s. Choose HPOPTPCI64. t. Choose Action: Install (analysis)... as shown in figure 6-36.
Figure 6-36 SD Install Window with Install Menu
The install analysis window appears as shown in figure 6-31.
172
Chapter 6
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Figure 6-37 Install Analysis Window
Installing Software (for C.03.01) Installing HP-UX and Other Application Software
u. Click Logfile... in the install analysis window. The logfile window appears. v. Verify that there are no errors in the logfile. If there is an error, stop the installation and troubleshoot. w. Click OK in the logfile window. The logfile window disappears. x. Click OK in the install analysis window. The software installation begins. This takes about 5 minutes. y. After the software installation is complete, Verify that there are no errors in the
/var/adm/sw/swagent.log file. To check for errors, click Logfile... in the install window as shown in figure 6-38.
Figure 6-38 Install Window for Loading Completed
z. Click OK in the logfile window. The logfile window disappears. aa. Click Done in the install window. The install window disappears. ab. Choose File: Exit in the swinstall window. 6. Unmount the CD-ROM drive, if necessary, using the /sbin/umount command. 7. Remove the software media (CD-ROM) from the CD-ROM drive, and put it in a safe place.
Chapter 6
173
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for C.03.01) Customizing for Agilent 4072A/4073A
Customizing for Agilent 4072A/4073A
Figure 6-39 shows the customization flow for the Agilent 4072A/4073A. Figure 6-39 Agilent 4072A/4073A Customization Flow
START
Step1.
øõCõõ
Customizing HP-UX ùõLC
Step2. Configuring SICL
and installing GPIB interface
øõCõ
Step3. Customizing BASIC/UX
øõCõõ
Step4. Customizing for Japanese environment (optional)
Step5. Customizing 4070 system software
End
øõCõiõ
øõLõ ùõCõ úõõ ûõCöööû÷þ÷ööøõ üõCöööû÷þ÷ööcõïð ýõCöööû÷þ÷ööõïðõ þõCööû÷þ÷ööõ ÿõCõ
174
Chapter 6
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for C.03.01) Customizing for Agilent 4072A/4073A
Step 1. Customizing HP-UX
Executing config.hpux Command
To customize HP-UX for the 4072A/4073A, execute the /home/hpsrvc/config/config.hpux command. This command executes the following:
· Drivers are added to kernel as follows.
stape
· Kernel parameters are modified as follows.
create_fastlinks 1
dnlc_hash_locks 512
fs_async
1
maxdsiz
0xC0000000
maxdsiz_64bit 0x400000000
maxfiles
200
maxfiles_lim
2048
maxssiz
0x04FB3000
maxssiz_64bit 0x10000000
maxsswapchunks 4096
maxtsiz
0x40000000
maxtsiz_64bit 0x100000000
maxuprc
256
maxusers
128
ninode
4000
shmmax
0x40000000
msgtql
256
· The HP-UX kernel is rebuilt and placed in /stand/system after the previous kernel is backed up as /stand/vmunix.prev.
· The HP-UX system configuration information is placed in /stand/system after the previous information is backed up as /stand/vmunix.prev.
NOTE
A reboot is required to make the new kernel effective.
Customizing the Common Desktop Environment (CDE)
Agilent Technologies recommends that you customize the /usr/dt/config/C/sys.resources (for English) or /usr/dt/config/ja_JP.SJIS/sys.resources (for Japanese) command as follows:
: dtsession*lockTimeout: 0
Change "30" to "0"
:
NOTE
If you do not customize this setting, the display is automatically locked by the CDE with the password.
Chapter 6
175
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for C.03.01) Customizing for Agilent 4072A/4073A
Step 2. Configuring SICL and Installing GPIB Interface
To configure the SICL and install the GPIB interface for the 4072A/4073A, use the following procedure. If you configure another interface, refer to HP I/O Libraries Installation and Configuration Guide for HP-UX, Installing and Using HP BASIC/UX 8.0, or the Installation Guide for each interface.
NOTE
When using the C3600/C3700 system controller, use one Agilent E2078A for the 4072A/4073A control and one E2078A for wafer prober control.
Executing the iosetup Command 1. Execute the /opt/sicl/bin/iosetup command as follows.
# /opt/sicl/bin/iosetup The I/O setup for the HP-UX window appears as shown in figure 6-40.
Figure 6-40 I/O Setup for HP-UX Window
176
Chapter 6
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for C.03.01) Customizing for Agilent 4072A/4073A
2. When using the C3600/C3700 system controller, set up the GPIB interface using the following procedure. a. Double-click E2078 High Speed HP-IB (PCI). The E2078 high speed HP-IB configuration window appears as shown in figure 6-41. Figure 6-41 Agilent E2078 High Speed HP-IB Configuration Window
Chapter 6
177
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for C.03.01) Customizing for Agilent 4072A/4073A
b. Set each parameter as shown in the following example. The following table shows the example for the E2078 GPIB card. Table 6-4 Example of parameter for PCI GPIB card
Controller Logical unit number Symbolic name PCI slot Serial number
GPIB bus address System controller
Model C3600/C3700
7 hpib7
4 This number is printed on the
interface card. 21 Yes
c. Click OK.
d. Repeat steps a through c to set up the secondary GPIB interface, and use suitable parameters as shown in the following example. Table 6-5 Example of parameter for 2nd PCI GPIB card
Controller Logical unit number Symbolic name PCI slot Serial number
GPIB bus address System controller
Model C3600/C3700
25 hpib25
6 This number is printed on the
interface card. 21 Yes
178
Chapter 6
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for C.03.01) Customizing for Agilent 4072A/4073A
3. Choose File: Build... to rebuild the kernel as shown in figure 6-42. Figure 6-42 I/O Setup for HP-UX Window with File Menu
The accept configuration window appears as shown in figure 6-43. Figure 6-43 Accept Configuration Window
Chapter 6
179
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for C.03.01) Customizing for Agilent 4072A/4073A
4. Click OK in the accept configuration window. The accept configuration window disappears, and the build kernel window appears as shown in figure 6-44. Figure 6-44 Build Kernel Window
5. Click OK. The new kernel is automatically rebuilt. This takes about 15 minutes. 6. After creating the new kernel, shut down HP-UX using the /sbin/shutdown command. 7. Turn off the system controller after the shutdown process is completed. 8. Install the GPIB interface card(s) into the system controller PCI slot. 9. Turn on the system controller and boot-up the HP-UX operating system.
NOTE
Ignore the following message appears during the kernel is rebuilt.
sed: Function s/^[ ]*/char HPUX_Support_../../../etc/opt/sicl/libsicldrvr.a[]="@(#) / cannot be parsed.
180
Chapter 6
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for C.03.01) Customizing for Agilent 4072A/4073A
Step 3. Customizing BASIC/UX
To customize BASIC/UX for the 4072A/4073A, execute the /home/hpsrvc/config/config.rmb command. This command executes the following:
· The /etc/dt/config/Xsession.d/0000.rmb file is created for the CDE. The colormap and xmodmap information is described in this file.
· The /etc/X11/rgb.txt file is modified to include colors predefined by BASIC/UX. Also, the /usr/bin/X11/rgb command is executed using the /etc/X11/rgb.txt file.
· The /usr/bin/X11/xmodmap is executed to recognize the combinations between the computer and keyboard.
· The /opt/rmb/rmb8_04/newconfig/Rmb file (for revision C.08.04) is copied to /usr/lib/X11/app-defaults/Rmb.
Step 4. Customizing for Japanese Environment (Optional)
To customize for a Japanese environment, execute the /home/hpsrvc/config/config.kanji command. This command executes the following: The /etc/dt/config/Xsession.d/9000.kanji file has been created for the CDE.
#!/usr/bin/ksh if [ $LANG = 'ja_JP.SJIS' ] || [ $LANG = 'ja_JP.eucJP' ]; then
/usr/bin/X11/xmodmap -e 'keycode 34 = Meta_L' fi
Step 5. Customizing 4070 System Software
To customize the 4070 system software, execute the /home/hpsrvc/config/config.4070 command. This command customizes the /etc/opt/rmb/rmb8_04rc (for revision C.08.04) and executes the /opt/hp4070/install/install command. For further details, see "Customizing rmbrc File" and "Executing install Command".
Customizing rmbrc File
The /etc/opt/rmb/rmb8_04 (for revision C.08.04) is automatically customized by the /home/hpsrvc/config/config.4070 command.
: 770 ! WORKSPACE = 4M
This line is automatically modified by config.4070.
: 1520 ! SHL_SEARCH /opt/hp4070/lib This line is automatically modified by config.4070.
:
Chapter 6
181
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for C.03.01) Customizing for Agilent 4072A/4073A
Executing install Command The /opt/hp4070/install/install command is executed using the /home/hpsrvc/config/config.4070 command. The install command integrates the optical interface driver into the HP-UX kernel.
NOTE
Before executing the install command, remove all of the opt_s3* files from /dev/hp4070 directory, because these files are not re-created. However these files are automatically created in the above directory when you execute the install command.
1. When using the C3600/C3700 system controller, the following messages is displayed. bus type: PCI
2. The following message is displayed: The new kernel is now ready. Is it ok to reconfigure the HP-UX kernel [y or n] ?
3. To reconfigure the kernel, type y, then press Return. 4. When the kernel reconfiguration is completed, the following message is displayed:
Is it ok to update the content of /stand/system according to the present kernel configuration [y or n; default y] ? 5. To update the /stand/system file, type y, then press Return. 6. When the update is complete, the following message is displayed: Do you want to shutdown the system now [y or n] ? 7. To shut down the system controller, type y, then press Return. 8. After the shutdown process is complete, turn off the system controller.
NOTE
After executing the install process, the install command updates the /tmp/hp4070.log file. Check this file for any errors that may have occurred.
NOTE
Ignore the following message appears during the kernel is rebuilt.
sed: Function s/^[ ]*/char HPUX_Support_../../../etc/opt/sicl/libsicldrvr.a[]="@(#) / cannot be parsed.
182
Chapter 6
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for C.03.01) Customizing for Agilent 4072A/4073A
Installing Optical Interface Card This section describes how to install the optical interface card. If you install the optical interface card in the C3600/C3700 system controller, use the following procedure. 1. Make sure that the shutdown process was complete, then turn off the system controller. 2. Remove the cables and power cord from the rear panel of the system controller. 3. If the system controller is mounted in the system cabinet, unmount it from the system cabinet. 4. Remove the front panel and side cover as shown in figure 6-45.
Figure 6-45 Removing Front Panel and Side Cover (C3600/C3700)
Front panel lock
Latch button T-15 Torx thumbscrew
Safety interlock swtich
Hinge slot
EMI gasket
Safety interlock release pin
Chapter 6
183
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for C.03.01) Customizing for Agilent 4072A/4073A
5. Remove the blank panel from the PCI slot position where you will install the optical interface card. This should be the same slot used to execute the install command.
6. Insert the optical interface card into the PCI slot 3 as shown in figure 6-46.
NOTE
The graphical interface card is already installed into PCI slot 2. Don't move or remove this card. This card only works correctly in PCI slot 2.
Figure 6-46 Optical Interface Card Installation (C3600/C3700)
Slot 1
Slot 6
Optical interface card
7. Reinstall the side cover and front panel. 8. If the system controller is mounted in the system cabinet, slide and secure the system controller with the rack
flanges, using torx screws. 9. Connect the cables and power cord to the system controller. 10. Connect the optical fiber cables from the testhead to the optical interface board as follows.
a. Connect the "In" cable to the "IN" connector. b. Connect the "Out" cable to the "OUT" connector. 11. Turn on and start up the system controller.
184
Chapter 6
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for C.03.01) Customizing for Agilent 4072A/4073A
Editing /etc/opt/hp4070/config/1 File
This customization is optional. If the system configuration does not match the standard configuration, you must edit the /etc/opt/hp4070/config/1 file. Change the file to match the system configuration. Figure 6-47 shows the default setting for the /etc/opt/hp4070/config/1 file.
Figure 6-47 The /etc/opt/hp4070/config/1 File
# Agilent 4070 configuration file # lines beginnign with '#' is comment line
# version: this file format version version:2
# testhead.slot: Opt I/F card slot number of HOST computer # testhead.timeout: Opt I/F interrupt time value (DO NOT CHANGE) testhead.slot:3 testhead.timeout:100000
# hpibif.total: number of GPIB I/F card # hpibif.NO.address: GPIB IF address of NO-th card # hpibif.timeout: GPIB timeout value (DO NOT CHANGE) hpibif.total:1 hpibif.1.address:7 hpibif.timeout:5000000
# cmu84.exist: 4284A existence (1: exist, 0: not-exist) # cmu84.hpibif.address: GPIB IF address connected to 4284A # cmu84.busaddress: 4284A GPIB bus address # cmu84.cable: cable length of 4284A (1 or 4) cmu84.exist:1 cmu84.hpibif.address:7 cmu84.busaddress:17 cmu84.cable:4
# dvm3458.1.exist: 3458A existence (1: exist, 0: not-exist) # dvm3458.1.hpibif.address: GPIB IF address connected to 3458A # dvm3458.1.busaddress: 3458A GPIB bus address dvm3458.1.exist:1 dvm3458.1.hpibif.address:7 dvm3458.1.busaddress:22
# hfmatrix: HF Matrix existence (1: exist, 0: not-exist) hfmatrix:1 # pulsemux: Pulse Switch #1/#2 existence (1: exist, 0: not-exist) pulsemux:1
# pgName.pgNo.hpibIFaddr.hpibBusaddr:existence
# pgName = pg8110 or pg8114 or pg81110
# pgNo = PG logical number (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7)
#
PG of PGNo=1 is always needed.
# hpibIFaddr = GPIB IF address connected to the PG
# hpibBusaddr = the PG GPIB bus address
# existence = the PG existence (1: exist, 0: not-exist)
pg8110.1.7.10:1 pg8110.2.7.11:1 pg8110.3.7.12:1 pg8110.4.7.13:1 pg8110.5.7.14:1
Chapter 6
185
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for C.03.01) Customizing for Agilent 4072A/4073A
Editing /etc/opt/hp4070/config/PCONFIG File
This customization is optional. If an automatic wafer prober is used with the 4072A/4073A, the GPIB address for the automatic wafer prober must be set. Agilent Technologies recommends that the GPIB address be set to the default address included in the /etc/opt/hp4070/config/PCONFIG file. Figure 6-48 shows the default setting for the /etc/opt/hp4070/config/PCONFIG file. To change the GPIB address setting in the system software, edit the file. The GPIB address is expressed by a 4-digit number, xxyy, where:
· xx: logical unit number · yy: GPIB address of wafer prober
Figure 6-48 The /etc/opt/hp4070/config/PCONFIG File
1000 !! RE-SAVE "/etc/opt/hp4070/config/PCONFIG"
1010 !!
1020 !
1030 ! WPS EG1034X 2501
1040 ! WPS EG2001X 2502
1050 ! WPS TEL4000A 2503
1060 ! WPS TEL4400A 2503
1070 ! WPS TEL19S
2503
1080 ! WPS TEL20S
2503
1090 ! WPS APM3000A 2505
1100 ! WPS APM6000A 2505
1110 ! WPS APM7000A 2505
1120 ! WPS SP900B
2508
1130 ! WPS SP1000B 2508
1140 ! WPS SP1100B 2508
186
Chapter 6
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for C.03.01) Customizing for Agilent 4072A/4073A
Editing /etc/opt/hp4070/config/pgconnection File This customization is optional. The /etc/opt/hp4070/config/pgconnection file includes the information of the cable connections between the pulse generators and testhead ports. To change the file to match the connection configuration, use the /opt/hp4070/bin/pgconn4070 command.
NOTE
To execute the /opt/hp4070/bin/pgconn4070, the TIS online session must be running.
Figure 6-49 shows the sample of /etc/opt/hp4070/config/pgconnection file.
Figure 6-49 The /etc/opt/hp4070/config/pgconnection File
# Agilent 4070 Pulse Generator Connection File # Format Revision 1.0 # lines beginning with '#' are comment lines # DVM or CMU are not handled in this file # DO NOT CHANGE ABOVE LINES
THF1: THF2: THF3:
HF1: HF2: HF3: HF4: HF5: HF6:
AUX1: AUX2: AUX3: AUX4: AUX5: AUX6: AUX7: AUX8:
PSI11: PSI12: PSI21: PSI31: PSI41: PSI51: PSI61: PSI62: PSI71: PSI72:
PSC1: PSC2:
Chapter 6
187
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for C.03.01) Customizing for Agilent 4072A/4073A
Executing /opt/hp4070/install/configure Command Execute the configure command after installing the optical interface card into the system controller and customizing the /etc/rc file, /etc/opt/hp4070/config/1 file (optional), and /etc/opt/hp4070/config/PCONFIG file (optional). To execute the configure command, use the following procedure. This command confirms the 4072A/4073A tester configuration, measures the capacitance compensation data, and sets the line frequency.
NOTE
Before executing the configure command, the testhead conditions must be as follows: · The TIS server must be worked. · The wafer prober sense switch must be pushed. · The interlock pins on the testhead must be shorted. · The measurement pins must be open.
1. Turn on the 4072A/4073A and all system instruments. Do not forget to turn on the testhead power supply and testhead.
2. If an 4284A is configured with the 4072A/4073A, connect the Agilent 16048E test lead between the 4284A and the testhead.
3. Log in as a superuser (root). 4. Open a dtterm window. 5. Type the configure command as follows:
# /opt/hp4070/install/configure 6. The 4072A/4073A tester configuration and the following message are displayed:
Please check the system configuration recognized by the system software. Is the above configuration correct [y or n] ? If the configuration is correct, type y, then press Return. If the configuration is not correct, type n, press Return, then check the following:
· Is the 4072A/4073A (testhead and all system instruments) turned on? · Are the optical fiber cables connected between the optical interface card and the testhead? · Are the GPIB cables connected between the system controller and the system instruments? If any mistakes are found, correct them, then re-execute the configure command. 7. The line frequency set for the testhead and the following message are displayed:
Is the above line frequency (Power Line Cycle) correct [y or n] ?
· If the line frequency is correct, type y, then press Return. · If the line frequency is incorrect, type n, press Return, and then type the correct line frequency.
188
Chapter 6
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for C.03.01) Customizing for Agilent 4072A/4073A
8. The following message is displayed:
Do you want to perform capacitance compensation parameter measurement right now [y or n] ?
· If an 4284A is configured with the 4072A/4073A, type y, then press Return to execute the capacitance compensation parameter measurement.
· If an 4284A is not configured, or the 4284A does not need the capacitance compensation parameter measurement, type n, then press Return.
9. After finishing the configure command execution, the following message is displayed:
*********************************************************
*
*
* Agilent 4070 system software configuration completed. *
* Now the system is ready to use.
*
*
*
*********************************************************
Chapter 6
189
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for C.03.01) Customizing for Agilent 4072A/4073A
Customizing for Pulse Generator If the pulse generator is to be installed newly or reconfigured, perform the following: 1. Edit the /etc/opt/hp4070/config/1 file 2. Execute the /opt/hp4070/install/configure command 3. Perform the pulse level calibration
To perform the pulse level calibration, use the /opt/hp4070/bin/cal4070 command. For more information, see the Agilent 4072A/4073A Calibration Guide.
190
Chapter 6
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for C.03.01) Customizing for Agilent 4072A/4073A
Installing E4411B Control Software (Optional)
The following CD-ROM is used for installing the E4411B control software. · Agilent 4070 series spectrum analyzer control software To install the E4411B control software, use the /usr/sbin/swinstall command:
Loading E4411B Control Software 1. Insert the software media (CD-ROM) into the CD-ROM drive. 2. Log in as a superuser (root). 3. Open a dtterm window. 4. Mount the CD-ROM drive on the controller by using the /sbin/mount command.
# /sbin/mount /dev/dsk/c0t0d0 /SD_CDROM 5. Load the E4411B control software filesets using the /usr/sbin/swinstall command, as follows.
a. Type the /usr/sbin/swinstall command. # /usr/sbin/swinstall
The SD install and specify source window appear as shown in figure 6-50.
CAUTION The environment variable LANG must be C when you execute the swinstall command. Otherwise, core dump may occur.
Figure 6-50 SD Install and Specify Source Window
b. Choose Local CD-ROM on the specify source window.
Chapter 6
191
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for C.03.01) Customizing for Agilent 4072A/4073A
c. Type the source path name in the Source Depot Path.... For example, if the CD-ROM drive is mounted in SD_CDROM, type the name as follows: /SD_CDROM/HP4070_E4411BDVRY0122.DEPOT;1
d. Press OK in the specify source window. The specify source window disappears, and the E4411B control software is displayed in the SD install window as shown in figure 6-51. Figure 6-51 SD Install Window with 4070 System Software
e. Choose HP4070_E4411BDVR. f. Choose Actions: Install (analysis)... as shown in figure 6-52.
Figure 6-52 SD Install Window with Install Menu
192
Chapter 6
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for C.03.01) Customizing for Agilent 4072A/4073A g. Click OK in the confirmation window as shown in figure 6-53. Figure 6-53 Confirmation Window
The install analysis window appears as shown in figure 6-54. Figure 6-54 Install Analysis Window
h. Click Logfile... in the install analysis window. The logfile window appears. i. Verify that there are no errors in the logfile. If there is an error, stop the installation and troubleshoot. j. Click OK in the logfile window. The logfile window disappears. k. Click OK in the install analysis window. The software installation begins. This takes about 10 minutes.
Chapter 6
193
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for C.03.01) Customizing for Agilent 4072A/4073A
l. After the software installation is complete, verify that there are no errors in the /var/adm/sw/swagent.log file. To check for errors, click Logfile... in the install window as shown in figure 6-55.
Figure 6-55 Install Window for Loading Completed
m. Click OK in the logfile window. The logfile window disappears. n. Click Done in the install window. The install window disappears. o. Choose File: Exit in the swinstall window. 6. Unmount the CD-ROM drive, if necessary, using the /sbin/umount command.
# /sbin/umount /SD_CDROM 7. Remove the software media (CD-ROM) from the CD-ROM drive, and put it in a safe place.
Customizing E4411B Control Software
1. Set up the E4411B spectrum analyzer GPIB address file with the command: # /opt/ringosc/setup_e4411b_hpib
This script requires to enter the GPIB address of the E4411B. The default GPIB address of the spectrum analyzer is 718. The script creates the /opt/ringosc/config file, which is referred to by the start program calibration script. 2. Edit each user's profile to change the PCS_ADDON_TIMEOUT value. Add the following line in the $HOME/.dtprofile.
export PCS_ADDON_TIMEOUT=60 If the DTSOURCEPROFILE parameter in .dtprofile is defined as true, add the above line to the user's .profile or .login, depending on the shell type of the user. Note that it must be set to 60. Otherwise, the /opt/hp4070/addon/start script does not run correctly. If you load the spectrum analyzer control software before installing Agilent SPECS, simply re-install the spectrum analyzer control software. 3. Log out and log in the user environment to active the PCS_ADDON_TIMEOUT value.
194
Chapter 6
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for C.03.01) Customizing for Agilent 4072A/4073A
Verifying E4411B Control Software Installation
1. Start TIS server with the command:
# /opt/hp4070/bin/hp4070 -start When the TIS server starts, the /opt/hp4070/addon/start program is executed. The /opt/hp4070/addon/start program verifies the existence of the E4411B, and then calibrates it. The start log is recorded in the /opt/ringosc/syslogE4411BDVR file. 2. Check that there is no error in the /opt/ringosc/syslogE4411BDVR file.
Further Customization Required for Agilent SPECS Users
1. Create a framework using the Plug Framework (RO_PLUG.fwk) and the standard framework. If you don't use the standard framework, INIT_SPEANA must be manually added to your framework after TESTER_START.
a. Configuration file can be found in the /opt/SPECS/usr/fwk directory with the name consists of framework name followed by a suffix (.cf).) The GPIB address is written in the configuration file with SPANA_ADDR parameter.
2. The created framework retrieves the E4411B and GPIB addresses from a framework configuration file. (The framework configuration file can be found in the /opt/SPECS/usr/fwk directory. The filename consists of a framework name followed by an extension (.cf). The GPIB address is written in the configuration file with the SPANA_ADDR parameter.) Set the correct GPIB address in the framework configuration file. The E4411B drivers can be called from any algorithm, just like TIS commands. The drivers cannot be called from a test plan.
Chapter 6
195
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for C.03.01) Creating New User Account
Creating New User Account
The hp4070, specs, and hpsrvc users are automatically created by loading the software configuration tool. If you need to create additional user accounts, use the following procedure. To create a new user account, use the system administration manager (SAM). The following briefly explains how to create a new user account. 1. Log in as a superuser by typing root, and type the root password for the system controller. 2. Open a dtterm window. 3. To start the SAM (1M) utility, type:
# sam The SAM window appears as shown in figure 6-56.
Figure 6-56 System Administration Manager (SAM) Window
196
Chapter 6
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for C.03.01) Creating New User Account
4. Double-click the Accounts for Users and Groups icon. Figure 6-57 Accounts for Users and Group Screen of SAM Window
5. Double-click the Users icon. The accounts for users and groups window appears as shown in figure 6-58. Figure 6-58 Accounts for Users and Group Window
Chapter 6
197
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for C.03.01) Creating New User Account
6. Choose Action: Add... in the accounts for users and group window. The add a user account window appears as shown in figure 6-59. Figure 6-59 Add a User Account Window
7. Fill in the required information, then click OK in the add a user account window. The set user password window appears as shown in figure 6-60.
Figure 6-60 Set User Password Window
198
Chapter 6
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for C.03.01) Creating New User Account
8. Set the temporary password, and click OK in the set user password window.
NOTE
You must set the password for the system security. Then, the password must be reported to system administrator after installation.
After the new user has been created, the note window appears as shown in figure 6-61.
Figure 6-61 Note Window
9. Click OK in the note window. The note window disappears. 10. Choose File: Exit in the SAM window. The SAM window disappears. 11. Log off from the superuser environment.
Chapter 6
199
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for C.03.01) Creating New User Account
200
Chapter 6
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
7 Verifying Tester Operation
201 Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Verifying Tester Operation
After installation, you must verify the tester operation, and confirm that the installation process was completed. This chapter provides instructions for verifying correct Agilent 4072A/4073A operation. This chapter consists of the following sections: · "To Turn On Agilent 4072A/4073A" · "To Confirm Agilent 4072A/4073A Configuration" · "To Confirm the Agilent 4072A/4073A Operation"
202
Chapter 7
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Verifying Tester Operation To Turn On Agilent 4072A/4073A
To Turn On Agilent 4072A/4073A
Electrical Work Type 3:
WARNING 24 V is forced to the uninsulated parts of the EMO rear panel. Do not touch these parts.
To turn on the 4072A/4073A, use the following procedure.
1. Set the following components:
EMO button
Normal ("Out") position
EMO protector
"In" position
Fan protector -1
"In" position
Fan protector -2
"In" position
Power outlet protector
"In" position
Ext control terminal
Short condition
Figure 7-1 shows the component locations.
2. Set the main breaker to the ON position.
3. Set the emergency breaker to the ON position.
4. Set the main switch to the ON position. The LINE indicator, on the top front of the system cabinet, turns on.
5. Verify that the over voltage LED turns on. If so, check the source power line.
6. Press the system switch. The green LED in the system switch turns on.
NOTE
Complete steps 4 through 6 within 20 seconds. After 20 seconds, the cabinet fan error LED turns on. Set the main switch to the OFF position and repeat steps 4 through 6.
7. Press the INSTRUMENT POWER ON switch on the top front of the system cabinet. The green LED in the INSTRUMENT POWER ON switch turns on.
8. Turn on all the system instruments installed in the system cabinet.
NOTE
You can press the EMO button to safely shut down the 4072A/4073A. This shuts down ac power to all the power outlets inside the system cabinet, which includes the system instruments and testhead power supply. It also turns off power to the system controller and peripherals connected to these power outlets. In this case, it turns off the controller without the normal shutdown sequence.
If an emergency occurs, press the EMO button to shut down the 4072A/4073A. For more information regarding the EMO circuit, see chapter 2.
Chapter 7
203
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Verifying Tester Operation To Turn On Agilent 4072A/4073A
Figure 7-1 Component Locations
EMO button
LINE indicator INSTRUMENT POWER ON swtich
Instrument power outlets
DVM and CMU power outlets (200/208 V option)
Controller power outlets
Power distribution unit (PDU)
Power outlet protector
Main switch
Cabinet fan protector
Emergency breaker
EMO protector
Power distribution unit (PDU)
~LINE
Cabinet Fan TH Fan Protector Protector
Emergency Breaker
Error
Cabinet Fan
EMO Emergency
Error
Protector Interface TH Fan
UPS Cntrl
TH PS
Over Voltage System SW
ON position OFF position TH fan protector
Cabinet fan error LED
Testhead fan error LED
Over voltage LED System switch
~LINE
Main breaker
Ext control terminal
Front view
Testhead power Testhead fan supply (TH PS) assembly
Rear view
204
Chapter 7
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Verifying Tester Operation To Confirm Agilent 4072A/4073A Configuration
To Confirm Agilent 4072A/4073A Configuration
This section describes how to check the 4072A/4073A configuration. To confirm the configuration, use the /opt/hp4070/bin/hp4070 command, which is included in the Agilent 4070 system software.
To execute the hp4070 command, use the following procedure.
1. Turn the 4072A/4073A on. 2. Enable the testhead by placing any fixture on the testhead, or by placing the testhead on the prober. 3. Turn the system controller on, and start the HP-UX system. 4. Log in as any user. 5. Verify that the TIS server is running. To check it, type:
$ ps -ef | grep tis If the TIS server is running, the tis_online daemon appears.
user 20049
1 0 Mar 3 ?
2:04 tis_online -ioff -e -a
If the TIS server is not running, run the TIS server using the following command:
$ hp4070 -start 6. To verify the configuration and to display it on the window, execute hp4070:
$ hp4070 The tester management panel and hp4070 login window appear.
Figure 7-2 Tester Management Panel with hp4070 Login
Chapter 7
205
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Verifying Tester Operation To Confirm Agilent 4072A/4073A Configuration
7. Choose the ON LINE execution mode, and click Login. The configuration appears on the tester management panel. Figure 7-3 Tester Management Panel Login Screen
If the configuration is not correct, or the hp4070 command does not run correctly, see the Troubleshooting section of the Agilent 4072A/4073A Service Guide.
206
Chapter 7
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Verifying Tester Operation To Confirm the Agilent 4072A/4073A Operation
To Confirm the Agilent 4072A/4073A Operation
This section describes how to check the operation of the 4072A/4073A. To confirm the operation, use the diagnostics program (/opt/hp4070/bin/diag4070) included in the 4070 system software. For further details of the diagnostics program execution, see the Agilent 4072A/4073A Service Guide. If the 4072A/4073A fails the diagnostics, see the Troubleshooting section of the Agilent 4072A/4073A Service Guide.
Procedure
To execute the diagnostics program, use the following procedure. 1. The wafer prober sense switch must be pushed, and the interlock pins on the testhead must be shorted. To do
this, do one of following: a. If an automatic wafer prober is used:
i. Set the personality board on the wafer prober. ii. Set the testhead on the wafer prober. If the personality board is already wired to the probe card/probe
card adapter, do not contact the probe card to anything. The probe card needles must be open. b. If the Agilent E3140A test fixture adapter and the Agilent E3141A universal test fixture are used:
i. Set the test fixture on the test fixture adapter, then open the test fixture measurement pins. ii. Set the test fixture adapter on the testhead. iii. Close the top cover of the test fixture adapter.
Chapter 7
207
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Verifying Tester Operation To Confirm the Agilent 4072A/4073A Operation
2. Execute the diagnostics program. $ diag4070
The diagnostics window appears. Figure 7-4 Diagnostics Window
3. Click Start to execute the diagnostics. The total time required to complete all the diagnostics tests depends on the tester configuration. For a fully configured tester, the diagnostics take about 15 minutes.
Confirmation
While the diagnostics program is executing, you can see the diagnostics results on the diagnostics window. The results will be written to the /var/opt/hp4070/diag/log file in ASCII format. The /var/opt/hp4070/diag/log file includes the:
· time when diagnostics started · results of diagnostics · messages for troubleshooting · time when diagnostics finished
NOTE
The diagnostics results are added to the /var/opt/hp4070/diag/log file, with the latest results are at the end of the file. To see the latest results, open the file with a text editor, and go to the end of the file.
208
Chapter 7
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Verifying Tester Operation To Confirm the Agilent 4072A/4073A Operation
Displaying and Printing the Test Results
After diagnostics, the test data is stored in the /var/opt/hp4070/diag/DIAGdata file. If you need to report the test results, you can use the quick formatter, which is included in the 4070 system software, to display and print out test results. The following describes how to display and print test results using the quick formatter. 1. Click Quick Formatter... in the diagnostics window, or execute the view4070 command in the terminal
window.
Figure 7-5 Quick Formatter Window
2. Select the File: Load: File... menu in the quick formatter window, and choose the data file. The diagnostics data file is stored in the /var/opt/hp4070/diag directory.
3. To print out the diagnostics data displayed in the quick formatter window:
a. Click Print... in the quick formatter window. The print window appears. b. Type the printer name. c. Click OK. 4. To store formatted data in a text file:
a. Click Print... in the quick formatter window. The print window appears. b. In the print window, type:
cat > file_name
Chapter 7
209
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Verifying Tester Operation To Confirm the Agilent 4072A/4073A Operation
210
Chapter 7
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
A Agilent E3171A/AJ, E3172A/AJ/B, and E3173A
Factory Settings
211 Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Agilent E3171A/AJ, E3172A/AJ/B, and E3173A Factory Settings
This appendix describes the factory settings for the Agilent E3171A/AJ, Agilent E3172A/AJ/B, and Agilent E3173A controller. The information in this section may help you if the E3171A/AJ, E3172A/AJ/B, or E3173A system controller software encounters a problem.
212
Appendix A
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Agilent E3171A/AJ, E3172A/AJ/B, and E3173A Factory Settings Software Revision
Software Revision
The latest software revision is installed in the E3171A/AJ, E3172A/AJ/B, and E3173A at the factory. The following table shows the corresponding revisions for the operating system and the Agilent 4070 system software. The checked () box indicates the latest 4070 software revision. Table A-1 Software Revision for Agilent E3171A/AJ
HP-UX C/ANSI C
SICL
BASIC/UX
4070 System Software
Testhead F/W
Configuration Tool
Agilent SPECS
E4411B Control Software
B.02.00 1.24
B.10.20
G.01.02
C.08.02
B.02.10
1.25 1.26
ACE3
(Jun 1998) G.03.00
C.08.03
B.03.00
1.40 1.41
B.03.01 1.41
B.01.00
B.01.01
B.01.02 B.01.03 C.01.03
B.02.40 X.01.20
B.02.41 X.01.20
B.02.50 B.02.51
B.02.51
X.01.22 Y.01.22
Table A-2 Software Revision for Agilent E3172A/AJ/B Option 102
HP-UX C/ANSI C
SICL
BASIC/UX
4070 System Software
Testhead F/W
Configuration Tool
Agilent SPECS
E4411B Control Software
B.10.20
B.03.00
1.40 1.41
ACE5
G.03.00 C.08.03
(Sep 2000)
B.03.01
1.41 1.57
B.01.02 B.01.03
C.01.03
B.02.50 B.02.51
X.01.22
B.02.51 Y.01.22
Table A-3 Software Revision for Agilent E3172A/AJ/B Option 110
HP-UX C/ANSI C
B.11.11 (Jun 2001 or
Sep 2001)
SICL
11i-1.0 11i-2.1
BASIC/UX
4070 System Software
Testhead F/W
Configuration Tool
C.08.04 C.03.01
1.41 1.57
C.01.03
Agilent SPECS
C.02.51
E4411B Control Software
Y.01.22
Table A-4 Software Revision for Agilent E3173A
HP-UX C/ANSI C
B.11.11 (Sep 2001)
SICL 11i-2.1
BASIC/UX
4070 System Software
Testhead F/W
Configuration Tool
Agilent SPECS
E4411B Control Software
C.08.04 C.03.01
1.41 1.57
C.01.03
C.02.51 Y.01.22
Appendix A
213
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Agilent E3171A/AJ, E3172A/AJ/B, and E3173A Factory Settings Installed Software
Installed Software
The following software has been installed at the factory. · HP-UX · HP-UX recommended patches
(For HP-UX B.11.11) PHKL_23504 (For HP-UX B.10.20) quality pack (XSW700QPK1020) extension software patch bundle (XSW700HW1020) HP-UX extension software general release patch bundle (XSW700GR1020) additional HP-UX patch bundle (NET21020S700) HP-UX core OS year-2000 patch bundle (Y2K-1020S700) · C/ANSI C · SICL · BASIC/UX · Agilent 4070 system software · Agilent 4070/SPECS software configuration tool · Agilent SPECS
NOTE
There are some type for the Agilent software configuration tool. When you install this configuration tool, use the media of the latest revision.
NOTE
Agilent E4411B spectrum analyzer control software is not installed in the factory.
214
Appendix A
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Agilent E3171A/AJ, E3172A/AJ/B, and E3173A Factory Settings Customizing HP-UX
Customizing HP-UX
Basic Configuration
When HP-UX was installed at the factory on the E3171A/AJ, E3172A/AJ/B and E3173A, its basic configuration was set as follows:
Primary swap size
512 Mbyte (for the E3172A/AJ/B option 110 and E3173A)
400 Mbyte (for the E3171A/AJ and E3172A/AJ option 102)
Secondary swap size
None
Software selection
CDE runtime environment
Software language
English (for the E3171A, E3172A, and E3172B/E3173A option ABA)
Japanese (for the E3171AJ, E3172AJ, and E3172B/E3173A option ABJ)
Locale setting
C (for the E3171A, E3172A, and E3172B/E3173A option ABA)
ja_JP.SJIS (for the E3171AJ, E3172AJ, and E3172B/E3173A option ABJ)
keyboard:
USB_PS2_DIN_US_English (for the E3171A/AJ/B option 110 and E3173A)
File system file name length
Long
/home configuration
Minimal
Make volatile dirs separate
True
Create /export volume
False
Logical Volumes
When HP-UX was installed at the factory, the logical volumes were set as follows: Table A-5 Logical Volumes
Size
Logical Volume Name /stand / /tmp /home /opt /usr /var
E3172A/AJ/B option 110
E3171A/AJ and
and E3173A
E3172A/AJ/B option 102
112 Mbyte
84 Mbyte
140 Mbyte
48 Mbyte
64 Mbyte
32 Mbyte
20 Mbyte
20 Mbyte
1536 Mbyte
1024 Mbyte
1544 Mbyte
640 Mbyte
1024 Mbyte
1024 Mbyte
Appendix A
215
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Agilent E3171A/AJ, E3172A/AJ/B, and E3173A Factory Settings Customizing HP-UX
Drivers and Kernel Parameters
Drivers and kernel parameters are modified by executing the /home/hpsrvc/config/config.4070 command.
Table A-6 Drivers and Kernel Parameters
E3172A/AJ/B option 110 and E3173A
E3171A/AJ or E3172A/AJ/B option 102
create_fastlinks dnlc_hash_locks fs_async maxdsiz maxdsiz_64bit maxfiles maxfiles_lim maxssiz maxssiz_64bit maxsswapchunks maxtsiz maxtsiz_64bit maxuprc maxusers ninode shmmax stape msgtql
1 512 1 0xC0000000 0x400000000 200 2048 0x04FB3000 0x10000000 4096 0x40000000 0x100000000 256 128 4000 0x40000000
256
sflop stape maxdsiz maxuprc msgtql shmmax
0x08000000 200 256 0x08000000
NOTE
If you install the Agilent SPECS B.02.50 or later revision, the maxuprc kernel parameter must be set 256. For details about the SPECS, refer to the SPECS installation Guide.
Common Desktop Environment (CDE)
The /usr/dt/config/C/sys.resources file (for English) or the /usr/dt/config/ja_JP.SJIS/sys.resources file (for Japanese) has been modified for disabling that the display lock function operated by the CDE with the password.
: dtsession*lockTimeout: 0 Changed "30" to "0"
:
216
Appendix A
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Agilent E3171A/AJ, E3172A/AJ/B, and E3173A Factory Settings Installing Driver and Customizing SICL
Installing Driver and Customizing SICL
Installing Drivers (for E3171A/AJ Only)
If the system controller is the E3171A/AJ, the following drivers are installed before customizing the SICL. · timi · vme · vme2
Customizing SICL
The /opt/sicl/bin/iosetup command has been executed, and the GPIB and serial port have been set as follows: Table A-7 GPIB Setting
Logical unit number Symbolic name
Slot number
Serial number Interupt request line GPIB bus address System controller
GPIB Interface 1
GPIB Interface 2
7
27
hpib7
hpib27
PCI slot 4 (for E3172A/AJ/B and E3173A) PCI slot 6 (for E3172A/AJ/B and E3173A)
PCI slot 2 (for E3171A/AJ JP20F-)
PCI slot 4 (for E3171A/AJ JP20F-)
EISA slot 2 for (E3171A/AJ JP10F-)
EISA slot 4 for (E3171A/AJ JP10F-)
Printed number on interface card
Printed number on interface card
3 (for E3171A/AJ JP10F-)
5 (for E3171A/AJ JP10F-)
21
21
Yes
Yes
The following lines in the /etc/opt/sicl/hwconfig.cf file have been added by the iosetup command.
: # E2078 High Speed HP-IB (PCI) 7 hpib7 e2078 4 21 0x10B5 0x9050 0x10B0103C 0x99813094 1 # E2078 High Speed HP-IB (PCI) 25 hpib25 e2078 6 21 0x10B5 0x9050 0x10B0103C 0x99813095 1
Added Added Added Added
Appendix A
217
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Agilent E3171A/AJ, E3172A/AJ/B, and E3173A Factory Settings Customizing BASIC/UX
Customizing BASIC/UX
The /home/hpsrvc/config/config.rmb command has been executed for customizing BASIC/UX. This command customizes the /etc/dt/config/Xsession.d/0000.rmb file, the /usr/lib/X11/app-defaults/Rmb file, and the /etc/X11/rgb.txt file.
The /etc/dt/config/Xsession.d/0000.rmb File
The /etc/dt/config/Xsession.d/0000.rmb file has been created for the CDE. · for E3172A/AJ/B option 110 and E3173A
#!/usr/bin/sh /usr/bin/X11/xinitcolormap -c 16 -f /opt/rmb/rmb8_04/newconfig/xrmbcolormap /usr/bin/X11/xmodmap /opt/rmb/rmb8_04/newconfig/xmodmap.PC · for the E3171A/AJ and E3172A/AJ/B option 102 #!/usr/bin/sh /usr/bin/X11/xinitcolormap -c 16 -f /opt/rmb/rmb8_03/newconfig/xrmbcolormap /usr/bin/X11/xmodmap /opt/rmb/rmb8_03/newconfig/xmodmap.PC
The /usr/lib/X11/app-defaults/Rmb File
The /usr/lib/X11/app-defaults/Rmb file has been copied from the /opt/rmb/rmb8_04/newconfig/Rmb (for the E3172A/AJ/B option 110 and E3173A) or /opt/rmb/rmb8_03/newconfig/Rmb (for the E3171A/AJ and E3172A/AJ/B option 102) file.
The /etc/X11/rgb.txt File
The /opt/rmb/rmb8_04/newconfig/rgb.rmb (for the E3172A/AJ/B option 110 and E3173A) or /opt/rmb/rmb8_03/newconfig/rgb.rmb (for the E3171A/AJ and E3172A/AJ/B option 102) file has been added to the /etc/X11/rgb.txt file.
: 000 255 255 255 255 0 0 255 255 0 0 255 0 0 255 255 0 0 255 255 0 255 204 187 51 51 170 119 136 102 170 204 68 102 255 119 0 221 136 68
rmb_black rmb_white rmb_red rmb_yellow rmb_green rmb_cyan rmb_blue rmb_magenta rmb_olive_green rmb_aqua rmb_royal_blue rmb_maroon rmb_orange rmb_brown
Added Added Added Added Added Added Added Added Added Added Added Added Added Added
The /usr/bin/X11/rgb command is then executed as follows:
# /usr/bin/X11/rgb < /etc/X11/rgb.txt
218
Appendix A
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Agilent E3171A/AJ, E3172A/AJ/B, and E3173A Factory Settings Customizing BASIC/UX
The /etc/opt/rmb/rmb8_03rc File
The following line in the /etc/opt/rmb/rmb8_03rc file has been modified for the E3171A/AJ. :
1235 ! DISK 1502 = /dev/rfloppy/c0t0d0 Added if E3171A/AJ has FDD
The /etc/dt/config/Xsession.d/9000.kanji File
The /home/hpsrvc/config/config.kanji command has been executed for customizing BASIC/UX for the E3171AJ, E3172AJ, and E3172B/E3173A option ABJ. The /etc/dt/config/Xsession.d/9000.kanji file has been created for the CDE.
#!/usr/bin/ksh if [ $LANG = 'ja_JP.SJIS' ] || [ $LANG = 'ja_JP.eucJP' ]; then
/usr/bin/X11/xmodmap -e 'keycode 34 = Meta_L' fi
Appendix A
219
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Agilent E3171A/AJ, E3172A/AJ/B, and E3173A Factory Settings Customizing 4070 System Software
Customizing 4070 System Software
The /home/hpsrvc/config/config.4070 command has been executed for customizing the 4070 system software. This command customizes the /etc/opt/rmb/rmb8_04rc (for the E3172A/AJ/B option 110 and E3173A) or /etc/opt/rmb/rmb8_03rc (for the E3171A/AJ and E3172A/AJ/B option 102) file, and executes the /opt/hp4070/install/install command.
The /etc/opt/rmb/rmb8_04rc and /etc/opt/rmb/rmb8_03rc File
The following line in the /etc/opt/rmb/rmb8_04rc (for the E3172A/AJ/B option 110 and E3173A) or /etc/opt/rmb/rmb8_03rc (for the E3171A/AJ and E3172A/AJ/B option 102) file has been modified.
:
770 ! WORKSPACE = 4M
Modified for BASIC/UX
:
1520 ! SHL_SEARCH /opt/hp4070/lib
Modified for the 4070
The /etc/rc.config.d/hp4070 File
The config.4070 command makes the /etc/rc.config.d/hp4070 file, which is executed in the controller boot up process and starts the TIS server.
NOTE
If you do not need to start the TIS server, modify the /etc/rc.config.d/hp4070 file as follows:
: HP4070SYS=0
Change "1" to "0"
:
220
Appendix A
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Agilent E3171A/AJ, E3172A/AJ/B, and E3173A Factory Settings Customizing 4070 System Software
The /opt/hp4070/install/install Command
The /opt/hp4070/install/install command has been executed at the factory. The installation of the optical interface card has also been completed.
The /etc/opt/hp4070/config/1 File The /etc/opt/hp4070/config/1 file has been edited for the 4072A/4073A configuration.
NOTE
If the E3171A/AJ, E3172A/AJ/B, or E3173A is not ordered with the Agilent E3102A/E3103A, this customization has not been done.
The /opt/hp4070/install/configure Command
The /opt/hp4070/install/configure command has been executed with the 4072A/4073A. The /etc/opt/hp4070/config/refconfig1 file has been created by the configure command.
If the Agilent 4284A (CMU) exists, the switching matrix compensation parameter has been measured at the factory.
NOTE
If the E3171A/AJ, E3172A/AJ/B, or E3173A is not ordered with the E3102A/E3103A, this customization has not been done.
Appendix A
221
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Agilent E3171A/AJ, E3172A/AJ/B, and E3173A Factory Settings Sample User Setting
Sample User Setting
The following three users have been created at the factory. Each user has also been customized for its function.
The hp4070 User Environment
The following action icons have been added to the hp4070 icon that is located at the right side of the CDE front panel. Table A-8 hp4070 Action Item
Action Name Tester manager IDP BASIC/UX
TIS server monitor
Executed Command
/opt/hp4070/bin/hp4070 /opt/hp4070/bin/idp4070 /opt/rmb/rmb8_04/rmb (for the E3172A/AJ/B option 110 and E3173A) /opt/rmb/rmb8_03/rmb (for the E3171A/AJ and E3172A/AJ/B option 102) tail -f /var/opt/hp4070/syslog4070
The specs User Environment
The /opt/SPECS/install/bin/setup_user command has been executed for this user.
The hpsrvc User Environment
The following action icons have been added to the hpsrvc icon that is located at the right side of the CDE front panel. Table A-9 hpsrvc Action Item
Action Name Tester manager IDP BASIC/UX
DIAG PV TIS server monitor
Executed Command /opt/hp4070/bin/hp4070 /opt/hp4070/bin/idp4070 /opt/rmb/rmb8_04/rmb (for the E3172A/AJ/B option 110 and E3173A) /opt/rmb/rmb8_03/rmb (for the E3171A/AJ and E3172A/AJ/B option 102) /opt/hp4070/bin/diag4070 /opt/hp4070/bin/pv4070 tail -f /var/opt/hp4070/syslog4070
222
Appendix A
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
B Miscellaneous Operations
223 Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Miscellaneous Operations
This appendix provides information that may be used after the initial installation. This appendix consists of the following sections: · "To Mount Testhead on Wafer Prober" · "To Connect External Instrument Interlock Connectors" · "To Change Line Voltage" · "To Change Line Frequency" · "To Update Testhead Firmware" · "To Back Up and Recover System Software Using Ignite-UX"
224
Appendix B
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Miscellaneous Operations To Mount Testhead on Wafer Prober
To Mount Testhead on Wafer Prober
The prober manufacturer is responsible for mounting the Agilent 4072A/4073A testhead onto the wafer prober, as well as subsequent adjustments and service. Agilent Technologies will, however, provide technical assistance regarding testhead installation upon request.
Fully Automatic Wafer Prober
Before installing the testhead, the probe card, and the personality board (Agilent E3145A,B) on the wafer prober, the mounting hardware--hinge, head plate, and so on--must be fabricated. See the Agilent 4072A/4073A Pre-Installation Guide and the Agilent E3145A/B Installation and Maintenance Guide, which provide dimensions and other mechanical specifications for the testhead and the personality boards.
WARNING Keep hands clear of the testhead, hinge, and wafer prober when lowering the testhead into position on the wafer prober.
CAUTION
Do not touch the testhead measurement pins or the personality board printed patterns. Maintain optimal electrical contact between the testhead measurement pins and the personality board pin contacts.
Oil, perspiration, and dirt can prevent optimal electrical contact, deteriorate insulation, and degrade measurement accuracy.
Manual and Semi-Automatic Wafer Prober
The testhead cannot be installed directly on a manual or semi-automatic wafer prober (small size). To connect the testhead to the probe card for the prober, use a cable extension fixture (Agilent E3146A).
The cable extension fixture installs onto the testhead. Wires from the manipulator or probe card for the prober can then be soldered to the cable extension fixture measurement pins.
To enable testhead output, an interlock cable must be connected between the interlock connector on the cable extension fixture and the interlock connector on the wafer prober.
For more information on the E3146A cable extension fixture, see the Agilent E3146A Installation and Maintenance Guide.
WARNING When the output enabled lamp on the testhead is lit, potentially hazardous voltages may be present at the cable extension fixture measurement pins. Make sure that the protective cover plate for the cable extension fixture is installed before operating the 4072A/4073A.
CAUTION Do not touch the testhead measurement pins or the cable extension fixture. Oil, perspiration, and dirt can prevent optimal electrical contact, and degrade measurement accuracy.
Appendix B
225
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Miscellaneous Operations To Mount Testhead on Wafer Prober
Connecting Chuck Connection Output Connector
The chuck connection output connector, on the side panel of the testhead, is used to apply bias to the wafer prober chuck terminal.
If the connector is used to apply a bias to the wafer prober chuck, connect the connector and wafer prober chuck terminal using a triaxial cable, as shown in figure B-1. If the wafer prober chuck terminal is a BNC connector, use a triaxial cable with a triaxial(f)-to-BNC(m) adapter.
Figure B-1 shows an example for connecting the chuck connection output connector and a wafer prober chuck terminal, using a BNC(f) connector.
The triaxial cable and triaxial(f)-to-BNC(m) adapter are furnished with the 4072A/4073A.
Figure B-1
Chuck Connection Output Connector
Chuck connection output connector on testhead side panel
BNC(f) connector from wafer prober chuck
Guard
Force
Triax(f)-BNC(m) adapter (1250-2652)
Ground
3-meter triaxial cable (04145-61622)
Force Ground
226
Appendix B
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Miscellaneous Operations To Connect External Instrument Interlock Connectors
To Connect External Instrument Interlock Connectors
The 4072A/4073A provides a BNC-type interlock connector on the testhead power supply (TH PS) front panel. To locate the connector, remove the blank panel on the TH PS.
The interlock connector is used to control the interlock operation of an external instrument that is connected to the testhead AUX input. The external instrument must have interlock capabilities similar to the Agilent 4142B modular dc source/monitor, that is, the bias force for the instrument is enabled when the interlock terminals are connected (shorted), and disabled when open.
To synchronize the interlock operation of an external instrument with the 4072A/4073A, connect a cable between the Intlk connector (for the TH PS) and the interlock connector (for the external instrument), as shown in figure B-2.
Figure B-2 Intlk Connector Connection Example
External Output connector instrument
AUX input
Output SW
Test leads or measurement cable
Testhead
Output
Output SW
TH PS Interlock connector
Control
Cable
Closed sysnchronized with 4072A/4073A interlock operation
Appendix B
227
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Miscellaneous Operations To Change Line Voltage
To Change Line Voltage
To change the 4072A/4073A operation voltage, replace the main power cable and the parts listed in table B-1. Parts replacement must be done by Agilent service personnel. For main power cable requirements, see table 2-1.
Table B-1 Replacement Parts
Replacement Part
Power distribution unit with power outlets
200 V E3160-60265
208 V E3160-60266
220 V E3160-60267
240 V E3160-60268
228
Appendix B
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Miscellaneous Operations To Change Line Frequency
To Change Line Frequency
If you move the 4072A/4073A to an area with a different line frequency, the line frequency setting must be changed. You can easily change the 4072A/4073A line frequency setting using the configure command. To execute the configure command, see "Executing /opt/hp4070/install/configure Command" in chapter 6.
NOTE
The power line frequency affects the SMU integration time, because the SMU integration time is synchronized with power line cycle (PLC).
Appendix B
229
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Miscellaneous Operations To Update Testhead Firmware
To Update Testhead Firmware
If you update the 4070 testhead firmware, use the following procedure.
1. Turn on the 4072A/4073A, all system instruments, and the system controller.
2. Log in as superuser (root).
3. Check if the TIS server is running. To check it, type:
# ps -ef | grep tis
If the TIS server is running, the tis_online daemon appears.
user 20049 1 0 May 3 ?
2:04 tis_online -ioff -e -a
If the TIS server is not running, run the TIS server using the following command:
# /opt/hp4070/bin/hp4070 -start 4. Execute the hp4070 command. This command displays the testhead firmware revision in the window.
# /opt/hp4070/bin/hp4070 The tester management panel and hp4070 login window appear.
Figure B-3 Tester Management Panel with hp4070 Login
230
Appendix B
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Miscellaneous Operations To Update Testhead Firmware
5. Choose ON LINE, and click Login. The testhead firmware revision is displayed on the tester management panel. Figure B-4 Testhead Firmware Revision on Tester Management Panel
Boot loader
ADC board
Testhead F/W
6. Click Logout... in the tester management panel, then click Quit in the hp4070 login window.
7. Stop the TIS server using the following command:
# /opt/hp4070/bin/hp4070 -shutdown
8. Confirm the firmware revision installed in the system controller.
# ll /opt/hp4070/firmware
The firmware that is installed in the system controller is listed.
-r--r--r-- 1 bin bin -r-xr-xr-x 1 bin bin
941444 Sep 13 15:00 fw1.41.bin 359528 Sep 13 15:00 pflash
Appendix B
231
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Miscellaneous Operations To Update Testhead Firmware
9. Update the testhead firmware as follows: # cd /opt/hp4070/firmware # ./pflash fw1.41.bin
Agilent 4070 firmware maintenance utility
current flash revision: 01.40 switching to flash update mode........done.
boot ROM 01.00 started.
read 903245 bytes from fw1.40.bin total data size = 903245 bytes
sent 100% of data CRC check passed.
rebooting ..........done.
flash update completed. new flash revision: 01.41 #
It will take approximately 1 minute and 30 seconds to finish the pflash command.
NOTE
Use the latest firmware to execute this command.
10. After updating, reconfirm the testhead firmware revision. To confirm it, see step 4 and 5 above.
232
Appendix B
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Miscellaneous Operations To Back Up and Recover System Software Using Ignite-UX
To Back Up and Recover System Software Using Ignite-UX
This section provides the information for backing up and recovering the system software.
Backing Up System Software
If you back up the system software using Ignite-UX, use the following procedure. 1. Log in the console mode as a superuser (root).
a. Choose the Options: Command Line Login in the CDE login screen. b. Type root on the prompt. c. Enter the root password. 2. Execute the /usr/sbin/swlist to confirm that the Ignite-UX is installed. If the Ignite-UX is installed, the following is displayed.
: Ignite-UX-11-11 B.3.4.115 HP-UX Installation Utilities....
: 3. Insert DDS tape into the DDS drive. 4. Execute the following command to make the clone tape. After executing the command, the Ignite-UX clone
tape is made. This takes about 1 hour. # /opt/ignite/bin/make_recovery -Av -d /dev/rmt/0m
Appendix B
233
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Miscellaneous Operations To Back Up and Recover System Software Using Ignite-UX
Recovering System Software
If you recover the system software using a Ignite-UX clone tape, use the following procedure.
1. Insert the Ignite-UX clone tape into the DDS drive.
2. Stop the autoboot by pressing the space key. You will see the boot console menu.
3. Search for bootable devices, using the choices displayed (for example, enter search or sea). The bootable devices are displayed as below.
Path Number ----------P0 P1 P2
Device Path ----------------IDE SCSI.3.0 SCSI.6.0
Device Type ----------LTN485S HP35470A SEAGATE ST34572N
4. Boot from the DDS drive using the following command as below. Press n for the interact with IPL. Main Menu: Enter command > bo P1 Interact with IPL (Y, N, Q)?> N After you type N, the recovery starts, and this takes about 1 hour.
NOTE
If you recover the clone tape that is made by another system controller; the error message "FATAL ERROR 1-10028, Cannot open optical interface device fail." may be displayed when you execute the hp4070 -start command, and TIS daemon cannot start.
In this case, remove the /dev/hp4070 directory and execute /opt/hp4070/install/install command to remake the device file. For the details, see "Executing install Command".
234
Appendix B
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
C Installing Software (for B.03.01 or Earlier)
235 Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for B.03.01 or Earlier)
This chapter describes how to install the Agilent 4070 system software, and includes software customization and other relevant software installation information. This chapter contains the following sections: · "Software Installation Overview" · "System Software Configuration" · "Before Software Installation" · "Installing HP-UX and Other Application Software" · "Customizing for Agilent 4072A/4073A"
236
Appendix C
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for B.03.01 or Earlier) Software Installation Overview
Software Installation Overview
Figure C-1 shows the overall sequence for installing the 4070 system software. Figure C-1 4070 Software Installation Sequence
START
Is the HP-UX installed?
No Install the HP-UX
Yes
Is the C/ANSI C used?
Yes
Is the C/ANSI C installed?
No
Install the C/ANSI C
Yes No
Is the SICL installed?
No
Install the SICL
Yes
Is
the BASIC/UX
Yes
used?
No
Install the 4070 system software
Is the BASIC/UX
installed?
Yes
Install
No
the BASIC/UX
Customize the HP-UX, SICL, BASIC/UX, and 4070 system software
Is the SPECS
used?
Install and customize
Yes
the SPECS
No
Is the E4411B control software
used?
Install the E4411B Yes control software
No
Customize user environment
END
See Agilent SPECS Installation Guide
Appendix C
237
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for B.03.01 or Earlier) System Software Configuration
System Software Configuration
Figure C-2 shows the directory structure for the 4070 system software.
Figure C-2
System Software Directory Structure
/
etc/
opt/
hp4070/
BASIC/
DISP_CONF
config/ 1 DUMCONFIG1 PCONFIG pgconnection refconfig1
diag/ caldata/
limits/
DIAGLbias DIAGLcg DIAGLdvm DIAGLgndu DIAGLleak DIAGLvi PVLbias PVLcg PVLdvm PVLgndu PVLleak PVLmatrix PVLplevel PVLpparam PVLpsw PVLsmui PVLsmur PVLsmuv
uncertainty/
PVUbias PVUcg PVUdvm PVUgndu PVUsmui PVUsmuv
templates
KEY4070 ccdata ccdata0 csh.login hfportmap modelname pgcaldata pmux portmap profile skewdata
opt/
var/
dev/
hp4070/
opt/
hp4070/
linked
hp4070_3.01/ addon/ bin/ BSDM/
hp4070/
diag/
locks/ sessionid synclock1 sysloglock
opt_s1 opt_s1f0 opt_s1f1 opt_s1f2 opt_s1s0 opt_s1s1 opt_s1s2
MAP PPG START cal4070
diag4070 exph4070 hp4070 idp4070
idpcgen
setlf
offconf4070 sys4070
pgconn4070 view4070
pv4070
sockets/ online
syslog4070
firmware/
fw1.60.bin pflash
help/
help.hv help.hvk help.xrh help00.ht
idp4.tif idp5.tif
include/ CCtis.h f_rom.h idpcgenrt.h
prober.h tis.h wafer.h
lbin/
autologout cal4070Body conf4070 diagBias4070 diagBody4070 diagCG4070 diagConf4070 diagDVM4070 diagGNDU4070 diagHFM4070
diagIso4070 diagLeak4070 diagOpt4070 diagPGc4070 diagPGo4070 diagPGs4070 diagPGW4070 diagRelay4070 diagTH4070 diagTrg4070
diagVI4070
pvGndu4070
expmon4070
pvHFM4070
gjet
pvLeak4070
hp4070Body
pvMatrix4070
idpParaBody
pvPSW4070
pgconn4070Body pvPlevel4070
pvBias4070
pvPogo4070
pvBody4070
pvPparam4070
pvCG4070
pvRefR4070
pvDvm4070
pvRefV4070
pvRelay4070 pvSetup4070 pvSkew4070 pvSmuI4070 pvSmuOutR4070 pvSmuR4070 pvSmuV4070 tis_offline tis_online
lib/
COM4062 TIS
DPROBER TIS4070
DVR4284 TIS_UTIL
EGX
TSK
EGY
TSK90A
F_ROM
WAFER
IDPCGENRT XYGRAPH
MJC
bitmaps
PARA
libdmyprob.a
TEL
libegx.a
libegy.a libf_rom.a libf_rom.sl libf_romB.sl libhp4062.a libhp4070.a libhp4070.sl libhp4070B.sl libhp4070CC.a libhp4070CC.sl
libidpcgenrt.a libmjc.a libprober.a libtel.a libtsk.a nls
newconfig/
!HWP1570.CFG KEY4070
4070.hp4070env PCONFIG
DIAGLbias
PVLbias
DIAGLcg
PVLcg
DIAGLdvm
PVLdvm
DIAGLgndu
PVLgndu
DIAGLleak
PVLleak
DIAGLvi
PVLmatrix
DISP_CONF
PVLplevel
DUMCONFIG1.org PVpparam
PVLpsw PVLsmui PVLsmur PVLsmuv PVUbias PVUcg PVUdvm PVUgndu PVUplevel PVUpparam
PVUsmui
hp4070
PVUsmuv
hp4070.rf
cal4070.rf
init.hp4070
ccdata0
optDrv.o
config.org
optPCI.o
csh.login.hp4070 pgcaldata.org
diag4070.rf
pgconnection.org
exph4070.rf
pmux.org
exrc
portmap.org
hfportmap.org profile.hp4070
pv4070.rf rc.config.hp4070 rmbrc skewdata.org view4070.rf
src/ libs prober wafer
unsupported/ bin/
CARD_VERIFY optcrc
demo/
src/ README
238
Appendix C
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for B.03.01 or Earlier) System Software Configuration
· /opt/hp4070 directory This directory contains the 4070 system core software, and is configured with the following directories. bin This directory contains the executable files that you most commonly execute. lbin This directory contains the executable files that are executed by the front end programs. For example, the programs used by the TIS server, diagnostics, and performance verification are stored in this directory. lib This directory contains the library files that are linked to C and BASIC programs. include This directory contains the header files (include files) that are used by C programs and algorithms. newconfig This directory contains the default files. These include not only the system software files but also HP-UX files related to the 4070 system software. The installation tool copies the files from this directory to the appropriate directory when the installation tool is executed. addon The user-made files that control the additional instruments are stored in this directory. When the system software is installed, there are no files in this directory. install This directory contains the installation tools to install the 4070 system software.
· /var/opt/hp4070 directory This directory contains the temporary data files and log files used for the 4070 system software, and is configured with the following directories. sockets This directory contains the socket file that is used for communicating between the TIS server and clients. diag This directory contains the log files and data files that are made during the diagnostics and performance verification. locks This directory contains the lock file that is used for making and managing the test session.
Appendix C
239
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for B.03.01 or Earlier) System Software Configuration
The 4072/4073A system files are explained below:
/opt/hp4070/bin/hp4070
Executed when you run the TIS server, and also executed when you log into the tester environment.
/opt/hp4070/bin/diag4070
Diagnostics file.
/opt/hp4070/bin/pv4070
Performance verification file.
/etc/opt/hp4070/config/1
Information on the system configuration, such as the optical interface slot number, GPIB address for the system instruments, and so on.
/etc/opt/hp4070/config/pgconnection Connection information between the pulse generator and the testhead.
/etc/opt/hp4070/config/refconfig1 System configuration.
/etc/opt/hp4070/config/PCONFIG
Information on the GPIB address for the automatic wafer probers.
/var/opt/hp4070/syslog4070
TIS server logs are added to this file.
/var/opt/hp4070/diag/log
Diagnostics logs are added to this file.
/var/opt/hp4070/diag/DIAGdata
Diagnostics data is overwritten on this file.
/var/opt/hp4070/diag/PVdata
The latest performance verification data is stored in this file; old data files are copied to PVdata_XX.
240
Appendix C
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for B.03.01 or Earlier) Before Software Installation
Before Software Installation
Before installing the 4070 system software, Agilent Technologies recommends that the following procedures are performed.
· equipment preparation Before installing the system software, you must prepare the equipment, such as the CD-ROM drive and software media. If you install all of the software, you will need to prepare all of the media for the HP-UX, C/ANSI C, HP BASIC, SICL, and 4070 system software.
· file backup If you install the system software on a hard disk that already has data, Agilent Technologies recommends that you back up all existing programs and data.
· contents check If you install the system software on a hard disk that already has data, you must check the contents of the hard disk. The 4070 system software and the Agilent 4062 system software cannot be executed on the same computer (system controller) because the execution environments are different. If the 4062 system software is installed, uninstall it now.
Appendix C
241
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for B.03.01 or Earlier) Installing HP-UX and Other Application Software
Installing HP-UX and Other Application Software
Minimum and Recommended Requirements
The minimum and recommended requirements for 4072A/4073A operation are as follows. If the system controller does not meet the following conditions, modify the hardware or software conditions.
· Hardware requirements Table C-1 Hardware requirements
System controller
Model 745i/100 (minimum)
Model 745/132L
Model C3600 (recommended)
Memory HDD Display
64 MB 2 GB
128 MB 4 GB 1024 × 768 1280 × 1024
512 MB 9 GB
· Software requirements Swap size: System configuration: Software selection: File name length: Logical volume size:
Kernel parameter:
400 Mbyte Standard LVM CDE runtime environment Long /opt 400 Mbyte (minimum), 1024 Mbyte (recommended) /usr 400 Mbyte (minimum), 640 Mbyte (recommended) /var 400 Mbyte (minimum), 1024 Mbyte (recommended) shmmax 0x08000000 maxdsiz 0x08000000 maxuprc 200 msgtql 256
NOTE
If you install the Agilent SPECS B.02.50 or later revision, the maxuprc kernel parameter must be set to 256. For details about the SPECS, refer to the SPECS installation Guide.
242
Appendix C
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for B.03.01 or Earlier) Installing HP-UX and Other Application Software
Compatible OS revisions and application software
The following table shows OS revision and application software compatibility for the Agilent 4072A/4073A. The checked () box indicates the latest 4070 software revision. Table C-2 Software Revision for 745/132L and 745i
HP-UX C/ANSI C
SICL
BASIC/UX
4070 System Software
Testhead firmware
Configuration Tool
Agilent SPECS
B.02.00
1.24
B.10.20
G.01.02
C.08.02
B.02.10
1.25 1.26
ACE3 (Jun 1998)
B.03.00
1.40 1.41
G.03.00 C.08.03
B.03.01
1.41 1.57
B.01.00
B.01.01
B.01.02 B.01.03
C.01.03
B.02.40
B.02.41
B.02.50 B.02.51
B.02.51
E4411B Control Software X.01.00
X.01.20
X.01.22
Y.01.22
Table C-3 Software Revision for C3600
HP-UX C/ANSI C
SICL
BASIC/UX
4070 System Software
Testhead firmware
Configuration Tool
Agilent SPECS
B.10.20 ACE5
G.03.00
C.08.03
B.03.00 B.03.01
1.40 1.41
1.41 1.57
B.01.02 B.01.03
C.01.03
B.02.50 B.02.51
B.02.51
E4411B Control Software
X.01.22
Y.01.22
NOTE
When you install these software, use the software media provided by the Agilent technologies.
Appendix C
243
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for B.03.01 or Earlier) Installing HP-UX and Other Application Software
Installing HP-UX
Start up from the HP-UX install and core OS CD-ROM, and install HP-UX. For further details, refer to Installing and Updating Additional Core Enhancements (ACE) for HP-UX 10.20. If C/ANSI C is used for measurement program development, also install all C/ANSI C filesets.
Installing Patches and Software Configuration Tools
After loading HP-UX, install the patches and software configuration tool. The following filesets are required for the 4070 system software. · Quality pack (XSW700QPK1020) included in the HP-UX diagnostics/IPR CD-ROM · Extension software patch bundle (XSW700HW1020) included in the HP-UX diagnostics/IPR CD-ROM · HP-UX extension software general release patch bundle (XSW700GR1020) included in the software
configuration tool CD-ROM · Additional HP-UX patch bundle (NET-1020S700) included in the software configuration tool CD-ROM · HP-UX core OS year 2000 patch bundle (Y2K-1020S700) included in the software configuration tool
CD-ROM · Agilent software configuration tool (HPCONFIG.UPD) included in the software configuration tool CD-ROM To install these patches and software configuration tool, use the /usr/sbin/swinstall command.
Installing SICL
To install SICL, use the /usr/sbin/swinstall command. For further details, refer to HP I/O Libraries Installation and Configuration Guide for HP-UX or Installing and Using HP BASIC/UX 8.0.
Installing HP BASIC/UX
To install HP BASIC/UX software, use the /usr/sbin/swinstall command. For further details, refer to Installing and Using HP BASIC/UX 8.0.
NOTE
Before installing HP BASIC/UX, go to the Read Me Before Installing HP BASIC/UX manual, which contains some important information for the currently released HP BASIC/UX.
Installing the 4070 System Software
To install the 4070 system software, use the /usr/sbin/swinstall command. For further details, refer to the "Installing the 4070 System Software" in the chapter 6.
244
Appendix C
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for B.03.01 or Earlier) Customizing for Agilent 4072A/4073A
Customizing for Agilent 4072A/4073A
Figure C-3 shows the customization flow for the Agilent 4072A/4073A. Figure C-3 Agilent 4072A/4073A Customization Flow
START
Step1.
øõCõõ
Customizing HP-UX ùõLC
Step2. Configuring SICL
and installing GPIB interface
øõCõ ùõïþûüöøúùð
õõ õóóùõ õõ
Step3. Customizing HP BASIC/UX
øõCõõ
Step4. Customizing for Japanese environment (optional)
Step5. Customizing 4070 system software
End
øõCõiõ
øõLõ ùõCõ úõõ ûõCöööû÷þ÷ööøõ üõCöööû÷þ÷ööcõïð ýõCöööû÷þ÷ööõïðõ þõCööû÷þ÷ööõ ÿõCõ
Appendix C
245
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for B.03.01 or Earlier) Customizing for Agilent 4072A/4073A
Step 1. Customizing HP-UX
Executing config.hpux Command To customize HP-UX for the 4072A/4073A, execute the /home/hpsrvc/config/config.hpux command. For the detailed information, refer to the "Drivers and Kernel Parameters" in the appendix A.
NOTE
A reboot is required to make the new kernel effective.
Customizing Common Desktop Environment (CDE)
Agilent Technologies recommends that you customize the /usr/dt/config/C/sys.resources (for English) or /usr/dt/config/ja_JP.SJIS/sys.resources (for Japanese) command as follows:
:
dtsession*lockTimeout: 0
Change "30" to "0"
:
NOTE
If you do not customize this setting, the display is automatically locked by the CDE with the password.
246
Appendix C
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for B.03.01 or Earlier) Customizing for Agilent 4072A/4073A
Step 2. Configuring SICL and Installing GPIB Interface
To configure the SICL and install the GPIB interface for the 4072A/4073A, use the following procedure. If you configure another interface, refer to HP I/O Libraries Installation and Configuration Guide for HP-UX, Installing and Using HP BASIC/UX 8.0, or the Installation Guide for each interface.
NOTE
When using the C3600 system controller or the 745/132L system controller with PCI slots, use one Agilent E2078A for the 4072A/4073A control and one E2078A for wafer prober control.
When using the 745/132L with EISA slots, use one Agilent E2071D for the 4072A/4073A control and one E2071D for wafer prober control.
When using the 745i system controller, use one Agilent E2071 for the 4072A/4073A control, and one E2071 for wafer prober control.
Executing the iosetup Command 1. Execute the /opt/sicl/bin/iosetup command as follows.
# /opt/sicl/bin/iosetup The I/O setup for the HP-UX window appears as shown in figure C-4.
Figure C-4 I/O Setup for HP-UX Window
Appendix C
247
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for B.03.01 or Earlier) Customizing for Agilent 4072A/4073A
2. When using the C3600 system controller or the 745/132L system controller with the PCI slot, set up the GPIB interface using the following procedure. a. Double-click E2078 High Speed HP-IB (PCI). The E2078 high speed HP-IB configuration window appears as shown in figure C-6.
Figure C-5 Agilent E2078 High Speed HP-IB Configuration Window
248
Appendix C
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for B.03.01 or Earlier) Customizing for Agilent 4072A/4073A
b. Set each parameter as shown in the following example. The following table shows the example for the E2078 GPIB card. Table C-4 Example of parameter for PCI GPIB card
Controller
Model 745/132L (PCI model)
Model C3600
Logical unit number Symbolic name PCI slot
Serial number GPIB bus address System controller
7
hpib7
2
4
This number is printed on the interface card.
21
Yes
c. Click OK.
d. Repeat steps a through c to set up the secondary GPIB interface, and use suitable parameters as shown in the following example. Table C-5 Example of parameter for 2nd PCI GPIB card
Controller
Logical unit number Symbolic name PCI slot
Serial number GPIB bus address System controller
Model 745/132L (PCI model)
Model C3600
25
hpib25
4
6
This number is printed on the interface card. 21 Yes
Appendix C
249
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for B.03.01 or Earlier) Customizing for Agilent 4072A/4073A
3. When using the 745/132L system controller with the EISA slot, set up the GPIB interface using the following procedure. a. Double-click E2071D Plug and Play HP-IB. The E2071D high speed HP-IB configuration window appears as shown in figure C-6.
Figure C-6 Agilent E2071D High Speed HP-IB Configuration Window
250
Appendix C
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for B.03.01 or Earlier) Customizing for Agilent 4072A/4073A
b. Set each parameter as shown in the following example.
Example (installing the E2071D into slot 2)
Logical unit number:
7
Symbolic name:
hpib7
EISA slot:
2
Base address:
350
Plug and play ID (PNP):
This number is printed on a sticker on the exterior connector plate of the interface card.
IRQ line:
3
HP-IB bus address:
21
System controller:
Yes
c. Click OK.
d. Repeat steps a through c to set up the secondary GPIB interface, and use suitable parameters as shown in the following example.
Example (installing the E2071D into slot 4)
Logical unit number:
25
Symbolic name:
hpib25
EISA slot:
4
Base address:
370
Plug and play id (PNP):
This number is printed on a sticker on the exterior connector plate of the interface card.
IRQ line:
5
HP-IB bus address:
21
System controller:
Yes
Appendix C
251
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for B.03.01 or Earlier) Customizing for Agilent 4072A/4073A
4. When using the 745i system controller, set up the GPIB interface using the following procedure. a. Double-click E2071 High Speed HP-IB. The HP E2071 high speed HP-IB configuration window appears as shown in figure C-7. Figure C-7 Agilent E2071 High Speed HP-IB Configuration Window
252
Appendix C
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for B.03.01 or Earlier) Customizing for Agilent 4072A/4073A
b. Use suitable parameters as shown in the following example. Example (installing the E2071 into slot 2)
Logical unit number:
7
Symbolic name:
hpib7
EISA slot:
2
DIP switches:
0100
IRQ line:
7
HP-IB bus address:
21
System controller:
Yes
c. Click OK.
d. Repeat steps a through c to set up the secondary GPIB interface, and use suitable parameters as shown in the following example.
Example (installing the E2071 into slot 4)
Logical unit number:
25
Symbolic name:
hpib25
EISA slot:
4
DIP switches:
1100
IRQ line:
7
HP-IB bus address:
21
System controller:
Yes
Appendix C
253
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for B.03.01 or Earlier) Customizing for Agilent 4072A/4073A
5. Choose File: Build... to rebuild the kernel as shown in figure C-8. Figure C-8 I/O Setup for HP-UX Window with File Menu
The accept configuration window appears as shown in figure C-9. Figure C-9 Accept Configuration Window
254
Appendix C
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for B.03.01 or Earlier) Customizing for Agilent 4072A/4073A
6. Click OK in the accept configuration window. The accept configuration window disappears, and the build kernel window appears as shown in figure C-10. Figure C-10 Build Kernel Window
7. Click OK. The new kernel is automatically rebuilt. This takes about 15 minutes. 8. After creating the new kernel, shut down HP-UX using the /sbin/shutdown command. 9. Turn off the system controller after the shutdown process is completed. 10. Install the GPIB interface card(s) into the system controller PCI or EISA slot. 11. Turn on the system controller and boot-up the HP-UX operating system.
NOTE
If you remove the GPIB interface cards from the EISA slots, you need to execute the /sbin/eisa_config command to reconfigure the kernel. See HP Standard Instrument Control Library Installation and User's Guide for HP-UX.
Appendix C
255
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for B.03.01 or Earlier) Customizing for Agilent 4072A/4073A
Installing Drivers When using the 745/132L system controller, you need to install the following drivers to the kernel and rebuild the kernel. When using the C3600 system controller or the 745i system controller, skip this section and go to "Step 3. Customizing HP BASIC/UX". · timi · vme · vme2
NOTE
If you do not add the timi, vme, and vme2 drivers, the HP 9000 model 745/132L computer will not address the following problem:
· Serial B port cannot be used. · SYSTEM FAIL indicator lights in the rear panel of the computer.
Removing SICL Driver Before installing the drivers, you need to remove the sicl driver from the kernel. Use the following procedures. 1. Log in as a superuser. 2. Open a dtterm window. 3. To start the SAM (1M) utility, type:
# sam The SAM window appears as shown in figure C-11.
Figure C-11 System Administration Manager (SAM) Window
256
Appendix C
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for B.03.01 or Earlier) Customizing for Agilent 4072A/4073A
4. Double-click the Kernel Configuration icon. Figure C-12 Kernel Configuration Screen for SAM Window
5. Double-click the Driver icon. The kernel configuration window appears as shown in figure C-13. Figure C-13 Kernel Configuration Window
Appendix C
257
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for B.03.01 or Earlier) Customizing for Agilent 4072A/4073A 6. Select the "sicl" driver. Then choose Action: Remove Driver from Kernel in the kernel
configuration window. Figure C-14 Removing Driver from Kernel
7. Choose Action: Create a New Kernel in the kernel configuration window. Figure C-15 Creating New Kernel
258
Appendix C
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
8. Click Yes in the Confirmation Window. Figure C-16 Confirmation Window
Installing Software (for B.03.01 or Earlier) Customizing for Agilent 4072A/4073A
9. Click OK in the reboot the system window. Figure C-17 Reboot the System Window
10. Click OK in the following window. The new kernel is automatically rebuilt and HP-UX is rebooted. Figure C-18 Note Window
Appendix C
259
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for B.03.01 or Earlier) Customizing for Agilent 4072A/4073A
Installing Timi, Vme, and Vme2 Drivers To install the drivers, use the following procedures. 1. Log in as a superuser. 2. Open a dtterm window. 3. To start the SAM (1M) utility, type:
# sam The SAM window appears as shown in figure C-11.
Figure C-19 System Administration Manager (SAM) Window
260
Appendix C
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for B.03.01 or Earlier) Customizing for Agilent 4072A/4073A
4. Double-click the Kernel Configuration icon. Figure C-20 Kernel Configuration Screen of SAM Window
5. Double-click the Driver icon. The kernel configuration window appears as shown in figure C-13. Figure C-21 Kernel Configuration Window
Appendix C
261
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for B.03.01 or Earlier) Customizing for Agilent 4072A/4073A
6. Select the "timi", "vme", and "vme2" drivers. Then choose Action: Add Driver to Kernel in the kernel configuration window.
Figure C-22 Adding Driver to Kernel
7. Click Yes in the confirmation window as shown in figure C-23. Figure C-23 Confirmation Window
8. Click Yes in the confirmation window as shown in figure C-24. Figure C-24 Confirmation Window
262
Appendix C
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for B.03.01 or Earlier) Customizing for Agilent 4072A/4073A
9. Choose Action: Create a New Kernel in the kernel configuration window. Figure C-25 Creating New Kernel
10. Click Yes in the confirmation window. Figure C-26 Confirmation Window
Appendix C
263
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for B.03.01 or Earlier) Customizing for Agilent 4072A/4073A 11. Click OK in the reboot the system window.
Figure C-27 Reboot the System Window
12. Click OK in the following window. The new kernel is automatically rebuilt and HP-UX is rebooted. Figure C-28 Note Window
264
Appendix C
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for B.03.01 or Earlier) Customizing for Agilent 4072A/4073A
Reconfiguring SICL To reconfigure the SICL, use the following procedures. 1. Log in as a superuser. 2. Open a dtterm window. 3. Execute the /opt/sicl/bin/iosetup command with -V2 option as follows.
# /opt/sicl/bin/iosetup -V2 The I/O setup for HP-UX window then appears. 4. Choose File: Build... to rebuild the kernel as shown in figure C-29.
Figure C-29 I/O Setup for HP-UX Window
Appendix C
265
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for B.03.01 or Earlier) Customizing for Agilent 4072A/4073A
The accept configuration window appears as shown in figure C-30. Figure C-30 Accept Configuration Window
5. Click OK in the accept configuration window. The success window appears as shown in figure C-31. Figure C-31 Success Window
266
Appendix C
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for B.03.01 or Earlier) Customizing for Agilent 4072A/4073A
6. Click Build in the success window. The build kernel window appears as shown in figure C-32. Figure C-32 Build Kernel Window
7. Click OK. The new kernel is automatically rebuilt. This takes about 15 minutes. 8. After creating the new kernel, reboot the HP-UX using the /sbin/shutdown -r command.
Appendix C
267
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for B.03.01 or Earlier) Customizing for Agilent 4072A/4073A
Step 3. Customizing HP BASIC/UX
To customize HP BASIC/UX for the 4072A/4073A, execute the /home/hpsrvc/config/config.rmb command. For the detailed information, refer to the "Customizing BASIC/UX" in the appendix A.
Step 4. Customizing for Japanese Environment (Optional)
To customize for a Japanese environment, execute the /home/hpsrvc/config/config.kanji command. For the detailed information, refer to the "The /etc/dt/config/Xsession.d/9000.kanji File" in the appendix A.
Step 5. Customizing 4070 System Software
To customize the 4070 system software, execute the /home/hpsrvc/config/config.4070 command. For further details, refer to the "Customizing 4070 System Software" in the appendix A.
Executing install Command The /opt/hp4070/install/install command is executed using the /home/hpsrvc/config/config.4070 command. The install command integrates the optical interface driver into the HP-UX kernel.
NOTE
The optical interface card must be removed before executing the install command. Verify that the optical interface card is not installed in the EISA or PCI slot of the system controller. If it is, remove it before proceeding with this procedure.
NOTE
Before executing the install command, remove all of the opt_s1* files from /dev/hp4070 directory, because these files are not re-created. However these files are automatically created in the above directory when you execute the install command.
1. When using the C3600 system controller or the 745/132L system controller with the PCI slot, the following messages is displayed. In this case, skip step 2 and proceed to step 3. bus type: PCI
2. When using the 745/132L system controller with the EISA slot or 745i, perform the following procedures:
a. the following message is displayed: bus type: EISA
Enter the optical interface EISA slot number [1-4; default 1]: 1
b. Type the EISA slot number where the optical interface card will be inserted. If you press Return, slot number 1 is selected automatically.
Make note of the number used, as the optical interface card must be installed in the EISA slot with the same number.
c. To see the setup information for the DIP switches and jumper switches on the optical interface card, press the space bar to scroll the display.
Figure C-34 shows an example of the setup information displayed on the screen. This example sets DIP switches "ID1" and "ID2" to off, "ID3" through "D8" to on, and connects jumper switch "IRQ15".
268
Appendix C
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for B.03.01 or Earlier) Customizing for Agilent 4072A/4073A
d. Set the DIP switches and jumper switches on the optical interface card as shown in the setup information displayed on the screen. Figure C-33 shows the component locations on the optical interface card.
Figure C-33 Optical Interface Card Component Locations
In
Connectors for optical fiber cables
Jumper switches
DIP switches
Out
Appendix C
269
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for B.03.01 or Earlier) Customizing for Agilent 4072A/4073A
Figure C-34 Optical Interface Card Setup Information Slot1 Optical Interface Board for Agilent 4070 Switch Name: DIP Switch (S1)
This switch selects both the Interface address (addr) and Card ID.
Required setting 00111111
+---+---+-x-+-x-+-x-+-x-+-x-+-x-+on ||||||||| +-x-+-x-+---+---+---+---+---+---+off
12345678
Labels IIIIDDDD DDDD5678 1234
Slot 1 Optical Interface Board for Agilent 4070 Jumper Switches Name: Jumper Switches Switch (JP1)
This switch selects the Interrupt Request line (IRQ).
Required setting
1000000000
+---------------------------------------+
|o o o o o o o o o o|
||
|
|o o o o o o o o o o|
+---------------------------------------+
Labels
IIIIIIIIII RRRRRRRRRR QQQQQQQQQQ 1111976543 5421
270
Appendix C
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for B.03.01 or Earlier) Customizing for Agilent 4072A/4073A
3. Press the space bar to scroll until the following message is displayed: The new kernel is now ready. Is it ok to reconfigure the HP-UX kernel [y or n] ?
4. To reconfigure the kernel, type y, then press Return. 5. When the kernel reconfiguration is completed, the following message is displayed:
Is it ok to update the content of /stand/system according to the present kernel configuration [y or n; default y] ? 6. To update the /stand/system file, type y, then press Return. 7. When the update is complete, the following message is displayed: Do you want to shutdown the system now [y or n] ? 8. To shut down the system controller, type y, then press Return. 9. After the shutdown process is complete, turn off the system controller.
NOTE
After executing the install process, the install command updates the /tmp/hp4070.log file. Check this file for any errors that may have occurred.
Appendix C
271
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for B.03.01 or Earlier) Customizing for Agilent 4072A/4073A
Installing Optical Interface Card This section describes how to install the optical interface card. If you install the optical interface card in the C3600 system controller, use the procedure described in the "Installing Optical Interface Card" in the chapter 6. If you install the optical interface card in the 745/132L, use the following procedure. 1. Make sure that the shutdown process was complete, then turn off the system controller. 2. Remove the cables and power cord from the rear panel of the system controller. 3. If the system controller is mounted in the system cabinet, unmount it from the system cabinet. 4. Remove the front panel and cover as shown in figure C-35.
Figure C-35 Removing Front Panel and Top Cover (745/132L)
272
Appendix C
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for B.03.01 or Earlier) Customizing for Agilent 4072A/4073A
5. Remove the blank panel from the EISA or PCI slot position where you will install the optical interface card. This should be the same slot used to execute the install command.
6. Insert the optical interface card into the EISA or PCI slot as shown in figure C-36. Figure C-36 Optical Interface Card Installation (745/132L)
ø ù ú û
C
û
ú
ù
ø
7. Reinstall the front panel and cover. 8. If the system controller is mounted in the system cabinet, slide and secure the system controller with the rack
flanges, using torx screws. 9. Connect the cables and power cord to the system controller. 10. Connect the optical fiber cables from the testhead to the optical interface board as follows.
a. Connect the "In" cable to the "IN" connector. b. Connect the "Out" cable to the "OUT" connector. 11. Turn on and start up the system controller.
Appendix C
273
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for B.03.01 or Earlier) Customizing for Agilent 4072A/4073A
If you install the optical interface card in the 745i, use the following procedure.
1. Make sure that the shutdown process was complete, then turn off the system controller. 2. Remove the cables and power cord from the rear panel of the system controller. 3. If the system controller is mounted in the system cabinet, remove the four torx screws that secure the rack
flanges of the system controller using a torx screwdriver. Then slide the system controller about 150 millimeters toward the front. 4. Remove the EISA slot frame from the rear panel of the system controller as follows. See figure C-37
a. Remove the screws from the handles of the EISA slot frame. b. Pull the handles to remove the EISA slot frame from the system controller. 5. Install the optical interface card into the EISA slot, as follows.
a. Remove the card support from the EISA slot frame by removing the screw. b. Remove the blank panel from the EISA slot position where you will install the optical interface card. This
should be the same slot used to execute the install command. c. Insert the optical interface card into the EISA slot. d. Reinstall the card support on the EISA slot frame. 6. Reinstall the system controller EISA slot frame. 7. If the system controller is mounted in the system cabinet, slide and secure the system controller with the rack flanges, using torx screws. 8. Connect the cables and power cord to the system controller. 9. Connect the optical fiber cables from the testhead to the optical interface board as follows.
a. Connect the "In" cable to the "IN" connector. b. Connect the "Out" cable to the "OUT" connector. 10. Turn on and start up the system controller.
Figure C-37
Optical Interface Card Installation (745i)
Model 745i computer (rear view)
Handles
Screw
Slot 3 Slot 4
Slot 2 Slot 1
Screw
EISA slot frame
Screw Card support
Card
274
Appendix C
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for B.03.01 or Earlier) Customizing for Agilent 4072A/4073A
Editing /etc/opt/hp4070/config/1 File
This customization is optional. If the system configuration does not match the standard configuration, you must edit the /etc/opt/hp4070/config/1 file. Change the file to match the system configuration. For the default setting for the /etc/opt/hp4070/config/1 file, refer to the "Editing /etc/opt/hp4070/config/1 File" in the chapter 6.
Editing /etc/opt/hp4070/config/PCONFIG File
This customization is optional. If an automatic wafer prober is used with the 4072A/4073A, the GPIB address for the automatic wafer prober must be set. Agilent Technologies recommends that the GPIB address be set to the default address included in the /etc/opt/hp4070/config/PCONFIG file. For the default setting for the /etc/opt/hp4070/config/PCONFIG file, refer to the "Editing /etc/opt/hp4070/config/PCONFIG File" in the chapter 6. To change the GPIB address setting in the system software, edit the file.
Editing /etc/opt/hp4070/config/pgconnection File
This customization is optional. The /etc/opt/hp4070/config/pgconnection file includes the information of the cable connections between the pulse generators and testhead ports. To change the file to match the connection configuration, use the /opt/hp4070/bin/pgconn4070 command.
NOTE
To execute the /opt/hp4070/bin/pgconn4070, the TIS online session must be running.
For the sample of /etc/opt/hp4070/config/pgconnection file, refer to the "Editing /etc/opt/hp4070/config/pgconnection File" in the chapter 6.
Executing /opt/hp4070/install/configure Command
Execute the configure command after installing the optical interface card into the system controller and customizing the /etc/rc file, /etc/opt/hp4070/config/1 file (optional), and /etc/opt/hp4070/config/PCONFIG file (optional).
To execute the configure command, use the procedure described in the "Executing /opt/hp4070/install/configure Command" in the chapter 6.
This command confirms the 4072A/4073A tester configuration, measures the capacitance compensation data, and sets the line frequency.
NOTE
Before executing the configure command, the testhead conditions must be as follows: · The TIS server must be worked. · The wafer prober sense switch must be pushed. · The interlock pins on the testhead must be shorted. · The measurement pins must be open.
Appendix C
275
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Installing Software (for B.03.01 or Earlier) Customizing for Agilent 4072A/4073A
Customizing for Pulse Generator If the pulse generator is to be installed newly or reconfigured, perform the following: 1. Edit the /etc/opt/hp4070/config/1 file 2. Execute the /opt/hp4070/install/configure command 3. Perform the pulse level calibration
To perform the pulse level calibration, use the /opt/hp4070/bin/cal4070 command. For more information, see the Agilent 4072A/4073A Calibration Guide.
276
Appendix C
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
D Error Messages
277 Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Error Messages 1-xxxxx
1-xxxxx
· 1-10001 System software inconsistency discovered. 1-10002 System software inconsistency discovered in session login mechanism. 1-10003 System software inconsistency discovered in session logout mechanism.
Unknown error occurred during the 4070 system software execution, or login/logout session. Cannot continue the session. Execute hp4070 -logout, then execute hp4070 -login again.
· 1-10004 Cannot allocate memory.
Could not allocate enough memory. Execute hp4070 -logout, then execute hp4070 -login again.
· 1-10006 Cannot set socket buffer size. 1-10007 Failed to call socket(). 1-10008 Failed to call bind(). 1-10009 Failed to call listen(). 1-10010 Failed to call symlink(). 1-10011 Failed to call accept(). 1-10012 Failed to call connect(). 1-10013 Failed to call shmget(). 1-10014 Failed to call shmat().
Unknown error occurred in the 4070 system software. Execute hp4070 -logout, then execute hp4070 -login again. Or reboot HP-UX.
· 1-10015 Cannot open hardware configuration file(in /etc/opt/hp4070/config/). 1-10016 Cannot fstat() hardware configuration file(in /etc/opt/hp4070/config/). 1-10017 Cannot mmap() hardware configuration file(in /etc/opt/hp4070/config/). 1-10018 Cannot read() hardware configuration file(in /etc/opt/hp4070/config/). 1-10019 Cannot unmmap() hardware configuration file(in /etc/opt/hp4070/config/).
Could not open the configuration file (/etc/opt/hp4070/config/1). Check the configuration file. If problem is not found in the data, permission and so on, re-install the 4070 system software.
· 1-10020 Cannot allocate event handler table.
Too many test programs are running. Or too many events are registered by the Wait_event command. Stop unnecessary test programs.
· 1-10021 Cannot read Optical Interface Special Data Register 0. 1-10022 Cannot ioctl() Optical Interface Card. 1-10023 Cannot ioctl() Optical Interface Card. 1-10024 Cannot ioctl() Optical Interface Card. 1-10025 Cannot read Optical Interface Special Data Register N. 1-10029 Cannot ioctl() Optical Interface Card N.
Error occurred when accessing the optical interface card. Execute hp4070 -logout, then execute hp4070 -login again. Or the optical interface card may be defective.
· 1-10026 Power Fail occurred. TIS Daemon process is going to die.
Testhead was turned off. Turn the testhead on. And execute hp4070 -login.
· 1-10027 Another online TIS Daemon is running.
Another online TIS daemon is already running. Only one online TIS daemon can be running.
278
Appendix D
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Error Messages 1-xxxxx
· 1-10028 Cannot open optical interface device file.
Could not open the optical interface device file. Check the following device files. If problem is not found in the data, permission and so on, execute the configure command after removing the /dev/hp4070 directory. The permission of the file must be crw-rw-rw-.
/dev/hp4070/opt_sN /dev/hp4070/opt_sNf0 /dev/hp4070/opt_sNf1 /dev/hp4070/opt_sNf2 /dev/hp4070/opt_sNs0 /dev/hp4070/opt_sNs1 /dev/hp4070/opt_sNs2
where, N is the ISA slot number (1, 2, 3, or 4) where the optical interface card is installed.
· 1-10031 Cannot fork expmon4070 (errno=N).
Could not execute expmon4070. Check /opt/hp4070/lbin/expmon4070. The permission must be -r-xr-xr-x. If too many processes are running, kill unnecessary processes.
where, N is the error number returned by the HP-UX kernel or system call.
· 1-10032 OptCard selftest(register r/w test) error. 1-10033 OptCard selftest(FIFO memory r/w test) error. 1-10034 OptCard selftest(communication test) error.
Failed on the self-test of the optical interface card installed in the system controller. Replace the optical interface card.
· 1-10035 Test Head is not in normal mode. Cannot continue TIS Daemon.
Unknown problem occurred in the testhead. Turn off the power of the testhead and on again. Then restart the TIS server again.
· 1-20001 Client Table full. Please quit some applications that use TIS library.
Too many test programs or test algorithms are running. Stop unnecessary programs or algorithms.
· 1-20003 Error in iclear() on accessing GPIB device. 1-20004 Error in itimeout() on accessing GPIB device. 1-20005 Error in igpibllo() on accessing GPIB device. 1-20006 Error in iprintf() on accessing GPIB device. 1-20007 Error in iopen() on accessing GPIB device. 1-20008 Error in iwrite() on accessing GPIB device. 1-20009 Error in iread() on accessing GPIB device. 1-20022 Error in igpibbusstatus().
Error occurred in accessing GPIB interface. Check the GPIB interface card or the system instruments.
Appendix D
279
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Error Messages 1-xxxxx
· 1-20010 Error in ioctl() on accessing optical interface. 1-20011 Error in write() on accessing optical interface. 1-20012 Error in read() on accessing optical interface. 1-20014 Error in select() on accessing optical interface (errno=N). 1-20015 Error in select() on accessing optical interface. Error occurred in accessing the optical interface. Check the optical interface card or direction of optical interface cables. where, N is the error number returned by the HP-UX kernel or system call.
· 1-20013 Optical Interface Timeout. Time out occurred when accessing the testhead. Check the test program. Or turn off the testhead.
· 1-20016 Error in read() on accessing socket. 1-20018 Error in close() of socket. 1-20019 Error in write() on accessing socket. Error occurred in accessing the testhead CPU.
· 1-20020 Cannot load C compensation data file. Could not read the capacitance compensation data. Check the data and permission of the /etc/opt/hp4070/ccdata file and /etc/opt/hp4070/ccdata0 file.
· 1-20021 C compensation data is not loaded. TIS command needs the capacitance compensation data. Related to error No. 1-20020. Solve error No. 1-20020.
· 1-20085 CMU GPIB error occurred. GPIB error occurred during communication with the 4284A. Check the GPIB interface card, GPIB cable, and 4284A.
· 1-20086 DVM GPIB error occurred. GPIB error occurred during communication with the 3458A. Check the GPIB interface card, GPIB cable, and 3458A.
· 1-30001 Cannot make connection because no session is logged in now. No session is logged in now. Execute hp4070 -login.
· 1-30002 Cannot make connection because of wrong session id. Wrong session ID was specified. Use correct session ID, or log out of unnecessary session.
· 1-30003 Request was refused because the TIS Daemon is not in the normal state. Current state is N. where, N (=1 to 6) means the following status.
1: Testhead power fail occurred. 2: Testhead emergency (Over Current or Over voltage) occurred. 3: Test fixture is open. 4: Interlock is open. 5: Testhead firmware is abnormal. Replace Testhead CPU board. 6: Another client program (test algorithm, etc.) is in abort process. This error message appears because of the above status. Solve the problem corresponding to the status.
280
Appendix D
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Error Messages 1-xxxxx
· 1-30004 Optical Interface timeout. Time out occurred during communication with the testhead. Check the optical interface card and the optical fiber cables.
· 1-30005 GPIB timeout. Time out occurred during communication with the system instruments. Check the GPIB interface card, GPIB cable, and the system instruments.
· 1-30006 Hardware Exception occurred and cannot accept any request. Sub-message for error No. 1-30003.
· 1-30007 A client is in aborting sequence. Sub-message for error No. 1-30003.
· 1-30008 SICL error occurred: N. Error occurred during communication with the system instruments. Check the GPIB interface card, GPIB cable, and the system instruments.
· 1-30009 Cannot make connection. Only one Debugging Panel may run at a time. Tried to open a second Interactive Debugging Panel in same session. You can open only one debugging panel at a time in same session.
· 1-30010 Cannot make connection. Another Diagnostics is running. Only one Diagnostics program can run at a time. Use the Diagnostics program that is already running. Or stop the program that is already running to newly run the Diagnostics program.
· 1-30011 Cannot make connection. Another Performance Verification is running. Only one performance verification (PV) program can run at a time. Use the program that is already running. Or stop the program that is already running to newly run the PV program.
· 1-30012 Request was refused because Diagnostics or PV is running. Test program using TIS cannot be executed when the Diagnostics program or the performance verification (PV) program is running. Stop the Diagnostics program or the PV program to run the test program using TIS.
· 1-30013 TIS command cannot be executed because the testhead is in power failure. TIS command cannot be executed because a power failure was detected in the testhead. Turn on the power to the testhead again, then restart the TIS server.
· 1-30014 TIS command cannot be executed because over voltage or current is forced to SMUs. The TIS command cannot be executed because over voltage or over current is being forced to the SMUs from external instruments or SMUs.
· 1-30015 TIS command cannot be executed because the fixture is open. The TIS command cannot be executed because the test fixture lid is open. Close the lid of test fixture.
· 1-30016 TIS command cannot be executed because the interlock is open. The TIS command cannot be executed because the interlock circuit is open. Close the interlock circuit.
· 1-30017 TIS command cannot be executed because the testhead cannot work properly. The TIS command cannot be executed because the testhead cannot work properly. There is something wrong with the optical interface communication, or something wrong with the testhead. Contact the nearest Agilent Technologies Sales and Service office if the system cannot be restarted.
Appendix D
281
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Error Messages 1-xxxxx
· 1-30018 TIS command cannot be executed because the system is running an internal process.
The TIS command cannot be executed because the system is running an internal process.
· 1-30019 TIS command cannot be executed because an abnormal condition exists.
The TIS command cannot be executed because an abnormal condition in the system. Remove the abnormal condition before executing the TIS command again.
· 1-30021 Detected wrong (Type1) pin board(s). Exchange pin(s) marked with "*" for the Type2 pin board(s). 1-30022 Detected wrong (Type1) chuck connection pin board. Exchange for the Type2 chuck connection pin board. 1-30023 Detected wrong (Type1) low current input board(s). Exchange for the Type2 low current input board(s). 1-30024 Detected wrong (Type1) kelvin input board(s). Exchange for the Type2 kelvin input board(s). 1-30025 Detected wrong type of kelvin input board or low current input board(s). Exchange for the correct type of kelvin or low current input board(s).
If Type1 is HR type and Type2 is standard type: The high-resolution type board is installed in the 4072A. Exchange the high-resolution type board for the standard type board.
If Type1 is standard type and Type2 is HR type: The standard type board is installed in the 4073A. Exchange the standard type board for the high-resolution type board.
282
Appendix D
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Error Messages 2-xxxxx
2-xxxxx
· 2-10002 Cannot open file. filename: File Could not open the file specified by File. Confirm the file name and permission of the file.
· 2-10004 An illegal format data exists. filename: File, data: Data Tried to open file with invalid data format. Change the data format of the data Data in the file File.
· 2-10008 An improper option is specified. option: Option Improper value (Option) was specified for the option. Specify the option properly.
· 2-10009 An improper argument is specified. option: Option, argument: Argument Argument value (Argument) invalid for the option (Option) was specified. Specify the argument properly.
· 2-10014 Cannot execute command. command path: Path Could not execute the command path Path. Re-install the 4070 system software.
· 2-10019 Cannot get character input. Could not read the character input. Maximum 1024 characters.
· 2-11001 Failed to write the test selection file. Check permission. Un-specifiable error occurred in write operation of the test selection file. Check the permission of the file.
· 2-13002 An error occurred in TIS. Error occurred in TIS. Refer to the additional messages.
· 2-14001 Cannot open Optical Interface Card device file. Could not open the device file for the optical interface card. Check the configuration file (/etc/opt/hp4070/config/1) and specify the proper slot number for the optical interface card. Or kill the unnecessary process that opened the optical interface card device file.
· 2-14003 An error occurred in Optical Interface Card Loopback test. Optical interface card failed the loopback test. Check the optical fiber cables or the optical interface card.
· 2-21001 No test is selected. Please select at least one test. No test is selected in the "Test Selection" field. Select at least one test.
· 2-21002 No SMU is selected. Please select at least one SMU. No SMU is selected in the "Test Selection" field. Select at least one SMU.
· 2-21003 No Pin is selected. Please select at least one pin, chuck or input board. No pin is selected in the "Test Selection" field. Select at least one pin, chuck pin, or input board.
· 2-21004 Only a numeric value is allowed here. Invalid character (non-numeric) is entered in the input field for numeric character. Enter a numeric value.
· 2-21005 Only an integer value is allowed here. Invalid character (non-integer) is entered in the input field for integer. Enter an integer value.
Appendix D
283
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Error Messages 2-xxxxx
· 2-21006 Invalid repeat count. Must be 1 to 999999 (integer). Wrong value is specified for how many times to repeat the test. The value must be 1 to 999999.
· 2-21007 Invalid margin ratio. Must be 0.0 to 1.0 (float). Wrong value is specified for the marginal ratio used to define the marginal test limit. The value must be 0.0 to 1.0.
· 2-21008 Can't read the file. The file does not exist or no read permission. The file could not be read. The file does not exist or does not have read permission. Check if the file exists or check the permission of the file.
· 2-21009 Can't write the file. The file or directory has no write permission, or the directory does not exist. The file could not be written. The file or directory for the file does not have write permission. Or the directory does not exist. Check that the directory exists, and check the permission of the directory and the file.
· 2-21012 Failed to start diagnostics (errno = N). HP-UX kernel error No. N occurred in starting diagnostics. Check if the /opt/hp4070/lbin/diagBody4070 program exists and check the permission of the program. If the program does not exist, re-install the 4070 system software. Or check the number of processes in progress, and kill unnecessary process.
· 2-21013 Can't preserve the result data file (errno = N). Check permission or maybe diagnostics was not executed yet. HP-UX kernel error No. N occurred in preserving the result data file by File: Preserve data... menu on the Diagnostics window. Execute diagnostics once at least. Or check the permission of the file and /var/opt/hp4070/diag directory.
· 2-21014 Failed to write the result data (errno = N). Check permission. HP-UX kernel error No. N occurred in writing the result data. Check the permission of the file and /var/opt/hp4070/diag directory.
· 2-21015 Failed to read result data file (errno = N). Check permission. HP-UX kernel error No. N occurred in reading the result data. Check the permission of the file and /var/opt/hp4070/diag directory.
· 2-21016 Failed to write to result data file (errno = N). Check permission or free disk space. HP-UX kernel error No. N occurred in writing the result data file. Check the permission of the file and /var/opt/hp4070/diag directory. Or check the free disk space. File system full may cause this error.
· 2-23001 ADC Board is defective or not installed. The high-resolution ADC board is not installed or may be defective. Install or replace the board.
· 2-23002 GNDU is defective or not installed. The GNDU board is not installed or may be defective. Install or replace the board.
· 2-23003 Chuck Connection Board is defective or not installed. The chuck connection pin board is not installed or may be defective. Install or replace the board.
· 2-23004 LC Input Board (Port Port_No.) is defective or not installed. The low current input board is not installed or may be defective. Install or replace the board.
284
Appendix D
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Error Messages 2-xxxxx
· 2-23005 Kelvin Input Board is defective or not installed. The kelvin input board is not installed or may be defective. Install or replace the board.
· 2-23006 CMU Input Board is defective or not installed. The CMU input board is not installed or may be defective. Install or replace the board.
· 2-23007 Relay Test Board (Block Block_No.) is defective or not installed. The relay test board is not installed or may be defective. Install or replace the board.
· 2-23011 ADC Board attenuation factor measurement failed. port: Port, expected: Data1, measured: Data2 High-resolution ADC board failed the attenuation factor measurement test. If all ports failed this test, replace the high-resolution ADC board, otherwise follow the diagnostics execution results.
· 2-23012 ADC Board guard amp offset measurement failed. port: Port, measured: Data High-resolution ADC board failed the guard amplifier offset measurement test. Follow the diagnostics execution results. If all ports failed this test, replace the high-resolution ADC board.
· 2-23021 Status error occurred in SMU. port: Port, status: Status Status error occurred in the SMU specified by Port. Check the SMU if the 4070 failed the diagnostics.
· 2-23022 Status error occurred in CMU. status: Status Status error occurred in the CMU. Check the CMU if the 4070 failed the diagnostics.
· 2-23023 Status error occurred in DVM. status: Status Status error occurred in the DVM. Check the DVM if the 4070 failed the diagnostics.
· 2-23031 HF Matrix Board N is defective or not installed. Reference configuration file (/etc/opt/hp4070/config/refconfig1) shows the existence of HF matrix board N, but it is not detected by the testhead firmware. HF matrix board may not be installed or may be defective. Install or replace the board.
· 2-23032 HF Matrix Addressing Board is defective or not installed. Reference configuration file (/etc/opt/hp4070/config/refconfig1) shows the existence of HF matrix addressing board, but it is not detected by the testhead firmware. HF matrix addressing board is not installed or may be defective. Install or replace the board.
· 2-23033 Pulse Switch N Board is defective or not installed. Reference configuration file (/etc/opt/hp4070/config/refconfig1) shows the existence of pulse switch board N, but it is not detected by the testhead firmware. Pulse switch board N is not installed or may be defective. Install or replace the board.
· 2-23041 SMU (port: N) is defective or not installed. The SMU board is not installed in port N or may be defective. Confirm that the SMU configuration. hp4070 -login command displays the 4070 system configuration.
· 2-44343 Low Current Input Board N inner port test was skipped. The low current input board relay test was skipped because of an SMU error. Repair the SMU connected to the low current input board N.
· 2-31001 File already exists. Do you want to replace it? If you want to replace the data, select OK button. Or else, select Cancel button.
Appendix D
285
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Error Messages 2-xxxxx
· 2-31002 The test(s) requested on non-existent resources will be ignored.
Invalid test item, SMU, or pin number is selected. The selection is ignored.
· 2-33001 Cannot identify Pin Board. pin: Pin
Actual pin board configuration did not match the configuration file (/etc/opt/hp4070/config/refconfig1). Check the configuration file and define the actual configuration.
· 2-33002 Cannot identify SMU Board. port: Port
Actual SMU configuration did not match the configuration file (/etc/opt/hp4070/config/refconfig1). Check the configuration file and define the actual configuration.
· 2-33003 Cannot identify CMU.
Actual CMU configuration did not match the configuration file (/etc/opt/hp4070/config/refconfig1). Check the configuration file and define the actual configuration.
· 2-33004 Cannot identify DVM.
Actual DVM configuration did not match the configuration file (/etc/opt/hp4070/config/refconfig1). Check the configuration file and define the actual configuration.
· 2-33005 Testhead Power Line Cycle is mismatching. reference: Ref [Hz], actual: Act [Hz]
Actual line frequency did not match the configuration file (/etc/opt/hp4070/config/refconfig1). Check the configuration file and define the actual frequency.
· 2-33006 Cannot identify HF Matrix.
The command attempts to control the HF matrix, even though the reference configuration file (/etc/opt/hp4070/config/refconfig1) has the information of no MF matrix installed. Check the following items:
If the command that you execute is correct. If the reference configuration file includes the correct system configuration information.
· 2-33007 Cannot identify Pulse Switch.
The command attempts to control the pulse switch, even though the reference configuration file (/etc/opt/hp4070/config/refconfig1) has the information of no pulse switch installed. Check the following items:
If the command that you execute is correct. If the reference configuration file includes the correct system configuration information.
· 2-33008 Cannot identify PGn.
The command attempts to control the PGn, even though the reference configuration file (/etc/opt/hp4070/config/refconfig1) has the information of no PGn installed. Check the following items:
If the command that you execute is correct. If the reference configuration file includes the correct system configuration information.
286
Appendix D
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Error Messages 2-xxxxx
· 2-33009 PGn type or GPIB address mismatch.
The PGn definition in the reference configuration file (/etc/opt/hp4070/config/refconfig1) is not correct. Check if the reference configuration file includes the correct system configuration information.
· 2-33011Cannot find pin for connection test. Port:Port.
Cannot execute the connection test. At least one pin board must be installed in:
Slot 1 to 24 for the HF ports 1, 2, and 3. Slot 25 to 48 for the HF ports 4, 5, and 6. Slot 1 to 48 for the AUX ports 1 to 8.
· 2-41001 Margin detection disabled.
Detection mode for the marginal limit was disabled.
· 2-45001 Relay contact check failed. description: Testcase measured: Data1, offset: Offset, Rmeas: Data2 Rlimit: Limit
Failed in the contact check of the HF Matrix Relay Test. Check the connection of the short adapter. Or do troubleshooting and replace defective part.
· 2-45002 Relay stuck check failed. description: Testcase board: board, relay: relay, measured: Data1, expected: Data2
Failed in the open check of the HF matrix relay test. Do troubleshooting and replace defective part.
· 2.45101 PG selftest failed. description: PGn Status code: Code Message: PG_Error_Message
Failed in the selftest of the PG. Do troubleshooting and replace defective part.
· 2-45201 PG connection test failed. description: PGn port: Port, expected: Data1, measured: Data2
Failed in the PG connection test. Check the cable connection and connect properly. Or do troubleshooting and replace defective part.
· 2-45202 PG connection test marginally passed. description: PGn port: Port, expected: Data1, measured:Data2
Passed in the PG connection test but the result is nearly test limit. Check the cable connection and connect properly. Or do troubleshooting and replace defective part.
· 2-45301 Pulse switch test failed. description: PGn port: Port, control: TH, expected: Data1, measured: Data2
Failed in the testhead controlled pulse switch test. Check the cable connection and connect properly. Or do troubleshooting and replace defective part.
Appendix D
287
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Error Messages 2-xxxxx
· 2-45302 Pulse switch test marginally passed. description: PGn port: Port, control: TH, expected: Data1, measured: Data2
Passed in the testhead controlled pulse switch test but the result is nearly test limit. Check the cable connection and connect properly. Or do troubleshooting and replace defective part.
· 2-45303 Pulse switch test failed. description: PGn port: Port, control: N, switch: Switch, expected: Data1, measured: Data2
Failed in the PG controlled pulse switch test (multiplexer switch). Check the cable connection and connect properly. Or do troubleshooting and replace defective part.
· 2-45304 Pulse switch test marginally passed. description: PGn port: Port, control: N, switch: Switch, expected: Data1, measured: Data2
Passed in the PG controlled pulse switch test (multiplexer switch) but the result is nearly test limit. Check the cable connection and connect properly. Or do troubleshooting and replace defective part.
· 2-45305 Pulse switch test failed. description: PGn port: Port, control: N, switch: Switch, expected: Data1, measured: Data2
Failed in the PG controlled pulse switch test (open/close switch). Check the cable connection and connect properly. Or do troubleshooting and replace defective part.
· 2-45306 Pulse switch test marginally passed. description: PGn port: Port, control: N, switch: Switch, expected: Data1, measured: Data2
Passed in the PG controlled pulse switch test (open/close switch) but the result is nearly test limit. Check the cable connection and connect properly. Or do troubleshooting and replace defective part.
· 2-45401 PG output level test failed. description: PGn port: Port, expected: Data1, measured: Data2
Failed in the PG output level test. Check the cable connection and connect properly. Or do troubleshooting and replace defective part.
· 2-45402 PG output level test marginally passed. description: PGn port: Port, expected: Data1, measured: Data2
Passed in the PG output level test but the result is nearly test limit. Check the cable connection and connect properly. Or do troubleshooting and replace defective part.
· 2-45501 PG trigger test failed. description: PGn port: Port, expected: Data1, measured: Data2
Failed in the PG trigger test. Check the cable connection and connect properly. Or do troubleshooting and replace defective part.
288
Appendix D
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Error Messages 2-xxxxx
· 2-45502 PG trigger test marginally passed. description: PGn port: Port, expected: Data1, measured: Data2 Passed in the PG trigger test but the result is nearly test limit. Check the cable connection and connect properly. Or do troubleshooting and replace defective part.
Appendix D
289
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Error Messages 3-xxxxx
3-xxxxx
· 3-10001 System software inconsistency discovered. Unknown error occurred during the Agilent 4070 system software execution. Cannot continue the session.
· 3-10002 Cannot open file. filename: File Could not open the file specified by File. Check the file name and permission of the file.
· 3-10004 An illegal format data exists. filename: File, data: Data Tried to open file with invalid data format. Change the data format of the data Data in the file File or remake dataflow.
· 3-10006 Cannot write data to file. filename: Filename Could not write data to Filename. Check the permission of file or directory. Or check the free disk space. File system full may cause this error.
· 3-10015 Cannot execute command. command path: Path Check the Path command. The command may not have execute permission. If problem is not found, re-install Agilent 4070 system software.
· 3-10023 Failed to open Standard Set calibration data directory. Could not open /etc/opt/hp4070/diag/caldata directory. Check the data directory. If problem is not found in the directory, permission and so on, re-install the Agilent 4070 system software.
· 3-10024 Cannot rename file. filename: Filename Could not rename the file. Check the permission of file or directory. If problem is not found, re-install the Agilent 4070 system software.
· 3-11001 Failed to write the test selection file. Un-specifiable error occurred during write operation of the test selection file. Check the permission of file.
· 3-11002 Failed to open temporary PVheader file. Could not open /var/opt/hp4070/diag/PVheader file. Check the free disk space. File system full may cause this error. If problem is not found, re-install the Agilent 4070 system software.
· 3-11003 pvBody4070 process is already running. Something is wrong. The pvBody4070 process has been started. Check the pvBody process.
· 3-11004 Failed to open pipe (errno = N). HP-UX kernel error No. N occurred during communication with diagnostics program. Exit from the Agilent 4070 system software environment, then log into it again. Then execute diagnostics program.
· 3-11005 Failed to invoke diagBody4070 program (errno = N). HP-UX kernel error No. N occurred when starting diagnostics. Check if the diagBody4070 program exists and check the permission of the program. If the program does not exist, re-install the Agilent 4070 system software. Or check the number of processes in progress, and kill unnecessary process.
· 3-13002 An error occurred in TIS. Error occurred in TIS. Refer to the additional messages.
290
Appendix D
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Error Messages 3-xxxxx
· 3-16001 Memory exhausted. The measurement data could not be loaded because of small free memory space. Stop unnecessary applications and close windows to increase free memory.
· 3-16010 Failed to open the file. Check permission or diskette. The file was not loaded/saved because error occurred during load/save of file. Check the permission of the file. Or check the diskette.
· 3-16011 Failed to read the file. Check permission or diskette. The file was not loaded because error occurred during load of file. Check the permission of the file. Or check the diskette.
· 3-16012 Failed to write the file. Check permission or diskette. The file was not saved because error occurred during save of file. Check the permission of the file. Or check the diskette.
· 3-16013 Failed to end printing (errno = N). Error No. N occurred at end of printing. Cannot close the pipe for LP command.
· 3-20001 Failed to read Standard Set calibration data. Could not read the data file in /etc/opt/hp4070/diag/caldata directory. Check the permission of the data file and directory.
· 3-20002 Failed to write Standard Set calibration data. Could not write the data file in /etc/opt/hp4070/diag/caldata directory. Check the permission of the data file and directory.
· 3-20003 Failed to remove Standard Set calibration data. Could not remove the data file in /etc/opt/hp4070/diag/caldata directory. Check the permission of the data file and directory.
· 3-21001 No test is selected. Please select at least one test. No test is selected in the "Test Selection" field. Select at least one test.
· 3-21002 No SMU is selected. Please select at least one SMU. No SMU is selected in the "SMU Selection" field. Select at least one SMU.
· 3-21003 No Pin is selected. Please select at least one pin, chuck or input board. No pin is selected in the "Pin Selection" field. Select at least one pin or chuck pin.
· 3-21004 Failed to open the profile data file. Could not open the profile data file. Check if the file exists and permission of file or directory. If this message is displayed when you open the system default file, check the /etc/opt/hp4070/diag/PVprofile file.
· 3-21005 Failed to read the profile data file. Could not read the profile data file. Check if the file exists and permission of file or directory.
· 3-21006 Failed to write to the profile data file. Could not write the profile data file. Check if the file exists and permission of file or directory. If this message is displayed when you write the system default file, check the /etc/opt/hp4070/diag/PVprofile file.
Appendix D
291
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Error Messages 3-xxxxx
· 3-21008 Can't read the file. The file does not exist or no read permission, or the directory does not exist. The file could not be read. The file or directory for the file does not have read permission. Or the directory does not exist. Check that the directory exists, and check the permission of the directory and the file.
· 3-21009 Can't write the file. The file or directory does not have write permission, or the directory does not exist. The file could not be written. The file or directory for the file does not have write permission. Or the directory does not exist. Check that the directory exists, and check the permission of the directory and the file.
· 3-21010 The DMM address for PV is not specified. Specify GPIB address in Configuration Window. · 3-21011 Standard C/R set to be used is not specified. Specify their serial numbers in Configuration
Window. · 3-21012 Specified value for Equipment_Name exceeds the ±5% range limit against the nominal value. Set
the correct value. · 3-21013 GPIB address must be integer value. Specify an integer value for DMM address.
A non-integer value is specified for GPIB address. Specify an integer value. · 3-21022 The Oscilloscope address for PV is not specified.
Specify GPIB address in Configuration Window. No GPIB address for the 54750A or 86100A oscilloscope is specified in the Standard Selection window. Specify the GPIB address of the oscilloscope. · 3-21023 Specified Oscilloscope GPIB address is an integer. Specify an integer value. Specified GPIB address value for the 54750A or 86100A oscilloscope is not integer. Specify a proper integer value for the GPIB address of the oscilloscope. · 3-23001 ADC Board is defective or not installed. The high-resolution ADC board is not installed or may be defective. Install or replace the board. · 3-23002 GNDU Board is defective or not installed. The GNDU board is not installed or may be defective. Install or replace the board. · 3-23003 Chuck Connection Pin Board is defective or not installed. The chuck connection pin board is not installed or may be defective. Install or replace the board. · 3-23004 LC Input Board (Port Port_No.) is defective or not installed. The low current input board is not installed or may be defective. Install or replace the board. · 3-23005 Kelvin Input Board is defective or not installed. The Kelvin input board is not installed or may be defective. Install or replace the board. · 3-23006 CMU Input Board is defective or not installed. The CMU input board is not installed or may be defective. Install or replace the board. · 3-23007 Relay Test Board (Block Block_No.) is defective or not installed. The relay test board is not installed or may be defective. Install or replace the board.
292
Appendix D
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Error Messages 3-xxxxx
· 3-23011 ADC Board attenuation factor measurement failed. port: Port, expected: Data1, measured: Data2 The high-resolution ADC board failed the attenuation factor measurement test. Follow the performance verification execution results. If all ports failed this test, replace the high-resolution ADC board.
· 3-23012 ADC Board guard amp offset measurement failed. port: port, measured: Data The high-resolution ADC board failed the guard amplifier offset measurement test. Follow the diagnostics execution results. If all ports failed this test, replace the high-resolution ADC board.
· 3-23021 Status error occurred in SMU. port: port, status: Data Status error occurred in the SMU specified by Port. Check the SMU if the Agilent 4071A/4072A failed the performance verification.
· 3-23022 Status error occurred in CMU. status: Status Status error occurred in the CMU. Check the CMU if the Agilent 4071A/4072A failed the performance verification.
· 3-23023 Status error occurred in DVM. status: Status Status error occurred in the DVM. Check the DVM if the Agilent 4071A/4072A failed the performance verification.
· 3-23030 Error in iopen() on GPIB device (DMM for PV). An error in iopen() occurred when the PV4070 program tries to communicate the DMM (3458A). Confirm if the specified logical unit of the DMM is correct or if the SICL configuration has the specified logical unit entry.
· 3-23031 DMM for PV is not found. The DMM (3458A) for PV is not responded by the serial polling on the specified logical unit+GPIB address. Check the following items:
If the GPIB address setting of the DMM is correct. If another GPIB device other than the DMM is on the specified GPIB address. If the GPIB cable is not broken. · 3-23032 The DMM address must specify both logical unit and GPIB address. Logical unit or GPIB address of the DMM is not specified in the Standard Selection window. Specify both the logical unit and GPIB address of the DMM. · 3-23034 Error in iread()/iwrite() on GPIB device (DMM for PV). An error occurred during the HP-UX communication between the computer and the DMM (3458A). Check the following items:
If the GPIB cable is not broken. If the GPIB interface of the computer is not broken. If the GPIB interface of the DMM (3458A) is not broken. · 3-23036 Each test pin must be connected to different connector pin. Multiple test pins are connected to the same connector. Change the pin assignment.
Appendix D
293
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Error Messages 3-xxxxx
· 3-23051 HF Matrix Board N is defective or not installed. Reference configuration file (/etc/opt/hp4070/config/refconfig1) shows the existence of HF matrix board N, but it is not detected by the testhead firmware. HF matrix board may not be installed or may be defective. Install or replace the board.
· 3-23052 HF Matrix Addressing Board is defective or not installed. Reference configuration file (/etc/opt/hp4070/config/refconfig1) shows the existence of HF matrix addressing board, but it is not detected by the testhead firmware. HF matrix addressing board is not installed or may be defective. Install or replace the board.
· 3-23053 Pulse Switch N Board is defective or not installed. Reference configuration file (/etc/opt/hp4070/config/refconfig1) shows the existence of pulse switch board N, but it is not detected by the testhead firmware. Pulse switch board N is not installed or may be defective. Install or replace the board.
· 3-23054 Error in iopen() on GPIB device (Oscilloscope for PV). An error in iopen() occurred when the PV4070 program tried to communicate the 54750A or 86100A oscilloscope. Confirm if the specified logical unit of the 54750A or 86100A is correct or if the SICL configuration has the specified logical unit entry.
· 3-23055 Oscilloscope for PV is not found. The oscilloscope (54750A or 86100A) for PV is not responded by the serial polling on the specified logical unit+GPIB address. Check the following items: If the GPIB address setting of the oscilloscope is correct. If another GPIB device other than the oscilloscope is on the specified GPIB address. If the GPIB cable is not broken.
· 3-23056 The Oscilloscope address must specify both logical unit and GPIB address. Logical unit or GPIB address of the oscilloscope is not specified in the Standard Selection window. Specify both the logical unit and GPIB address of the oscilloscope.
· 3-23057 Error in iread()/iwrite() on GPIB device (Oscilloscope for PV). An error occurred during the HP-UX communication between the computer and the oscilloscope (54750A or 86100A). Check the following items:
If the GPIB cable is not broken. If the GPIB interface of the computer is not broken. If the GPIB interface of the oscilloscope is not broken. · 3-23070 Error in itimeout() on GPIB device (DMM for PV). 3-23071 Error in iclear() on GPIB device (DMM for PV). 3-23072 Error in itermchr() on GPIB device (DMM for PV). An error occurred when the computer tried to initialize the DMM (3458A). Check the following items:
If the GPIB cable is not broken. If the GPIB interface of the computer is not broken. If the GPIB interface of the DMM is not broken. If the DMM is working correctly.
294
Appendix D
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Error Messages 3-xxxxx
· 3-23080 Error in itimeout() on GPIB device (Oscilloscope for PV). 3-23081 Error in iclear() on GPIB device (Oscilloscope for PV). 3-23082 Error in itermchr() on GPIB device (Oscilloscope for PV). An error occurred when the computer tried to initialize the oscilloscope (54750A or 86100A). Check the following items: If the GPIB cable is not broken. If the GPIB interface of the computer is not broken. If the oscilloscope is working correctly. If the GPIB interface of the oscilloscope is not broken.
· 3-24302 Cannot find available SMU. Please check using DIAG4070. Could not find available SMU for calibrating the relay test board. Check the testhead configuration by using DIAG4070.
· 3-24303 Failed to calibrate a relay test board. Please check using DIAG4070. Could not calibrate a relay test board and could not check of measurement pin position is correct. Check the relay test board by using DIAG4070.
· 3-24501 Each test pin must be connected to different connector pin. Multiple test pins are connected to the same connector. Change the pin assignment.
· 3-24801 Cannot specify chuck connection pin for test pin. Chuck connection pin was specified to be CMU bias test pin. Set CMU bias test pin to other pin.
· 3-24901 One of 1/2/3/4/48 pin should be available for SMU Output Resistance Test. Check the pin board 1, 2, 3, 4 and 48 by using DIAG4070.
· 3-24902 Pin N is defective or not installed. SMU Output Resistance Test needs this pin board. The pin N is not installed or may be defective. Check the pin N by using DIAG4070.
· 3-24903 The SMU Output Resistance Test requires at least two SMUs. SMU is defective or at least two SMUs are not installed. Check the SMU function and configuration by using DIAG4070.
· 3-24951 Each test pin must be in different block. Pulse level test and pulse parameter test require that at least one pin board is installed in each matrix block of the testhead. One pin board must be installed in the slot numbers 1 to 24, and another pin board must be in the numbers 25 to 48.
· 3-24952 Each test pin must be a multiple of 4. Test pins specified for the pulse parameter test must be multiples of 4. That is, they are 4, 8, 12, 16,..., 48. Check the pin configuration.
· 3-25001 Calibration Bus(block: N) does not have enough performance. Please check using DIAG4070. The calibration is discontinued because calibration bus does not have enough performance. Check the calibration bus by using DIAG4070 and calibrate again.
Appendix D
295
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Error Messages 3-xxxxx
· 3-25002 SMU N does not have enough performance. Please check using DIAG4070. (V [V]: I [A], V [V]: I [A])
The calibration is discontinued because SMU N does not have enough performance. Check the SMU N by using DIAG4070 and calibrate again.
· 3-25003 Failed to measure Reference Resistor. (measured: Measured_R [ohm], expected: Expected_R [ohm])
3-25004 Failed to measure Reference Resistor. (expected: R1 [ohm], min: R2 [ohm], max: R3 [ohm])
Could not measure the reference resistor. Check the cable connections, DMM for PV, and high-resolution ADC board.
· 3-25011 ADC Reference Volt measurement failed. (measured: Measured_V [V], expected: Expected_V [V]).
3-25012 ADC B-COM Volt measurement failed.(B-COM: V [V])
Check the high-resolution ADC board by using DIAG4070. Or check the cable connections.
· 3-25021 ADC R Ref Calibration must be executed before SMU R Calibration.
The R Ref Calibration was not executed before SMU Ref Calibration. Re-calibrate SMU reference by using Cal SMU.
· 3-25031 Vtop/Vbase measurement for skew calibration was failed. Check PGn-HFm connection.
Failed to measure Vtop or Vbase value for the skew calibration. Check the cable connections between the PGn and HFm. If the skew calibration still fails with this error, check the cable connections between the PV pulse fixture and signal input connector of the oscilloscope.
· 3-25032 PGn delay time measurement for skew calibration was failed.
Failed to measure delay times for the skew calibration. Check the cable connections between the PGn and HFm. If the skew calibration still fails with this error, check the cable connections between the PV pulse fixture and signal input connector of the oscilloscope.
· 3-26001 Can't read the file.The file does not exist or no read permission or illegal path name is specified. Check the path name.
· 3-26002 Can't write the file. The file or directory has no write permission, or an illegal path name is specified. Check the path name.
· 3-26003 Failed to initiate spooler command. Check the specified command.
· 3-26004 Failed to print (errno = Error).
Could not send the data to spooler command. Check the spooler setting.
· 3-26006 Failed to open diskette directory. Check the following: DOS format diskette is inserted into the disk drive. The specified disk drive path name is correct. The scsifloppy device driver is present in the HP-UX kernel. The DOS-UTIL fileset is installed.
· 3-26010 File format error. Specified field delimiter is not found. Check the file format and delimiter specification.
· 3-26011 File format error. Specified string quotation mark is not found. Check the file format and quotation specification.
· 3-26012 File format error. Numerical value is not found in a numeric field.
296
Appendix D
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Error Messages 3-xxxxx
· 3-26013 File format error. No valid data.
· 3-27001 An error occurred in Testhead. status: Status
Testhead timeout occurred when ADC board was calibrated. Check the ADC board, testhead CPU board and so on.
· 3-31001 File already exists. Do you want to overwrite it?
If you want to overwrite the data, select OK button. If not, select Cancel button.
· 3-31002 The test(s) requested on non-existent resources will be ignored.
Invalid test item, SMU, or pin number is selected. The selection is ignored.
· 3-33001 Cannot identify Pin Board. pin: Pin
Actual pin board configuration did not match the configuration file (/etc/opt/hp4070/config/refconfig1). Check the configuration file and define the actual configuration.
· 3-33002 Cannot identify SMU Board. port: Port
Actual SMU configuration did not match the configuration file (/etc/opt/hp4070/config/refconfig1). Check the configuration file and define the actual configuration.
· 3-33003 Cannot identify CMU.
Actual CMU configuration did not match the configuration file (/etc/opt/hp4070/config/refconfig1). Check the configuration file and define the actual configuration.
· 3-33004 Cannot identify DVM.
Actual DVM configuration did not match the configuration file (/etc/opt/hp4070/config/refconfig1). Check the configuration file and define the actual configuration.
· 3-33005 Testhead Power Line Cycle in config file does not match actual line frequency. reference: Ref [Hz], actual: Act [Hz]
Actual line frequency did not match the configuration file (/etc/opt/hp4070/config/refconfig1). Check the configuration file and define the actual frequency.
· 3-33006 Cannot identify HF Matrix.
The command attempts to control the HF matrix, even though the reference configuration file (/etc/opt/hp4070/config/refconfig1) has the information of no MF matrix installed. Check the following items:
If the command that you execute is correct. If the reference configuration file includes the correct system configuration information.
· 3-33007 Cannot identify Pulse Switch.
The command attempts to control the pulse switch, even though the reference configuration file (/etc/opt/hp4070/config/refconfig1) has the information of no pulse switch installed. Check the following items:
If the command that you execute is correct. If the reference configuration file includes the correct system configuration information.
Appendix D
297
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Error Messages 3-xxxxx
· 3-33088 Cannot identify PGn.
The command attempts to control the PGn, even though the reference configuration file (/etc/opt/hp4070/config/refconfig1) has the information of no PGn installed. Check the following items:
If the command that you execute is correct. If the reference configuration file includes the correct system configuration information.
· 3-36001 File already exists. Do you want to overwrite it?
If you want to overwrite the data, click OK button. If not, click Cancel button.
· 3-41001 Is it ok to remove the Standard Set calibration data? Note that this operation is not recoverable.
If you want to remove the data, select OK button. If not, select Cancel button.
· 3-41002 Do you want to discard all unsaved changes? Note that this operation is not recoverable.
If you want to discard all unsaved changes, select OK button. If not, select Cancel button.
· 3-41003 The currently modified data will be lost. Do you want to save them before loading the new Standard Set data?
If you want to save the data, select OK button. If not, select Cancel button.
· 3-45701 Relay contact check failed. description: Testcase measured: Data1, offset: Offset, Rmeas: Data1, Rlimit: Limit
Failed in the contact check of the HF Matrix Relay Test. Check the connection of the short adapter. Or do troubleshooting and replace defective part.
· 3-45702 Relay stuck check failed. description: Testcase measured: Data1, offset: Offset, Rmeas: Data1, Rlimit: Limit
Failed in the open check of the HF Matrix Relay Test. Do troubleshooting and replace defective part.
· 3-45801 Pulse switch test failed. description: Testcase measured: Data
Failed in the pulse switch test (on/off test). Check the test lead connections and connect properly. Or do troubleshooting and replace defective part.
· 3-45901 Pulse level test failed. description: Testcase measured: Data
Failed in the pulse level test. Check the connection from PGU and HF port to the signal input port of the oscilloscope. And connect properly. Or do troubleshooting and replace defective part.
· 3-45921 Pulse parameter test failed. description: Testcase measured: Data
Failed in the pulse parameter test (except for overshooting). Check the connection from PGU and HF port to the signal input port of the oscilloscope. And connect properly. Or do troubleshooting and replace defective part.
298
Appendix D
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Error Messages 3-xxxxx
· 3-45922 Pulse parameter test failed due to overshoot. description: Testcase measured: Data Failed in the pulse parameter test due to overshoot. Check the connection from PGU, HF port to 54751A. And connect properly. Or do troubleshooting and replace defective part.
Appendix D
299
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Error Messages 4-xxxxxx
4-xxxxxx
· 4-110001 Cannot make connection because no session is logged in now.
Before starting up the IDP, you need to log in to the 4070 operating environment. Execute hp4070 -login command before executing idp4070 command.
· 4-110004 Break connection because TIS Daemon process was down.
TIS daemon was down during IDP operation. Log in to the 4070 again, and execute idp4070 command.
· 4-110005 Cannot send event data to idp4070.
IDP was down abnormally. Exit IDP by choosing File: Exit menu on the IDP window.
· 4-120001 Cannot allocate memory for reading last measurement data.
The measurement data could not be loaded when choosing File: Open Last Test menu on the Graph window of IDP because of small free memory space. Stop unnecessary applications and close windows to increase free memory size.
· 4-202004 Allocation size is too large. Ignored.
Tried to load data file that was edited or broken. Internal error. Number of vector data is larger than the allocated size. Excess data is not set.
· 4-202005 Data size is larger than allocated size. The data is ignored.
Tried to load data file that was edited or broken. Internal error. Tried to set number of vector data that was negative number. No action.
· 4-202006 Invalid block number is selected. Ignored.
Internal error. Block number of the data block to be cleared is a negative number or over the maximum number. No action.
· 4-202007 Selected block size is too large. Last selected block is ignored.
Tried to load data file that was edited or broken. Internal error. Too large block size was specified for block selection. The block is not selected.
· 4-202009 Measurement vector number is invalid. The vector is ignored.
Tried to load data file that was edited or broken. Internal error. Tried to set number of the vector data that is negative number, zero, or over the number of registered data. The vector data is not set.
· 4-205011 Warning: Illegal data format in data file. Ignored. Too long line. Line = Line_No..
Data file to be loaded was edited or broken. Number of characters in line Line_No. of data file to be loaded was over 128 characters. The line is ignored. Delete the line or edit the line so that it is 128 or less characters.
· 4-205012 Warning: Too many data in one data block: <= 2002 data per data block. Used only the first 2002 data.
Data file to be loaded was edited or broken. Number of data in a vector data is over 2002. Only the first 2002 data are loaded. Delete the excess data so that number of data is 2002 or less.
· 4-205013 Warning: Bad data Tag found in data file. Ignored. Line = Line_No..
Data file to be loaded was edited or broken. Invalid specifier was used in line Line_No. of the data file. The line is ignored. Delete the line. Or edit the data file. Use ": (colon)", for example, "BX:", "BY:" and so on, to indicate the specifiers.
300
Appendix D
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Error Messages 4-xxxxxx
· 4-205014 Warning: Cannot use Attributes Tag in data block portion. Ignored. Use this Tag in header portion of data file. Line = Line_No.. Data file to be loaded was edited or broken. Attribute tag is inserted in line Line_No. of the data file to be loaded. The line is ignored. Delete the line.
· 4-205015 Warning: Illegal data format in data file. Ignored. Line = Line_No.. Data file to be loaded was edited or broken. Non-numeric data is included in line Line_No.. The line is ignored. Delete the non-numeric data, or exchange it with the numeric data.
· 4-205016 Warning: Illegal range format in data file for Data. Ignored. Line = Line_No.. Data file to be loaded was edited or broken. Could not get the data from the lines #XI, #X and #Y for graph in the data file. The line Line_No. is ignored. Delete the line. Or edit the file and insert the proper value.
· 4-205018 Warning: Illegal Character in data file for Data. Used NULL String. Line = Line_No.. Data file to be loaded was edited or broken. Invalid character was used in line Line_No.. The line is ignored. Edit the file. Numeric characters, and '-' (minus), '+' (plus), '_' (underscore), ' ' (space), '.' (period) and ',' (comma) are allowed for the data.
· 4-205019 Warning: Illegal string description in data file. Ignored. Line = Line_No.. Data file to be loaded was edited or broken. Strings are not enclosed by double quotations ('). The line Line_No. is ignored. Edit the file and properly enclose the strings by double quotations.
· 4-205101 Warning: Bad data range for Log scale;Axis. Turned off log scale mode. Tried to set minimum value or maximum value of X axis or Y axis in log scale to 0 or negative value. Graph scale is set to linear scale automatically. The data must be positive value for log scale.
· 4-205102 Warning: Bad data for Log scale. Turned off log scale mode. Tried to set X-axis data or Y-axis data in log scale to negative value. Graph scale is set to linear scale automatically. The data must be positive value for log scale.
· 4-205103 Warning: Bad range for scale. Set previous value. Difference between maximum value and minimum value of the graph is almost 0. Minimum value and maximum value are set to the previous values automatically. Specify a bigger difference.
· 4-205112 Warning: No Y data. Cannot plot any data. Data file to be loaded was edited or broken. Internal error. Y vector data does not exist although X vector data exists. Graph does not plot any data. Create one Y vector data at least.
· 4-211000 Can't open file. Error occurred during loading/saving the IDP data file. The data file is not loaded/saved. Confirm that the directory for the data file exists, and the permission of the directory and the data file.
· 4-211001 Can't write file. Error occurred while saving the IDP data file. The data file is not saved. Confirm that there is sufficient free disk space. Prepare approximately 10 KByte for one IDP data file.
· 4-211002 Can't read file. Size of the data file is less than the size of IDP data file. The data file is not loaded. Specify the IDP data file name properly. If the file was edited, the file cannot be loaded.
Appendix D
301
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Error Messages 4-xxxxxx
· 4-211003 Saving to a file is not allowed when some resource fields are modified.
Tried to save the IDP data file before setup was completed (clicking Set button) on the IDP window. The data file is not saved. Close the Save Dialog and click Set button. Then save the data file.
· 4-211004 File format revision mismatch. Can't read the file.
Tried to load data file, but did not match the IDP data format. The data file is not loaded. Specify the file name of the IDP data. If the IDP data file was edited and changes made, the data file cannot be loaded.
· 4-211005 Can't close the resource display when some resource fields are modified.
Tried to delete a resource from the Resource Selection dialog before setup for the resource was completed (clicking Set button) on the IDP window. The resource is not deleted from the Resource Selection dialog. Close the Resource Selection dialog, click Set button. Then delete the resource from the Resource Selection dialog.
· 4-211006 Can't open last measurement data. Test_name doesn't create array data. 4-211007 Can't open last measurement data. No measurement has been performed. 4-211008 Can't open last measurement data. There is no measurement data. The measurement might have been executed on offline system.
Data on the Graph window does not change. Before choosing File: Open Last Test menu, you must execute measurement that makes array data.
File: Open Last Test menu on the Graph window is used to display array data that was measured in the On-line mode.
· 4-212001 Cannot create measurement blocks.
Number of measurement data exceeds the maximum number. Measurement block is not created. Clear the data loaded on the Graph.
· 4-212002 Cannot create vector data blocks.
Tried to load data file that was edited or broken. Internal error. Number of data for vector data is zero, negative number, or exceeds the maximum number. No action.
· 4-212003 Cannot allocate data.
Tried to load data file that was edited or broken. Internal error. Tried to create data with negative number or over the maximum number.
· 4-215100 Error: Data block index value must be 1 to 7.
Tried to load data file that was edited or broken. Internal error. Data block index value must be 1 to 7.
· 4-215150 Error: Bad file name: May be too long file name or no suffix;File_name.
Name of file to load is too long or no suffix. The file is not loaded. Enter the proper name for the file on the Load dialog, and try to load the file again.
· 4-215151 Error: Bad file suffix.
Suffix of the file name entered is not '.dpg' or '.dps'. The file is not loaded. Enter the proper name for the file in the Load Dialog, and try to load the file again.
· 4-215152 Error: Bad file type; not an ordinary file.
File is not ASCII file. The file is not loaded. Enter the proper name for the file in the Load Dialog, and try to load the file again.
· 4-215155 Error: Too long file path name. Maximum 1018 characters.
File name over 1018 characters was entered. The file is not saved. Use file name with 1018 or less characters and try to save the file again.
302
Appendix D
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Error Messages 4-xxxxxx
· 4-215156 Error: Specified path name is too long. Only the leading 1023 characters are used. Path name over 1023 characters was entered. The file is not saved. Use path name with 1023 or less characters and try to save the file again.
· 4-215301 Error: Syntax error in dump command; Command. Syntax error occurred in dump command. Enter the proper command for dump/print.
· 4-215303 Error: Cannot generate PostScript code. Temporary PostScript file could not be created. Secure enough free disk space for temporary file.
· 4-225001 System Error: Cannot open data file; File_name. Specified data file does not exist, improper directory is specified, or temporary file for dump cannot be created. Check the name of data file, or permission of the file and directory. Or secure enough free disk space for temporary file.
Appendix D
303
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Error Messages 5-xxxxx
5-xxxxx
· 5-10001 Cannot make connection with TIS Daemon. No session or environment variable PCS_SESSION_ID is not properly set. Execute hp4070 -login command. Or confirm the setting of the environmental variable PCS_SESSION_ID.
· 5-10002 Cannot allocate memory. Please quit and try again. To allocate memory, stop the action and try it again.
· 5-10003 Environmental variable: PCS_SESSION_ID is not set. Quit from the 4070 operating environment, set PCS_SESSION_ID, and then log in again.
304
Appendix D
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Error Messages 6-xxxxx
6-xxxxx
· 6-20001 Cannot translate 4062 port address into 4070 port address. Specified port address for the 4062 could not be translated to the 4070 port address. Check the port address, and specify the correct port address.
· 6-20002 Invalid port is assigned. Specified port address is not correct. Confirm the port address.
· 6-20003 Invalid pin is assigned. Specified pin number is not correct. Confirm the pin number.
· 6-20004 [F_ROM] Pin number must be 0 to 48. Pin number must be 0 to 48. Enter a valid value.
· 6-20005 Specified pin board is defective or not installed. Pin board for the specified pin number is not installed or defective. Confirm the pin board configuration. hp4070 -login command displays the 4070 system configuration.
· 6-20006 From_pin is out of range. Pin number assigned for the first pin parameter of the Connect_th command is not correct. Confirm the pin number.
· 6-20007 To_pin is out of range. Pin number assigned for the last pin parameter of the Connect_th command is not correct. Confirm the pin number.
· 6-20008 1st parameter must be 1 (connect) or 0 (disconnect). Wrong value was specified for the first parameter of Tap_port command. The value must be 0 (disconnect) or 1 (connect). Check the value and specify the proper value.
· 6-20009 2nd parameter must be port address of SMU/AUX port 1 or 2. Wrong value was specified for the second parameter of Tap_port command. The value must be the port address of SMU port 1 or 2, or AUX port 1 or 2. Check the value and specify the proper value.
· 6-20010 3nd parameter must be port address of SMU/AUX port 1 or 2. Wrong value was specified for the third parameter of Tap_port command. The value must be the port address of SMU port 1 or 2, or AUX port 1 or 2. Check the value and specify the proper value.
· 6-20011 Improper SMU voltage range specified. Voltage range setting for SMU is not correct. Check the value of the output voltage and the voltage range, and specify the proper value.
· 6-20012 Improper SMU voltage source, voltage output range, or compliance specified. Output voltage value, voltage output range, or current compliance value are not correct. Verify the values of output voltage, voltage output range, and current compliance and then specify the correct value.
· 6-20013 Improper SMU current range specified. Current range setting of SMU is not correct. Check the value of the output current and the current range, and specify the proper value.
Appendix D
305
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Error Messages 6-xxxxx
· 6-20014 Improper SMU current source or compliance specified.
Value of output current or voltage compliance is not correct. Check the value of output current and voltage compliance, and specify the proper value.
· 6-20015 Specified SMU is defective or not installed.
Specified SMU board is not installed or defective. Confirm the SMU configuration. hp4070 -login command displays the 4070 system configuration.
· 6-20016 Source pin must be connected to an SMU.
Specified pin board is not connected to SMU. Check the measurement program. The program must have a program line that connects the SMU to the pin board before the program line that forces the output of the SMU specified by the pin number.
· 6-20017 Source port must be an SMU or a pin connected to an SMU.
Source port address used in the Force_meas command is not correct. Source port address must be SMU port address or the pin number of the pin board connected to the SMU. Check the port address and specify the proper value.
· 6-20018 Measure pin must be connected to an SMU.
Specified pin board is not connected to SMU. Check the measurement program. The program must have a program line that connects the SMU to the pin board before the program line that performs measurement using the SMU specified by the pin number.
· 6-20019 Measure port must be an SMU or a pin connected to an SMU.
Measurement port address is not correct. Measurement port address must be SMU port address or the pin number of the pin board connected to the SMU. Check the port address and specify the proper value.
· 6-20020 3rd parameter must be 1 (voltage source) or 2 (current source).
Wrong value was specified for the third parameter of Force_meas command. The value must be 1 (voltage source) or 2 (current source). Check the value and specify the proper value.
· 6-20021 Wait time must be 0 to 655.35 sec.
Specified value for the wait time is out of range. The value must be 0 to 655.35 seconds. Check the value and specify the proper value.
· 6-20022 Hold time must be 0 to 655.35 sec.
Specified value for the hold time is out of range. Available value for the hold time is 0 to 655.35 sec. Check the value and specify the proper value.
· 6-20023 Port must be CMH when forcing voltage on CMU.
Invalid port was specified for the Force_v command. When setting the dc bias of CMU, the CMH port address must be specified. Check the port address and specify the correct port.
· 6-20024 Wait time must be 0 to 655.35 sec.
Wait time value is not correct. Available value for the wait time is 0 to 655.35 sec. Check the value and specify the proper value.
· 6-20025 Size of port array must be greater than or equal to 1.
No port is defined for the array used to specify the multiple ports. Check the value and size of the array, and define the array properly.
306
Appendix D
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Error Messages 6-xxxxx
· 6-20026 1st parameter must be an SMU port address or a pin connected to an SMU.
Wrong value was specified for the first parameter of the Stand_by_port command. The value must be the SMU port address or the pin number of the pin board connected to the SMU. Check the value and specify the value properly.
· 6-20027 2nd parameter must be an SMU port address or a pin connected to an SMU.
Wrong value was specified for the second parameter of the Stand_by_port command. The value must be the SMU port address or the pin number of the pin board connected to the SMU. Check the value and specify the value properly.
· 6-20028 3rd parameter must be an SMU port address or a pin connected to an SMU.
Wrong value was specified for the third parameter of the Stand_by_port command. The value must be the SMU port address or the pin number of the pin board connected to the SMU. Check the value and specify the value properly.
· 6-20029 Nth parameter must be an SMU port address or a pin connected to an SMU.
Wrong value was specified for the Nth parameter of the Stand_by_port command. The value must be the SMU port address or the pin number of the pin board connected to the SMU. Check the value and specify the value properly.
· 6-20030 Cannot connect Extended I/O port to the Chuck terminal.
Cannot specify Extended Path port for the Connect_chuck command. Specify an SMU, GNDU, or AUX port address for the Connect_chuck command.
· 6-20031 Ports must be SMU or CMU.
Invalid port was specified for the Disable_port command. Must specify an SMU or CMU port address, or the pin number of a pin board connected to the SMU or CMU. Check the port value and specify the port properly.
· 6-20032 Adc must be 0 (ADC_PERCH) or 1 (ADC_REF).
Wrong value was specified for the parameter to select ADC. The value must be 0 (high-speed ADC) or 1 (high-resolution ADC). Check the value and specify the value properly.
· 6-20033 Filter must be 0 (FILTER_OFF) or 1 (FILTER_ON).
Wrong value was specified for the parameter to select SMU filter status. The value must be 0 (filter off) or 1 (filter on). Check the value and specify the value properly.
· 6-20034 Wait time ratio must be 0.0 to 10.0.
Wrong value was defined for the wait time factor. The value must be 0 to 10. Check the value and specify the value properly.
· 6-20035 Integration time mode setting must be 0, 1, 2, or 3.
Wrong value was specified for the mode parameter of the Set_smu or the Set_adc command. The value must be 0 (manual), 1 (short), 2 (medium) or 3 (long). Check the value and specify the proper value.
· 6-20036 Averaging or integration time is out of range.
Wrong value was specified for the integration time or averaging parameter of the Set_adc or the Set_smu command, or the integration time parameter of the Set_adc3458 command. Check the value and specify the proper value.
Appendix D
307
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Error Messages 6-xxxxx
· 6-20037 Autozero must be 0 (AUTOZERO_OFF) or 1 (AUTOZERO_ON). Wrong value was specified for the auto zero parameter of the Set_adc or the Set_adc3458 command. The value must be 0 (auto zero off) or 1 (auto zero on). Check the value and specify the proper value.
· 6-20038 Port must be an SMU or a pin connected to an SMU. Port address setting is not correct. The port address must be the SMU port address or the pin number of the pin board connected to the SMU. Check the value and specify the proper value.
· 6-20039 Port must be an SMU or a pin connected to an SMU. Port address setting is not correct. The port address must be the SMU port address or the pin number of the pin board connected to the SMU. Check the value and specify the proper value.
· 6-20040 Search mode must be 0 to 15 for Set_bsearch, 0 to 11 for Set_lsearch. Wrong value was specified for the search mode parameter of the Set_lsearch or the Set_bsearch command. The search mode value for the Set_lsearch must be 0 to 11, and the value for the Set_bsearch must be 0 to 15.
· 6-20041 Upper search boundary is equal to lower search boundary. Same value was set for the start/stop parameters of the Set_lsearch command or the min/max parameters of the Set_bsearch command. Start (or min) value must be different from the stop (or max) value.
· 6-20042 Step value must be greater than 0 for Set_lsearch or Set_bdv_search. Wrong value was specified for the step parameter for the Set_lsearch or the Set_bdv_search command. The value must be greater than 0.
· 6-20043 Target value must be less than measurement compliance. Too large value was specified for the target parameter of the Set_lsearch or the Set_bsearch command. The value must be less than the value of the compliance parameter.
· 6-20044 Convergence condition in Accuracy mode must be 0 to 100. Value of the convergence condition parameter of the Set_bsearch command in the Accuracy mode is out of range. The value must be 0 to 100.
· 6-20045 Convergence condition in Times mode must be 0 to 16. Value of the convergence condition parameter of the Set_bsearch command in the Times mode is out of range. The value must be 1 to 16.
· 6-20046 Delay time must be 0 to 65.535 sec. Setting value of the delay time is out of range. The value must be 0 to 65.535 sec. Check the value and specify the proper value.
· 6-20047 Skip_back value must be 0 to 100. Wrong value was specified for the skip back parameter of the Set_lsearch command. The value must be 0 to 100.
· 6-20048 Set_skip may not be used with Set_bsearch or Set_bdv_search. Cannot use the set_skip command with the set_bsearch or the Set_bdv_search function in C language programming environment. Use the set_skip command with the set_lsearch.
308
Appendix D
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Error Messages 6-xxxxx
· 6-20049 Set_bsearch or Set_lsearch is not called before Search is called. Before executing Search command, the Set_lsearch or the Set_bsearch command must be executed to define the search measurement setup. The setup defined by the Set_lsearch or the Set_bsearch command is canceled by the Init_system command.
· 6-20050 Compliance mode is not available for voltage measurement of Set_lsearch. For the search mode 8 to 11 (compliance mode) of the Set_lsearch command, the output mode of sense port SMU must be set to VF (voltage force) mode. Before executing the Set_lsearch command, enter statement (for example, Force_v) to set the SMU output mode to VF mode.
· 6-20051 Sweep mode setting must be -4 to 4 (integer). Improper sweep mode was specified for the Set_iv or the Set_piv command. The value must be -4 (Current, log, double), -3 (Voltage, log, double), -2 (Current, log, single), -1 (Voltage, log, single), 1 (Voltage, linear, single), 2 (Current, linear, single), 3 (Voltage, linear, double), or 4 (Current, linear, double). Check the sweep mode setting and set the proper mode.
· 6-20052 Number of steps must be 2 to 1001. Improper number of steps was specified for the Set_iv or the Set_piv command. Value must be 2 to 1001. Check the value and set the proper value.
· 6-20053 Improper power compliance is specified. Setting of the power compliance is out of range. Check the value and set the proper value.
· 6-20054 Sweep stop mode must be 1 (continue on error) or 2 (stop on error). Improper stop mode was specified for the sweep measurement command. The value must be 1 (continue on error) or 2 (stop on error). Check the setting and set the proper value.
· 6-20056 Measurement mode must be 1 (voltage) or 2 (current). Improper measurement mode was specified for the Sweep_iv or the Rsweep_iv command. The value must be 1 (voltage measurement mode) or 2 (current measurement mode).
· 6-20057 Start and stop values have different polarity. In the logarithmic sweep measurement mode, polarity of the start and stop value must be the same.
· 6-20058 Hold time must be 0 to 655.35 sec. Setting of hold time is wrong. The value must be 0 to 655.35.
· 6-20059 Difference of start and stop must be greater than Voltage For the Set_bdv command, the difference between the start value and the stop value must be 10 V or more. For the Set_ileak command, the difference between the output voltage value and the start value must 10 V or more.
· 6-20060 Detection interval mode must be 0 (short) or 1 (long). Improper detection interval was specified for the Measure_bdv or the Measure_ileak command. The value must be 0 (short mode) or 1 (long mode).
· 6-20061 Skip value must be 1 to 20000. Improper skip value was specified for the Set_lsearch command. The value must be 1 to 20000.
Appendix D
309
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Error Messages 6-xxxxx
· 6-20062 Target value must be less than the sense port compliance.
Improper target value was specified for the Set_lsearch command. The value must be less than compliance of sense port.
· 6-20063 Sync port must have the same V/I output mode as the control variable.
SMU output mode of the sync SMU defined for the Set_sync command must be the same output mode of the search SMU defined for the Set_bsearch or the Set_lsearch command. Set the SMU output mode of the sync SMU by entering the Force_v or the Force_i command before entering the Set_sync command.
The Force_v command is used to set the voltage output mode, and the Force_i command is used to set the current output mode.
· 6-20064 Improper synchronous search offset value is specified.
Offset value of the Set_sync command is out of range. Or the offset value is not correct for the settings of the start/stop values of the Set_lsearch command or the min/max values of the Set_bsearch command. Set the proper value.
· 6-20066 Offset value of synchronous search port or compliance is improper.
Sync port SMU output did not match to the compliance value. Check the offset and compliance values of the Set_sync command, and the start/stop values of the Set_lsearch command or the min/max values of the Set_bsearch command, and set the proper value.
· 6-20067 Synchronization polarity mode must be 0 (positive) or 1 (negative).
Improper synchronization polarity mode was specified for the Set_sync command. The value must be 0 (positive sync) or 1 (negative sync).
· 6-20068 Synchronous sweep ratio must be 0.01 to 10.0.
Improper synchronous sweep ratio value was specified for the Set_sync command. The value must be 0.01 to 10.0.
· 6-20069 Improper synchronous sweep offset value specified.
Improper synchronous sweep offset value was specified for the Set_sync command. Check the value and set the proper value.
· 6-20070 Calculated start, stop or compliance of synchronous sweep is improper.
Sync port SMU output is out of range, or does not match to the compliance value. Check the offset, ratio and compliance values of the Set_sync command, or the start/stop values of the command for sweep measurement.
· 6-20071 Measurement mode must be 0 (linear) or 1 (saturation).
Invalid mode was specified for the Measure_vth command. The mode must be 0 (linear region) or 1 (saturation region).
· 6-20072 Number of points must be 2 to 20.
Invalid number of points was specified for the Measure_vth command. The number of points must be 2 to 20.
· 6-20073 Compliance must be specified when SMU V/I output mode is changed.
In the optimization level is 2 or 3, compliance value cannot be omitted for a command (Force_v, Force_i, etc.) that changes the SMU output mode. Confirm the optimization level and set the compliance value properly.
310
Appendix D
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Error Messages 6-xxxxx
· 6-20074 Invalid pin number specified for Hpin. Invalid pin number was specified for the CMU high port of the Corr_cmu command. Check the pin number and set the correct number.
· 6-20075 Invalid pin number specified for Lpin. Invalid pin number was specified for the CMU low port of Corr_cmu command. Check the pin number and set the correct number.
· 6-20076 C Compensation file is not loaded. TIS command requires that capacitance compensation was executed before loading the capacitance compensation data file. Check /etc/opt/hp4070/ccdata file and /etc/opt/hp4070/ccdata0 file, and the permission of the files.
· 6-20077 Cp should not be 0. Cp value of the Conv_mode command was set to zero. Cp value must not be zero.
· 6-20078 Proper sweep measurement is not done. Status_miv command could not read the measurement status of the last sweep measurement. Sweep measurement was not done properly. Check the measurement program. Or sweep measurement may be now in progress.
· 6-20079 Current is too large. Too large current value was set for the Set_bdv command. Set the proper value.
· 6-20080 Vg_start and Vg_stop should not be same. Same value was set for gate start and stop voltages of the Set_vth command. The same value cannot be set for these parameters. Set the values properly.
· 6-20081 Gate step voltage value must be greater than 0 V. Gate step voltage must be greater than 0 V for the Set_vth command. Set the value correctly.
· 6-20082 Id_start must be less than measurement port compliance. Drain search start current of the Set_vth command must be less than the compliance value of the measurement port. Set the value properly.
· 6-20083 Delay time must be 0 to 65.535 sec. Delay time value of the Set_vth command is out of range. Value must be 0 to 65.535 seconds. Set the value properly.
· 6-20084 Vg Skip_back value must be 0 to 100. Vg Skip_back value of the Set_vth command is out of range. Value must be 0 to 100. Set the value properly.
· 6-20085 Vg Skip value must be 1 to 20000. Vg Skip value of the Set_vth command is out of range. Value must be 1 to 20000. Set the value properly.
· 6-20086 Id_start value must be -0.1 to 0.1 A. Drain start current value of the Set_vth command is out of range. Value must be -0.1 to 0.1 A. Set the value properly.
Appendix D
311
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Error Messages 6-xxxxx
· 6-20090 Sweep_miv or Rsweep_miv can be used with Set_iv, not Set_piv. Sweep_miv and Rsweep_miv commands for the multi-channel sweep measurement can only be used for sweep that was set up by the Set_iv command. The commands cannot be used with pulsed sweep, which is set up by the Set_piv command. Check and change the program.
· 6-20100 Measurement port is not connected to any pins. Measurement SMU port is not connected to any pin board. Connect the SMU to the measurement pin.
· 6-20101 Sweep port is not connected to any pins. Sweep measurement SMU port is not connected to any pin board. Connect the SMU to the measurement pin.
· 6-20102 The synchronous sweep port is not set up. An array was specified in the Sweep_miv command for returning source values of synchronous sweep port, but synchronous port was not set up. Either delete the array name from the Sweep_miv or set up synchronous sweep port by using the Set_sync.
· 6-20103 The synchronous sweep port is not connected to any pins. Synchronous sweep port is not connected to any pin board. Connect the SMU to the measurement pin.
· 6-20120 Force mode must be 1 (voltage force) or 2 (current force). Improper mode was specified for the force mode of the Set_pbias command. The value must be 1 (voltage force) or 2 (current force).
· 6-20121 Pulse sweep mode setting must be -4 to 4 (integer). Improper pulse sweep mode was specified for the Set_piv command. The value must be 1 (linear voltage), 2 (linear current), 3 (linear voltage double), 4 (linear current double), -1 (logarithmic voltage), -2 (logarithmic current), -3 (logarithmic voltage double), or -4 (logarithmic current double).
· 6-20122 Measurement mode must be 1 (voltage) or 2 (current). Improper measurement mode was specified for the Measure_p command. The value must be 1 (voltage measurement) or 2 (current measurement).
· 6-20123 Peak and base current must have the same polarity. For current, the pulse base and pulse peak values must be the same polarity for the Set_pbias command. Check the values and set the proper values.
· 6-20124 Peak, start and stop current must have the same polarity. For current, pulse base, start value, and stop value must be the same polarity for the Set_piv command. Check the values and set the proper values.
· 6-20125 Width value must be 0.0005 to 2 sec. Pulse width value is out of range. Value must be 0.0005 to 2 sec with 0.0001 sec resolution. Set the correct value.
· 6-20126 Period value must be 0.005 to 5 sec. Pulse period value is out of range. Value must be 0.005 to 5 sec with 0.0001 sec resolution. Set the correct value.
· 6-20128 Period value must be greater than width + 2ms. Pulse period value must be greater than pulse width + 2 ms. Set the pulse period or pulse width value correctly.
312
Appendix D
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Error Messages 6-xxxxx
· 6-20200 Set_pbias must be executed before Measure_p. No setup for the Measure_p command. Execute the Set_pbias command before executing the Measure_P command.
· 6-20201 Set_iv or Set_piv must be executed before Sweep_iv. No setup for the Sweep_iv command. Execute the Set_iv or the Set_piv command before executing the Sweep_iv command.
· 6-20202 No measurement to stop by Rsweep_stop. No real time sweep measurement to stop. Rsweep_stop is used for stopping real-time sweep measurements only.
· 6-20203 Set_iv or Set_piv must be executed before Rsweep_iv. No setup for the Rsweep_iv command. Execute the Set_iv or the Set_piv command before executing the Rsweep_iv command.
· 6-20204 Set_iv must be executed before Rsweep_miv. No setup for the Rsweep_miv command. Execute the Set_iv command before executing the Rsweep_miv command.
· 6-20205 Set_iv must be executed before Sweep_miv. No setup for the Sweep_miv command. Execute the Set_iv command before executing the Sweep_miv command.
· 6-20206 Set_lsearch, Set_bsearch, or Set_bdv_search must be executed before Search or Search_iv. No setup for the Search or the Search_iv command. Execute the Set_lsearch, Set_bsearch, or Set_bdv_search command before executing the Search or the Search_iv.
· 6-20207 Synchronous port must be different from the primary sweep port. Must use different SMU ports for the primary sweep port and synchronous port.
· 6-20208 Synchronous port must be different from the primary search port. Must use different SMU ports for the primary search port and synchronous port.
· 6-20209 No sweep or search setup was set before Set_sync. No setup for the Set_sync command. Execute the Set_iv, the Set_piv, the Set_bsearch, or the Set_lsearch command before executing the Set_sync command.
· 6-20210 Set_bdv must be executed before Measure_bdv. No setup for the Measure_bdv command. Execute the Set_bdv command before executing the Measure_bdv command.
· 6-20211 Set_ileak must be executed before Measure_ileak. No setup for the Measure_ileak command. Execute the Set_ileak command before executing the Measure_ileak command.
· 6-20212 Set_lsearch, Set_bsearch, or Set_bdv_search must be executed before Rsearch or Rsearch_iv. No setup for the Rsearch or the Rsearch_iv command. Execute the Set_lsearch , the Set_bsearch, or the Set_bdv_search command before executing the Rsearch or the Rsearch_iv.
Appendix D
313
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Error Messages 6-xxxxx
· 6-20213 No measurement to stop by Rsearch_stop. No real time search measurement to stop. Rsearch_stop is used for stopping real-time search measurements only.
· 6-20214 Set_vth must be executed before Measure_vth. No setup for the Measure_vth command. Execute the Set_vth command before executing the Measure_vth command.
· 6-20215 Synchronous port must be different from the pulse bias port. Must use different SMU ports for the pulse bias port and synchronous port.
· 6-20216 Pulse bias port must be different from the Synchronous port. Must use different SMU ports for the synchronous port and the pulse bias port.
· 6-20220 Cannot call Status_miv during a sweep measurement. Cannot execute the Status_miv command while real-time sweep measurement is executing.
· 6-20221 Fine search start current value must be smaller than breakdown current value. The current value for fine search start must be smaller than the breakdown current value which sets compliance of an SMU in the Set_bdv_search command.
· 6-20222 Fine search start current and breakdown current must have the same polarity. The setup current values for fine search start and breakdown current must be the same polarity for the Set_bdv_search command. Check the polarity and set the correct values.
· 6-20223 Cannot omit fine search start parameter. Fine search start value must be specified when the skip parameter value is greater than 1 for the Set_bdv_search command.
· 6-20224 Compliance check delay time must be 0 to 65.535 sec. Setting value for compliance check delay is out of range. The value must be 0 to 65.535 sec. Check the value and specify it correctly.
· 6-20301 Invalid mode number specified. Mode number specified in the Set_rangemode is incorrect. The mode number must be 0 or 1.
· 6-20402 Integration time mode setting must be 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4. Integration time mode setting must be 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4. Enter a valid value.
· 6-20403 Must specify integration time mode setting for higher current range (0, 1, 2, 3, or 4). The integration time mode is not set for the higher current range. You must specify the integration time.
· 6-21001 Specified pin is not connected to any ports. Pins specified by the Disable_port command are not connected to any port. Specify the pin number of a pin board that is connected to a port.
· 6-21002 SMU output voltage incompatible with set voltage range. Wrong value was set for the SMU output voltage and voltage range. Set the values properly.
· 6-21003 SMU output current incompatible with set current range. Wrong value was set for the SMU output current and current range. Set the values properly.
314
Appendix D
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Error Messages 6-xxxxx
· 6-22001 CMU bias voltage must be -40 to 40 Vdc. Wrong value was specified for the bias voltage of CMU. The value must be 0 to ±40 Vdc for 4284A equipped with option 001.
· 6-22002 CMU bias voltage must be -2, -1.5, 0, 1.5, or 2 Vdc. Wrong value was specified for the bias voltage of CMU. The value must be 0, ±1.5, or ±2 Vdc for 4284A without option 001.
· 6-22003 CMU integration time mode setting must be 1, 2, or 3. Invalid parameter was set for the integration time of the Set_cmu84 command. The value must be 1 (short), 2 (medium) or 3 (long).
· 6-22004 CMU signal level must be 0.005 V or more. Too small value was set for the signal level by the Set_cmu84 command. The value must be greater than 0.005 V.
· 6-22005 CMU signal level must be 20.0 V or less. Too large value was set for the signal level by the Set_cmu84 command. The value must be 20 V or less for 4284A equipped with option 001.
· 6-22006 CMU signal level must be 2.0 V or less. Too large value was set for the signal level by the Set_cmu84 command. The value must be 2 V or less for 4284A without option 001.
· 6-22007 CMU frequency must be 19.8 Hz or more. Too small value was set for the measurement frequency of CMU. The value must be 19.8 Hz or more.
· 6-22008 CMU frequency must be 1 MHz or less. Too large value was set for the measurement frequency of CMU. The value must be 1 MHz or less.
· 6-22009 CMU is defective or not installed. CMU (4284A) is not installed in the 4070, or may be defective. Execute hp4070 -login command and check the configuration of the 4070. If necessary, do the diagnostics.
· 6-22010 There is no capacitance and conductance data in buffer. Capacitance/conductance measurement was not executed properly. CMU (4284A) may be defective. Do the diagnostics.
· 6-22011 Set_cv84 must be executed before Sweep_cv84. No setup for the Sweep_cv84 command. Execute the Set_cv84 command before executing the Sweep_cv84 command.
· 6-22012 Number of C-V sweep steps must be 2 to 1001. Number of steps for the Set_cv84 command is out of range. The value must be 2 to 1001.
· 6-22013 Hold time and delay time must be 0.0 to 650.0 sec. Hold time or delay time value of the Set_cv84 command is out of range. The value must be 0.0 to 650.0.
· 6-22014 4284A option 001 is not present. C-V sweep measurement needs 4284A equipped with the option 001. Execute hp4070 -login command and check the configuration of the 4070.
Appendix D
315
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Error Messages 6-xxxxx
· 6-23001 DVM is defective or not installed. DVM (3458A) is not installed in the 4070, or may be defective. Execute hp4070 -login command and check the configuration of the 4070. If necessary, do the diagnostics.
· 6-23002 DVM is not set to DC voltage measurement mode. DVM (3458A) is not in the dc voltage measurement mode. Set the mode correctly using front panel or GPIB command. Or DVM may be defective. If necessary, do the diagnostics.
· 6-23003 DVM GPIB address is not set or invalid. Address3458 command was executed even though the DVM (3458A) is not installed in the 4070. Confirm the measurement program.
· 6-23100 Failed to call igpibbusstatus(). GPIB interface card may be defective.
· 6-24001 Testhead Power Fail state. Testhead is turned off. Turn on the testhead. If testhead cannot turn on, check the testhead power supply.
· 6-24002 Testhead Emergency state. Testhead is in the emergency status. Do the diagnostics.
· 6-25000 Command is UNSUPPORTED. The 4070 system software does not support the command specified by Command. Do not use Command.
· 6-25001 Improper PGU unit address Address. Enter correct value. The available value depends on the configuration of the PGUs. To get the unit address from the port number, use FNPort or PORT.
· 6-25002 No PGU on the unit address. Enter correct value or check PGU. There is no PGU on the unit address you specified, or the PGU is defective. Confirm the unit address and enter a valid value. Verify the PGU is operating correctly.
· 6-25003 Must specify unit address of PGU disconnected from testhead. You must specify the unit address of the PGU disconnected from the testhead. Execute pgconn4070 and verify that the value in the PG connection file matches the actual PGU connection, then specify the unit address of the PGU disconnected from the testhead.
· 6-25004 Pin number must be 1 to 24 for the HF port. Enter correct value. An invalid pin number was entered. Pin numbers 1 to 24 are available for the HF port you specified.
· 6-25005 Pin number must be 25 to 48 for the HF port. Enter correct value. An invalid pin number was entered. Pin numbers 25 to 48 are available for the HF port you specified.
· 6-25006 Pin number must be 1 to 48 for the THF port. Enter correct value. An invalid pin number was entered. Pin numbers 1 to 48 are available for the THF port you specified.
· 6-25007 Port address must be 20201 to 20206, or 20211 to 20213. An invalid port address was entered. Addresses 20201 to 20206 are available for the HF port, and addresses 20211 to 20213 are available for the THF port. Enter a valid port address.
316
Appendix D
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Error Messages 6-xxxxx
· 6-25008 Must specify the port connected to the PGU. You must specify the port connected to the PGU. Execute pgconn4070 and verify that the value in the PG connection file matches the actual PGU connection, then specify the port connected to the PGU.
· 6-25009 Only CH1 is available for the PGU in 3-level pulse output mode. The PGU specified is in the 3-level pulse output mode. Only CH1 is available for the PGU. Use CH1.
· 6-25010 Only CH1 is available for the PGU in 3-level pulse output mode. The PGU specified is in the 3-level pulse output mode. Only CH1 is available for the PGU. Use CH1.
· 6-25011 Improper port address. Enter correct value. Improper port address value is specified. You must specify the correct value for port connected to the PGU.
· 6-25012 Mode value must be 0 or 1. Enter correct value. Set_sr_control TIS error. The mode parameter value must be 0 (independent) or 1 (synchronous).
· 6-25013 Port number must be PSC1, 2, or PSO1 to 5. Set_sr_mode TIS error. The port address parameter must be PSC1, 2, or PSO2 to 5.
· 6-25014 Mode value must be 0 or 1. Enter correct value. Set_sr_mode TIS error. The mode parameter value must be 0 (Normally Closed) or 1 (Normally Open).
· 6-25015 Port number must be PGU address, PSC1, 2, or PSO1 to 7. Connect_sr TIS error. The port address parameter must be PGU address, PSC1, 2, or PSO1 to 7.
· 6-25016 PGU must be connected to the pulse switch control port 1 or 2. Connect_sr TIS error. When a PGU unit address is specified for the port parameter the PGU must be connected to pulse switch control port 1 or 2. Specify a valid unit address and verify the PGU is connected correctly.
· 6-25017 To use Connect_sr/Switch_sr, independent mode must be set by Set_type_pg. Set_sr_pg TIS error. To control switching by using the Connect_sr or the Switch_sr the mode parameter value must be 1 (independent mode).
· 6-25018 Port address must be HF, THF, AUX, PSI, or PGU address. An illegal port address was specified. Port address must be HF, THF, AUX, PSI, or PGU address.
· 6-25019 Must specify the port connected to the PGU. You must specify the port connected to the PGU. Execute pgconn4070 and verify that the value in the PG connection file matches the actual PGU connection, then specify the port connected to the PGU.
· 6-25020 Only CH1 is available for the PGU in 3-level pulse output mode. Set_type_pg TIS error. The PGU you specified is in the 3-level pulse output mode. Only CH1 is available for the PGU. Use CH1.
· 6-25021 Mode value must be 1 to 3. Enter correct value. Set_type_pg TIS error. The mode parameter value must be 1 (2-level pulse), 2 (3-level pulse by one PGU), or 3 (3-level pulse by multiplexer). Enter a a valid mode value.
· 6-25022 Only CH1 is available for the PGU in 3-level pulse output mode. Set_type_pg TIS error. Mode=2 is available only for CH1 of the PGU. Use CH1.
Appendix D
317
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Error Messages 6-xxxxx
· 6-25023 Mode value must be 1 or 3 for this port. Set_type_pg TIS error. For the 8114A pulse generator. Mode 1 (2-level pulse) and 3 (3-level pulse by multiplexer) are available for this port. Enter a valid mode value.
· 6-25024 PGU must have two channels for 3-level pulse output. The PGU you specified has only one channel. For 3-level pulse output use a PGU with two output channels.
· 6-25025 Must specify the port connected to the PGU. You must specify the port connected to the PGU. Execute pgconn4070 and verify the value in the PG connection file matches the actual PGU connection, then specify the port connected to the PGU.
· 6-25026 Only CH1 is available for the PGU in 3-level pulse output mode. Set_level_pg TIS error. The PGU specified is in the 3-level pulse output mode. Only CH1 is available for the PGU. Use CH1.
· 6-25027 Invalid port for using pulse switch. Set_level_pg TIS error. The PGU specified is in the 3-level pulse output mode. Pulse switch is available for the port set to the 2-level pulse or 3-level pulse by the multiplexer. Enter a valid port value.
· 6-25028 Port address must be HF, THF, AUX, PSI, or PGU address. An improper port address was specified. Port address must be HF, THF, AUX, PSI, or PGU address.
· 6-25029 Must specify the port connected to the PGU. You must specify the port connected to the PGU. Execute pgconn4070, and verify the value in the PG connection file matches the actual PGU connection, then specify the port connected to the PGU.
· 6-25030 Only CH1 is available for the PGU in 3-level pulse output mode. The PGU specified is in the 3-level pulse output mode. Only CH1 is available for the PGU. Use CH1.
· 6-25031 PGU must have two channels for 3-level pulse output. The PGU specified has only one channel. Use a PGU with two output channels for 3-level pulse output.
· 6-25032 Invalid port for using pulse switch. Set_time_pg TIS error. The PGU specified is in the 3-level pulse output mode. Pulse switch is available for the port which is set to the 2-level pulse or 3-level pulse by the multiplexer. Enter a a valid port value.
· 6-25033 Specify width2 parameter value. Set_time_pg TIS error. A Width2 parameter must be specified. Values from 3.3 nsec to 999 msec, or 10.0 nsec to 900 msec (for the 8114A) are available. See the Set_time_pg command reference for the required parameters.
· 6-25034 Delay2 parameter value must equal width1 plus delay1 or more. Set_time_pg TIS error. A Delay2 parameter value must equal width1 plus delay1 or more. Values from 0 to 999 msec, or 0 to 900 msec (for the 8114A) are available.
· 6-25035 Mode value must be 0, 1, or 2. Enter correct value. Set_sr_pg TIS error. The mode parameter value must be 0 (reset), 1 (independent), or 2 (synchronous with pulse). Enter a a valid mode value.
· 6-25036 Specify width parameter value, if mode is set to 2. Set_sr_pg TIS error. A width parameter must be specified. Values from 2 msec to 999 msec, or 2 msec to 900 msec (for the 8114A) are available. The width parameter is optional if the Set_sr_pg mode parameter is not 2.
318
Appendix D
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Error Messages 6-xxxxx
· 6-25037 Must specify the PGU connected to the pulse switch control port.
Set_sr_pg TIS error. Connect the PGU to the pulse switch control port correctly and execute pgconn4070. Verify the value in the PG connection file matches the actual PGU connection, then specify the PGU connected to the pulse switch control port. See the Set_sr_pg command reference for restrictions on the PGU.
· 6-25038 period value too short.
Force_pg and Prep_pg TIS error. The period parameter must be more than or equal to the sum of the timing parameters defined by the Set_time_pg command. Enter a valid value.
· 6-25039 Cannot execute the TIS during pulse output.
During pulse output the 4072A reports this error by the TIS which controls the PGU setup or the switching matrix PGU path. The TIS stops the program with this error, and also stops pulse output.
· 6-25040 Count value must be 0 to 10000000.
Force_pg or Start_pg TIS error. The count parameter value must be from 0 to 10000000. If the count value is 1 to 10000000, Force_pg or Start_pg starts the pulse output, and waits for the last count of the pulse. For a count value of 0, the Force_pg or Start_pg triggers a continuous pulse output and finishes immediately. The pulse output continues until a Stop_pg TIS is received. During continuous pulse output the 4072A can receive TIS, but causes error 6-25039. See 6-25039.
· 6-25041 Install or turn on master PG.
Cannot detect the master PG. Install or turn on the master PG. The master PG is the pulse generator unit which has the PG logical number 1. See the configuration file (/etc/opt/hp4070/config/1) to specify the master PG. This file contains the PG name, PG logical number, bus address, and GPIB address.
· 6-25042 Time accuracy mode must be 0 or 1.
Set_mode_pg TIS error. The mode parameter value must be 0 (normal) or 1 (pattern). Mode=1 is not available for the 8114A.
· 6-25043 Define slave #1 PG.
Pattern mode (Set_mode_pg, mode=1) needs slave #1 PG. The slave #1 PG is the pulse generator unit which has the PG logical number 2. Edit the configuration file (/etc/opt/hp4070/config/1) and define the slave #1 PG. See 6-25044.
· 6-25044 Install or turn on slave #1 PG.
Pattern mode (Set_mode_pg, mode=1) needs slave #1 PG. Install and turn on the slave #1 PG. See 6-25043. · 6-25045 For pattern mode, period value must be 120 µsec or more.
In the pattern mode (Set_mode_pg, mode=1), the period parameter value must be 120 µsec or more. Enter a a valid period value.
· 6-25046 Do not enter Set_level_pg for the pulse switch control port.
You cannot set the pulse output level of the PGU connected to the pulse switch control port. Do not enter Set_level_pg.
· 6-25047 Do not enter Set_type_pg for the pulse switch control port.
You cannot set the pulse mode of the PGU connected to the pulse switch control port. Do not enter Set_type_pg.
· 6-25048 Must specify the pulse switch control port connected to the PGU.
You must specify the pulse switch control port connected to the PGU. Execute pgconn4070 and verify the value in the PG connection file matches the actual PGU connection, then specify the pulse switch control port connected to the PGU.
Appendix D
319
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Error Messages 6-xxxxx
· 6-25049 Do not use 8114A as the slave #1 PG. When the time accuracy is set to pattern mode (Set_mode_pg, mode=1) the 8114A pulse generator cannot be used as slave #1. Use normal mode (Set_mode_pg, mode=0), or change the configuration by editing the configuration file /etc/opt/hp4070/config/1. See 6-25042 and 6-25043.
· 6-25050 Period value for 8114A must be Max msec or less. The period value of the 8114A pulse generator must be Max msec or less. Enter a valid period value.
· 6-25051 Specify period value. The value for 8114A must be Max msec or less. The 4072A automatically calculates the period parameter setting for the 8114A pulse generator in the Force_pg or the Prep_pg command. If this automatically calculated value exceeds Max msec, then you must manually or explicitly specify the period value.
· 6-25052 PGU (N) is defective or not connected. Check PGU and enter correct port. You must specify the port connected to the PGU. Specify the correct port, and verify the PGU is installed and working correctly.
· 6-25053 Cannot execute Command Name during pulse output. During pulse output, the 4072A causes this error by the TIS which controls the PGU setup or the switching matrix PGU path. The TIS stops the program with this error, and also stops pulse output.
· 6-25054 Output voltage of PGUs connected to PSO N must be same polarity or the difference must be 45 V or less. When an 8110A and an 8114A are connected to PSO1, 6, or 7 using a multiplexer switch, the absolute value of the amplitude of the pulses must be 45 V or less. If the amplitude of the pulses must be 45 V the polarity of the pulses must be the same.
· 6-25055 PG Voltage exceeds the limit. Check the PG voltage connected to PSO N. When using the 8110A and 8114A with a multiplexer, the signal was not output correctly. Verify that the 8110A and the 8114A are connected to PSON and that amplitude of the pulse is set correctly. If this does not correct the error, reduce the amplitude of each pulse.
· 6-25056 PGU output voltage exceeds the limit. Check PGXX output amplitude. Check the amplitude of the PGXX output. The limit is -19 V. If necessary, reduce the amplitude of the signal. If this does not correct the error, contact the nearest Agilent Technologies Sales and Service office.
· 6-25057 Mode value must be 0 to 2. Enter correct value. Switch_sr TIS error. Mode must be 0, 1, or 2. Enter a valid mode number.
· 6-25058 Mode value must be 0 to 2. Enter correct value. Connect_sr TIS error. Mode must be 0, 1, or 2. Enter a valid mode number.
· 6-25059 Port number must be PSC1, 2, or PSO1 to 7. Switch_sr TIS error. The port address parameter must be PSC1, 2, or PSO1 to 7.
· 6-25501 PG Error. An error occurred in the pulse generator unit. The pulse generator will provide detailed error messages.
· 6-25502 PGN pulse level is out of range. The pulse level value is out of range. See the Set_level_pg command reference for the available range, and then enter a valid range.
320
Appendix D
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Error Messages 6-xxxxx
· 6-25503 Load impedance value must be 2.5 ohm to 999 kohm. The load impedance value must be 2.5 ohm to 999 kohm. Enter a valid impedance value.
· 6-25504 Load impedance value must be 10 ohm to 999 kohm. The load impedance value of the 8114A must be 10 ohm to 999 kohm. Enter a valid impedance value.
· 6-25505 AmpN value is out of range. Set_level_pg TIS error. The AmpN parameter value is out of range. See the Set_level_pg command reference for the available range, and then enter a valid value.
· 6-25506 3-level pulse output value (AmpN) is out of range. Set_level_pg TIS error. The AmpN parameter value is out of range for the 3-level pulse output port (Set_type_pg, mode=2). See the Set_level_pg command reference for the available range, and then enter a valid value.
· 6-25507 Sum of 3-level pulse output value is out of range. Set_level_pg TIS error. The sum of Amp1 and Amp2 is out of range for the 3-level pulse output port (Set_type_pg, mode=2). See the Set_level_pg command reference for the available range, and enter a valid value.
· 6-25508 Invalid setup combination of Amp and Base. Set_level_pg TIS error. Cannot set the pulse level due to an invalid combination of the Amp value and Base value. See the Set_level_pg command reference for the available range, and then enter a valid combination.
· 6-25509 Pulse width (Value) is out of range. Set_time_pg TIS error. The width parameter value must be 3.3 nsec to 999 msec, or 10 nsec to 900 msec for the 8114A. Enter a valid range value.
· 6-25510 Delay time (Value) plus skew is out of range. Set_time_pg TIS error. The delay parameter value must be 0 to 999 msec, or 0 to 900 msec for 8114A. Enter a valid delay value. The skew between the PG outputs can cause this error.
· 6-25511 Invalid pulse leading time (Value). The value must be 2.0 nsec to 200 msec. Set_time_pg TIS error. The leading edge transition time must be 2.0 nsec to 200 msec. Enter a valid transition value.
· 6-25512 Invalid pulse trailing time (Value). The value must be 2.0 nsec to 200 msec. Set_time_pg TIS error. The trailing edge transition time must be 2.0 nsec to 200 msec. Enter a valid transition value.
· 6-25513 Leading time and trailing time must be in the same range. Set_time_pg TIS error. Both the leading and trailing time must be in the same range. See the Set_time_pg command reference for available ranges and then enter a valid value.
· 6-25514 PG Error. Cannot change arming source. Cannot change the arming source. The PGU may be defective or it may be a TIS fatal error. Verify the PGU is operating correctly.
· 6-25515 PG Error. Cannot change pattern mode. Cannot change the pattern mode. The PGU may be defective or it may be a TIS fatal error. Verify the PGU is operating correctly.
Appendix D
321
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Error Messages 6-xxxxx
· 6-25516 PG Error. Cannot measure trigger period. The pulse generator cannot measure the trigger period. The trigger cable may be disconnected or defective. Or the PGU may be defective. Verify the trigger cable connection and the operation of the PGU.
· 6-25517 Cannot open file (errno = Error No.): File_name Cannot open the specified file. Check the file name, permission, and so on.
· 6-25518 Cannot write file (errno = Error No.) Cannot write the file. Check the file name, permission, and so on.
· 6-25519 Cannot read file (errno = Error No.) Cannot read the specified file. Check the file name, permission, and so on.
· 6-25520 PG setup file revision mismatch. The PG setup file does not match the present revision.
· 6-25521 Configuration mismatch. The current configuration does not match the configuration written in the PG setup file. The PG setup file is the file saved by Save_pg TIS.
· 6-25522 PG (N) Error. No response to combined channel query. No response from the PGU for the combined channel query. The PGU may be defective or it may be a TIS fatal error. Verify the PGU is operating correctly.
· 6-25523 PG (N) Error. No response to arming source query. No response from the PGU for the arming source query. The PGU may be defective or it may be a TIS fatal error. Verify the PGU is operating correctly.
· 6-25524 PG (N) Error. No response to period source query. No response from the PGU for the period source query. The PGU may be defective or it may be a TIS fatal error. Verify the PGU is operating correctly.
· 6-25525 PG (N) Error. No response to trigger count query. No response from the PGU for the trigger count query. The PGU may be defective or it may be a TIS fatal error. Verify the PGU is operating correctly.
· 6-25526 PG (N) Error. No response to pattern mode query. No response from the PGU for the pattern mode query. The PGU may be defective or it may be a TIS fatal error. Verify the PGU is operating correctly.
· 6-25527 PG (N) Error. No response to period query. No response from the PGU for the period query. The PGU may be defective or it may be a TIS fatal error. Verify the PGU is operating correctly.
· 6-25528 PG (N) Error. No response to switch query. No response from the PGU for the switch query. The PGU may be defective or it may be a TIS fatal error. Verify the PGU is operating correctly.
· 6-25529 PG (N) Error. No response to rload query. No response from the PGU for the rload query. The PGU may be defective or it may be a TIS fatal error. Verify the PGU is operating correctly.
322
Appendix D
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Error Messages 6-xxxxx
· 6-25530 PG (N) Error. No response to delay query. No response from the PGU for the delay query. The PGU may be defective or it may be a TIS fatal error. Verify the PGU is operating correctly.
· 6-25531 PG (N) Error. No response to width query. No response from the PGU for the width query. The PGU may be defective or it may be a TIS fatal error. Verify the PGU is operating correctly.
· 6-25532 PG (N) Error. No response to leading edge query. No response from the PGU for the leading edge query. The PGU may be defective or it may be a TIS fatal error. Verify the PGU is operating correctly.
· 6-25533 PG (N) Error. No response to trailing edge query. No response from the PGU for the trailing edge query. The PGU may be defective or it may be a TIS fatal error. Verify the PGU is operating correctly.
· 6-25534 PG (N) Error. No response to complement query. No response from the PGU for the complement query. The PGU may be defective or it may be a TIS fatal error. Verify the PGU is operating correctly.
· 6-25535 PG (N) Error. No response to voltage level query. No response from the PGU for the voltage level query. The PGU may be defective or it may be a TIS fatal error. Verify the PGU is operating correctly.
· 6-25536 PG Error. Cannot change period source. Cannot change period source. The PGU may be defective or it may be a TIS fatal error. Verify the PGU is operating correctly.
· 6-25537 Set_level_pg Amp value is out of range. Set_level_pg TIS error. For 8114A pulse generator. The Amp parameter value is out of range. See the Set_level_pg command reference for the available range, and then enter a valid value.
· 6-25538 Can't open file. filename: File Could not open the file specified by File. Confirm the file name and permissions of the file.
· 6-25539 Can't load the offline configuration file. File format incorrect. Could not read the offline configuration file because the file format is incorrect. Check the format of the file you loaded.
· 6-25540 Can't save the offline configuration file. Could not save the offline configuration file. Check the permissions of the file and directory.
· 6-25901 [F_ROM] Port address (Terminal Name) must be unique. Each terminal must be set to a unique port address. Set each terminal to a unique port address.
· 6-25902 [F_ROM] Relay mode must be enabled. Relay mode must be enabled to use pulse switch. Execute F_set_relay_md(1) to enable the relay mode.
· 6-25903 [F_ROM] Port (Terminal Name) must be connected to pulse switch output. A port must be connected to the pulse switch output. Connect the port and specify the correct port.
· 6-25904 [F_ROM] Port (Terminal Name) must be connected to pulse switch output 1, 6, or 7.
Appendix D
323
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Error Messages 6-xxxxx
A port must be connected to the pulse switch output 1, 6, or 7. Connect the port and specify the correct port. · 6-25905 [F_ROM] Port (Terminal Name) must be connected to pulse switch output 2, 3, 4, or 5.
A port must be connected to the pulse switch output 2, 3, 4, or 5. Connect the port and specify the correct port. · 6-25906 Invalid count (Value). The value must be 1to 1000000000.
The count parameter value must be 1 to 1000000000. Enter a valid value. · 6-25907 [F_ROM] PGU (Terminal Name) must be unique.
Each terminal must be connected to a unique PGU. Connect each terminal to a unique PGU. · 6-25908 [F_ROM] Invalid port address for Terminal Name.
F_set_fport PARA error. The port address must be 20201 to 20206 for HF port, and 20211 to 20213 for THF port, and 20101 to 20108. Enter a valid port address. · 6-25909 [F_ROM] Invalid PGU connection for Terminal Name. The PGU must be connected to the specified port through the pulse switch. Connect the PGU to the pulse switch input and specify a valid port. · 6-30002 SMU Calibration Fail. SMU failed the calibration. Do the diagnostics, and do troubleshooting. · 6-30003 Automatic SMU Calibration Fail. SMU failed the automatic calibration. Do the diagnostics, and do troubleshooting. · 6-30004 Automatic SMU Calibration Pass. SMU passed the automatic calibration.
324
Appendix D
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Error Messages 7-xxxxx
7-xxxxx
· 7-10001 Power Fail occurred. Testhead power fail occurred. Troubleshoot the testhead power supply and the testhead.
· 7-10002 Over Current or Voltage occurred. Over current or over voltage occurred in the testhead. Troubleshoot the testhead.
· 7-10003 Fixture is opened. Prober/Fixture Sense switch of the testhead is open. Close the sense switch of the testhead.
· 7-10004 Interlock is opened. Interlock of the testhead is open. Close the interlock switch of the testhead.
· 7-10005 Illigal Run Mode in Testhead. This error occurs if the testhead CPU receives any command when the testhead CPU is rebooting. You do not need to care this error.
· 7-10006 Hardware Status returned to the normal state. The 4070 hardware status returned to the normal state. The 4070 can be used normally.
Appendix D
325
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Error Messages 8-xxxxx
8-xxxxx
· 8-10001 Failed to fork TIS Server (errno = Error_No.). hp4070 command or START program failed to start up the TIS server in fork(). If Error_No. is 11: Too many processes are running. Kill unnecessary processes or reconfigure kernel to extend maximum number of processes. If Error_No. is 12: Too small swap space or memory to execute TIS server. Increase the swap space or memory.
· 8-10002 Failed to exec TIS Server (errno = Error_No.). hp4070 command or START program failed to start up the TIS server in execv(). If Error_No. is 13: Check the permission and directory path of tis_online or tis_offline file. If Error_No. is 249: Too many symbolic links are made for directory path of tis_online or tis_offline file. If Error_No. is 8: tis_online or tis_offline file is not set as an executable file. Set the file as an executable file. If Error_No. is 12: Too small memory to execute TIS server. If Error_No. is 26: tis_online or tis_offline file is opened without write protection.
· 8-11001 TIS server died. hp4070 -shutdown command was executed, or testhead was turned off. Or fatal error occurred in testhead.
· 8-11002 Inconsistent exception (Error_No.). TIS server detected illegal error that is not defined as 4070 error condition.
· 8-20001 Invalid parameter. Improper command parameter was specified for hp4070 command. Check the parameter.
· 8-20002 Inconsistent parameters. Invalid multiple command parameters were specified for hp4070 command. Check the parameter.
· 8-20003 Incomplete parameter specification. Command parameter defined for hp4070 command is insufficient. Check the parameters.
· 8-20004 Already logged in. You have already logged into the 4070 operating environment.
· 8-20005 No such session (Error_No.). You have not logged into the 4070 operating environment yet. No session to log out.
· 8-20006 System busy (Used by session: Session_ID). The 4070 has already been logged into as the on-line mode by another user specified by Session_ID. On-line mode allows one user to use the 4070.
· 8-20007 Session ID must be 1 to 999999. Improper session ID was specified for the environmental parameter PCS_SESSION_ID. The value must be 1 to 999999.
326
Appendix D
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Error Messages 8-xxxxx
· 8-20008 Optimization level setting must be 0, 1, 2 or 3. Improper value was specified for hp4070 -optimize command. Value must be 0, 1, 2, or 3.
· 8-20009 Too many OFF LINE sessions. Too many users logged into the 4070 off-line mode. Maximum 5 users can log into the 4070 off-line mode.
· 8-20010 Invalid unit on port Port_No.. Invalid measurement unit is assigned for the 4062 port number Port_No. on the port map file. Maybe the port map file was edited incorrectly. Define the port number mapping properly.
· 8-20011 Invalid 4070 port selection on 4062 port Port_No.. Improper 4070 port number is assigned for the 4062 port number Port_No. on the port map file. Maybe the port map file was edited incorrectly. Define the port number mapping properly.
· 8-20012 Duplicate 4142B slot specification on 4062 port Port_No.. Multiple measurement units are assigned for the 4062 Port_No. on the port map file. Only one unit must be defined for one port. Define the port number mapping properly.
· 8-20013 41420A SMU is in slot 1 on 4062 port Port_No.. Cannot assign the 41420A SMU for 4062 port Port_No. on the port map file because the 41420A uses two module slots of the 4142B. Define the port number mapping properly.
· 8-20014 Can't read the port map file. Reason. Port map file could not be read because of the reason shown in Reason. Check the file name and the permission of the file and directory.
· 8-20015 Can't load the portmap file. File format incorrect. Port map file could not be loaded because the file format is incorrect.
· 8-20016 Can't load the DUMCONFG file. File format incorrect. The 4062UX DUMCONFIG file used for port mapping could not be loaded because the file format is incorrect.
· 8-20017 Can't read the DUMCONFIG file Reason. The 4062UX DUMCONFIG file could not be read because of the reason shown in Reason. Check the file name, and the permission of the file and directory.
· 8-20018 Can't save the portmap file. Reason. Port map file could not be saved because of the reason shown in Reason. Check the directory name, and the permission of the file and directory.
· 8-21001 Testhead Over Voltage. SMU in testhead is over voltage. Testhead is automatically shut down.
· 8-22001 Insufficient args (Something's wrong). 8-22002 Invalid auto cal interval specified (Something's wrong). Error occurred in cal4070 command. Internal error.
· 8-22003 Failed at Matrix Mother Board C/G measurement (status: Status). 8-22004 Failed at Matrix Mother Board offset measurement (status: Status). 8-22005 Failed at Matrix Mother Board R/L measurement (status: Status). 8-22006 Failed at Testhead offset measurement (status: Status). Improper capacitance compensation data was returned by CMU (4284A). Check the measurement cable, or execute the relay test of testhead.
Appendix D
327
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Error Messages 8-xxxxx
· 8-22008 Invalid configuration; Pin Board Pin_No. is not present. 8-22009 Invalid configuration; Chuck Connection Pin Board is not present. Cannot execute the capacitance compensation measurement, because the pin board specified by Pin_No. or the chuck connection pin board is not installed in the testhead, or defective. Check the configuration and install the pin board properly.
· 8-22010 Cannot read the file. The file does not exist or does not have read permission. The specified file cannot be read because the file does not exist or does not have read permission.
· 8-22011 Cannot write the file. The file does not exist. Or the file or the directory does not have write permission. The specified file cannot be written. Because the file does not exist, or the file or specified directory does not have write permission.
· 8-22021 Unable to use the same matrix Pin_No. for CMH and CML. Specify different pin number. Unable to measure compensation data for level 2 capacitance measurement because the same matrix pin number shown as Pin_No. for CMH and CML is specified. Use a different pin number for each port.
· 8-22022 The specified matrix Pin_No. does not exist. Use a valid pin. When executing compensation data measurement for level 2 capacitance measurement, a non-existing matrix pin was specified as Pin_No. Check available pins and use a valid pin number.
· 8-22030 Cannot find available SMU. The system cannot find any SMUs to measure the PGU compensation data. To execute the PGU calibration, at least one SMU must be installed. Check the actual SMU configuration.
· 8-22031 Cannot find available Matrix Pin. The system cannot find any pin boards for the PGU calibration. To execute the PGU calibration, at least one pin board must be installed for each matrix block. Check the actual pin board configuration.
· 8-22032 Can't save pg calibration data into "/etc/opt/hp4070/pgcaldata" file. The compensation data cannot be saved in the /etc/opt/hp4070/pgcaldata file. Check the following items:
The /etc/opt/hp4070/pgcaldata must exist. The permission, owner, and group of this file must be -rw-r--r--, "root", and "sys", respectively.
· 8-22033 Can't load pg calibration data file"/etc/opt/hp4070/pgcaldata". The cal4070 program cannot load the PGU compensation data correctly because of the wrong data format. Copy the /etc/opt/hp4070/pgcaldata file from the /opt/hp4070/newconfig directory, then execute the cal4070 again.
· 8-22050 Failed at timing calibration PGnn. Error: Error_message The timing calibration for PGnn (81110A) from cal4070 program is failed.
· 8-23001 Can't open C compensation data file File_name for loading (errno = Error_No.). Capacitance compensation data file could not be open because of the reason specified by Error_No..
· 8-23002 Can't open C compensation data file File_name for saving (errno = Error_No.). Capacitance compensation data file could not be saved because of the reason specified by Error_No..
328
Appendix D
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Error Messages 8-xxxxx
· 8-23003 Can't read C compensation data file File_name (errno = Error_No.). Capacitance compensation data file could not be read because of the reason specified by Error_No..
· 8-23004 Invalid C compensation data file format. Capacitance compensation data file could not be read because of invalid file format. Check the file name.
· 8-23005 C compensation data file does not match the present Pin Board configuration. Pin board configuration might be changed. Cannot execute the capacitance compensation properly for the present pin board configuration.
· 8-23501 Cannot find HF Matrix board. Check Port value in PG connection file. The HF matrix board is not installed or it is defective. Edit the PG connection file and delete the PG address set to the specified port (Port).
· 8-23502 One PG must be defined for the relative HF and THF ports. Check Port value in PG connection file. Different PG addresses are defined for the relative HF and THF ports. A single PG address must be defined for the ports. Edit the PG connection file and set a single PG or PSO address, or delete the address set to the specified port (Port).
· 8-23503 Invalid PG connection data on Port. Specified PG or PSO does not exist. An invalid PG or PSO address is defined in the PG connection file. Set the available PG or PSO address to the specified port (Port).
· 8-23504 Cannot find Pulse Switch Block N. Check Port value in PG connection file. Pulse switch block 1 or 2 is not installed or is defective. Edit the PG connection file and delete the PG address set to the specified port (Port) and to port PSI1/2/3/4 or PSI5/6/7.
· 8-23505 Invalid parameter for pgconn4070. An invalid parameter was set for the pgconn4070 command execution. Set the parameter properly or execute pgconn4070 with no parameter.
· 8-23506 Syntax error in dump command. An improper command is entered in the print dialog box. Enter the proper command.
· 8-23507 Cannot search connection for OFF LINE session. Actual PG connection cannot be searched for offline session.
· 8-32002 File already exists. OK to overwrite the file? The file name you specified already exists. Click OK to overwrite the file. Click No to cancel.
· 8-24001 Usage: Parameter Improper command parameter was specified for the setlf command. Specify the command parameter properly.
· 8-24002 Can't open Optical Interface device file (Reason). Failed to open the optical interface device file by setlf command because of the reason shown in Reason.
· 8-24003 Can't open Optical Interface device file (Reason). Perhaps shutting down the system by hp4070 -shutdown is required. Failed to open the optical interface device file by setlf command because the 4070 is used by another user (process ID).
Appendix D
329
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Error Messages 8-xxxxx
Execute hp4070 -shutdown before executing setlf command. · 8-24004 Can't write to the Optical Interface device file (Reason).
Failed to write the optical interface device file by setlf command because of the reason shown in Reason. · 8-24005 Can't read from the Optical Interface device file (Reason).
Failed to read the optical interface device file by setlf command because of the reason shown in Reason. · 8-25020 Can't load the offline configuration file. File format incorrect.
Could not read the offline configuration file because the file format is incorrect. Check the format of the file you loaded. · 8-25021 Can't save the offline configuration file. Could not save the offline configuration file. Check the permission of the file and directory. · 8-27001 Failed to monitor the log file (/var/opt/hp4070/syslog4070). The log file might not exist. The System Management Panel failed to monitor the log file (/var/opt/hp4070/syslog4070). Verify the file exists. Check the permissions of the file or directory. · 8-27002 Online TIS daemon is not running. The online TIS daemon is not running. Execute the hp4070 -start command. · 8-27003 Online TIS daemon is already running. Another online TIS daemon is already running. Only one online TIS daemon can run at a time. · 8-27004 The selected file is not writable. Select another file. The selected file is not writable. Select another file or check the permissions of the file. · 8-40004 The port map table has been modified. Is it OK to discard the changes? The port map table was modified. Click OK to close the dialog box without saving the changes. Click No to cancel. · 8-40005 File already exists. Do you want to overwrite it? The file name you specified already exists. Click OK to overwrite the file Click No to cancel. · 8-40006 Is it OK to overwrite the default port map file? You are going to overwrite the default port map file. Click OK to overwrite the file. Click No to cancel. · 8-40007 HF port map table has been modified. Is it OK to discard the changes? The HF port map table was modified. Click OK to close the dialog box without saving the changes. Click No to cancel. · 8-40008 Is it OK to overwrite the default HF port map file? You are going to overwrite the default HF port map file. Click OK to overwrite the file. Click No to cancel. · 8-40009 Pulse switch table has been modified. Is it OK to discard the changes? The pulse switch table was modified. Click OK to close the dialog box without saving the changes. Click No to cancel. · 8-40010 Is it OK to overwrite the default pulse switch file? You are going to overwrite the default pulse switch file. Click OK to overwrite the file. Click No to cancel.
330
Appendix D
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Error Messages 8-xxxxx
· 8-42016 Failed to measure calibration data of following PGU. PGnn, PGnn, PGnn Please check using diag4070. PG level calibration data will not be updated. Abnormal data is measured for the PGnn. The level calibration data for the PGnn is not updated. Confirm the PG functions by using the diag4070.
· 8-43001 PG connection table was modified. OK to exit the program without saving? The PG connection table was modified. Click OK to exit the program without saving the changes. Click No to cancel.
· 8-43002 OK to overwrite the default PG connection file? You are going to overwrite the default PG connection file. Click OK to overwrite the file. Click No to cancel.
· 8-43003 PG connection table was modified. OK to open new file without saving? The PG connection table was modified. Click OK to open the new file without saving the changes. Click No to cancel.
· 8-43004 OK to exit the program? You are going to exit the program. Click OK to exit the program. Click No to cancel.
· 8-43005 Searching PGU connections. This message is displayed while searching the PG connection.
· 8-46001 Offline configuration was modified. Is it OK to exit the offline configuration tool without saving? To exit the offline configuration tool without saving, click the OK button. If you do not want to exit, click the Cancel button.
· 8-46002 Is it OK to overwrite the default Offline configuration file? To overwrite the default offline configuration file, click the OK button. If you do not want to overwrite the file, click the Cancel button.
· 8-46003 Offline configuration was modified. Is it OK to open a new file without saving? To open a new file without saving the existing file, click the OK button. If you want to save the existing file, click the Cancel button.
· 8-46004 Is it OK to exit the offline configuration tool? To exit the program, click the OK button. If you do not want to exit, click the Cancel button.
· 8-46005 Is it OK to select 12 pins (pins in multiples of 4)? To select 12 pins (pins in multiples of 4), click the OK button. If you do not want 12 pins, click the Cancel button.
· 8-46006 Is it OK to select 24 pins (even number of pins)? To select 24 pins (even number of pins), click the OK button. If you do not want 24, click the Cancel button.
· 8-46007 Is it OK to select 48 pins? To select 48 pins, click the OK button. If you do not want 48, click the Cancel button.
· 8-46008 Is it OK to clear all pins? To clear all pins, click the OK button. If you do not want to clear all pins, click the Cancel button.
Appendix D
331
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Error Messages 8-xxxxx
· 8-47001 Is it OK to exit the System Management Panel? To exit the System Management Panel, click the OK button. If you do not want to exit, click the Cancel button.
332
Appendix D
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Error Messages 42-xxxxx
42-xxxxx
· 42-11020 Parameter name can consist of alphanumeric, space, underscore and period characters only. 42-11022 Parameter name must be 15 characters or less.
Maximum number of characters for parameter name in the IDP setup window is 15.
· 42-11023 Failed to start idpcgen program (Reason).
Number of processes may be more than the limitation specified in kernel parameter, or available swap space or memory is not sufficient. The error message reported by the HP-UX kernel is shown in Reason.
· 42-11024 A directory name must be specified.
A directory name must be specified in the Code Directory field of the Generate Code window.
· 42-11025 A file name must be specified.
A file name must be specified in the Source Code Name field of the Generate Code window.
· 42-11026 BASIC line number and its incremental number must be positive.
The line number and the incremental number in the BASIC Program Line Numbering field of the Generate Code window must be positive.
· 42-11028 Must specify Algorithm Function Name.
An algorithm function name must be specified in the Code Generation Setup window.
· 42-11029 Algorithm function name must begin with an alpha character.
· 42-23000 Syntax error. Usage: idpcgen {-b|-c} [-mhpfvSP] [-t directory] [-i file] [-o name] [-l 0(TIS)|1(algorithm)|2(program)] [-L [begin_num[,increment_num]]]
-b
Generates BASIC program
-c
Generates C program
-m
Generates Makefile for C language compile
-h
Generates C language header (.h file extension) file
-p
Generates program code for IDP running in the same session idpcgen executed
-f
Forces the specified output file to be overwritten
-v
Displays warning messages
-S
Generates or overwrites SPECS algorithm library spec file
-P
Generates program code using template file for pules
-t directory
Specifies that directory template file exists
-i file
Specifies IDP setup file (.dps file extension) from which program code is generated
-o name
Specifies file name (without file extension) program is saved to
-l 0|1|2
Specifies code generation level
-L begin num, increment_num Specifies BASIC line numbering
Appendix D
333
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Error Messages 42-xxxxx
· 42-23001 Must specify one option: -b (BASIC) or -c (C) Idpcgen command must be used with -b (BASIC) or -c (C) option to specify generated programming language.
· 42-23002 Unable to specify -b (BASIC) and -c (C) language options together. Idpcgen command cannot specify both -b (BASIC) and -c (C) language options at the same time.
· 42-23003 Unable to specify -i and -p options together. Idpcgen command cannot specify both -i (specifies .dps IDP setup file) and -p (specifies IDP setup window currently open) options at the same time.
· 42-23004 Failed to open input file File_name (Reason). Idpcgen command failed to open specified File_name.dps IDP setup file. Cause of the error is shown in Reason.
· 42-23005 Must specify IDP setup file name with -i option. Ipdcgen command must specify IDP setup file name from which the command generates the measurement program file.
· 42-23006 Failed to open output file File_name (Reason). Idpcgen command failed to open output file specified as File_name. The cause of the error is shown in Reason.
· 42-23007 The specified file name already exists. Use -f option to overwrite it. The output file name for measurement program generated by the idpcgen command already exists. To overwrite the file, specify the -f option with the idpcgen command, or if you do not want to overwrite the file, change the output filename.
· 42-23008 Must specify file name with -o option. When -o option is specified, the idpcgen command must specify a file name without a file extension.
· 42-23009 Failed to open template directory Directory_name (Reason). The idpcten command, used with the -t option, failed to open the specified directory Directory_name. The cause of the error is shown in Reason.
· 42-23010 Must specify directory name with -t option. When -t option is specified, the idpcgen command must specify a directory name.
· 42-23011 Improper generation level Level_number. Specify 0, 1, or 2 with -l option. Idpcgen command has the wrong Level_number setup for -l option (code generation level option). With -l option, specify 0, 1, or 2.
· 42-23012 Must specify 0, 1 or 2 with -l option. When -l option is specified, the idpcgen command must specify a code generation level number.
· 42-23013 Failed to open IPC connection to IDP (Reason). Idpcgen command with -p option failed to open IPC connection to IDP. The cause of the error is shown in Reason.
· 42-23014 Failed to connect IPC to IDP (Reason). Idpcgen command with -p option failed to connect IPC to IDP. The cause of the error is shown in Reason.
334
Appendix D
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Error Messages 42-xxxxx
· 42-23015 idpcgen failed to communicate with IDP process (Reason). Idpcgen command with -p option failed to communicate with the process IDP generated because of the error shown in Reason.
· 42-23016 Possible incorrect IDP setup file. Record format mismatched. The file specified by the idpcgen command includes an unrecognized record. May be using an incorrect or incorrectly modified IDP setup file.
· 42-23017 Unable to generate program coding for IDP file created by Rev. B.01.20 or earlier. Idpcgen cannot generate program code for IDP setup file created by 4070 system rev. B.01.20 or earlier. Load the IDP setup file in the 4070 rev. B.01.20 IDP setup window, then save the setup and execute the idpcgen command again. Or, after loading the IDP setup file in the rev. B.01.20 environment, generate program code in the IDP environment.
· 42-23018 Possible incorrect IDP setup file. Record format mismatched. The file specified by the idpcgen command includes an unrecognized record. May be using an incorrect or incorrectly modified IDP setup file.
· 42-23100 Identical name (Parameter_name) cannot be used for different data types. The IDP setup file, specified by the idpcgen command, has the identical parameter name setup shown in Parameter_name for a different data type. Change the parameter name in the IDP setup window.
· 42-23101 Failed to open template file File_name (Reason). Idpcgen command failed to open the template file shown as File_name. The cause of the error is shown in Reason.
· 42-23102 Failed to read template file (Reason). Idpcgen command failed to read the template file. The cause of the error is shown in Reason.
· 42-23200 Unknown Token. Replace `@' with `@@'. There is an unknown token starting with `@' in the template file specified by the idpcgen command. Replace `@' with `@@'.
· 42-23301 Unknown variable type found: Variable_type (Variable_name); assumed REAL. In the Algorithm Spec Editor, the setup for Variable_type shown in Variable_name is incorrect. The setup variable type is ignored and the code is generated as type real.
· 42-33000 Unrecognizable input record: Record The IDP setup file specified by the idpcgen command, has an incorrect record that is not recognized by the code generation function. The IDP setup file may be modified incorrectly. The incorrect record is ignored.
· 42-33001 Duplicate Parameter_name exists. Change th Parameter_name. The IDP setup file, specified by the idpcgen command, has a duplicate Parameter_name. Change the Parameter_name in the IDP setup window.
· 42-33002 Template file File_name is not in directory shown in Directory_name. Template file File_name does not exist in the directory specified by Directory_name, when using idpcgen with the -t option.
Appendix D
335
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Error Messages 42-xxxxx
· 42-33003 Unable to access the specified template directory. Default template File_name is loaded. Unable to find the template file. The idpcgen command cannot access the specified template directory.
336
Appendix D
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Index
Symbols
/etc/opt/hp4070/config/1, 80, 96, 146, 185, 188, 190, 221, 240, 275, 276
/etc/opt/hp4070/config/PCO
NFIG, 139, 146, 186, 188, 240, 275
/etc/opt/hp4070/config/pgc
onnection, 146, 187, 240, 275
/etc/opt/hp4070/config/ref
config1, 146, 221, 240 /etc/opt/sicl/hwconfig.cf,
217 /etc/rc, 188, 275
/home/hpsrvc/config/config
.4070, 181, 216, 220, 268
/home/hpsrvc/config/config
.hpux, 175, 246
/home/hpsrvc/config/config
.kanji, 181, 219, 268
/home/hpsrvc/config/config
.rmb, 181, 218, 268
/home/hpsrvc/config/config
.specs, 139 /opt/hp4070 directory, 145,
239 /opt/hp4070/bin/cal4070,
190, 276 /opt/hp4070/bin/diag4070,
146, 207, 240 /opt/hp4070/bin/hp4070,
146, 230, 240
/opt/hp4070/bin/hp4070
-shutdown, 231
/opt/hp4070/bin/hp4070
-start, 230
/opt/hp4070/bin/pgconn4070
, 187, 275 /opt/hp4070/bin/pv4070,
146, 240 /opt/hp4070/firmware, 231
/opt/hp4070/install/config
ure, 188, 190, 221, 275, 276
/opt/hp4070/install/instal
l, 182, 221, 268 /opt/hp4070_opt directory,
145 /opt/sicl/bin/iosetup, 176,
217, 247 /opt/sicl/bin/iosetup -V2,
265
/opt/SPECS/install/bin/set
up_user, 222 /sbin/eisa_config, 255 /sbin/set_parms, 139
/SD_CDROM/HP4070.UPD, 157, 159, 168
/SD_CDROM/HP4070_E4411BDVR
Y0122.DEPOT, 192 /SD_CDROM/HPOPTPCI64.UPD,
171 /tmp/hp4070.log, 182, 271 /usr/sbin/swinstall, 152,
168, 244 /var/opt/hp4070 directory,
239 /var/opt/hp4070 directory,
145
/var/opt/hp4070/diag/DIAGd
ata, 146, 209, 240 /var/opt/hp4070/diag/log,
146, 208, 240
/var/opt/hp4070/diag/PVdat
a, 146, 240
/var/opt/hp4070/syslog4070
, 146, 240
Numerics
04062-61604 BNC-to-BNC cable
115cm yellow, 66, 67, 119
04062-61608 BNC-to-BNC cable
115cm blue, 66, 67, 119 04192-61002 feed through, 50 ohm,
67, 119 1 to 2 connector, 129 1250-0595 BNC-triaxial adapter, 65,
119 1250-2405C BNC-T type adapter, 64,
119 1400-2242 zipper tube, 65
16048-60002 Agilent 16048E test
leads, 64, 119 17-inch color monitor, 99
mounting, 55 1-meter GPIB cable, 81 1-to-2 connector, 65, 119 200 Vac, 31 208 Vac, 31 220 Vac, 31 240 Vac, 31 4-meter GPIB cable, 81 745/132L, 74, 183, 272 745/132L (EISA bus), 176, 247 745/132L (PCI bus), 176, 247 745i, 74, 176, 247, 274 8120-1625 power cord, 51, 64, 78 8120-1763 power cord, 66, 67 8120-3444 GPIB cable 50cm, 66 8120-3445 GPIB cable 1 m, 64, 67 8120-3446 GPIB cable 2 m, 65 8710-1576 zip lock sealing, 65
A
Agilent 16048E test leads, 64, 119, 188
Agilent 3458A
digital multimeter, 22, 124, 132 GPIB address, 80 mounting, 55, 79 Agilent 4070 system software, 22,
136, 142, 149, 178, 181, 213, 220, 236, 242, 243, 244, 249, 268 Agilent 4072A/4073A configuration, 205
Agilent 4142B modular dc
source/monitor, 227
Agilent 4284A
GPIB address, 80 mounting, 55, 79 precision LCR meter, 22, 123
Agilent 4411B
spectrum analyzer, 22
Agilent 8110A
mounting, 56, 82 pulse generator, 22, 125
Agilent 81110A
mounting, 56, 82, 94 pulse generator, 22, 125
Agilent 8114A
mounting, 56, 82 pulse generator, 22, 125
Agilent 8114A-transition time
converter cable, 128 Agilent E2071, 247 Agilent E2071D, 247
Agilent E2071D GPIB interface
(EISA), 81 Agilent E2078A, 176, 247 Agilent E2078A GPIB interface (PCI),
81 Agilent E3102A/E3103A, 85, 88
option 011, 79 option 012, 79 option 020, 99 option 022, 108 option 500, 82 option 550, 82 option 551, 82 option 552, 82 option SP1, 114 Agilent E3140A test fixture adapter,
207 Agilent E3141A universal test fixture,
207 Agilent E3145A,B, 225
Agilent E3146A cable extension
fixture, 225 Agilent E3151A rack mount kit, 64
Index
337
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Index
Agilent E3151A rack mount kit for the
4284A, 63 Agilent E3152A rack mount kit, 64
Agilent E3152A rack mount kit for the
3458A, 63
Agilent E3153A pulse generator
integration kit, 65 option 001, 65 option 002, 65, 66 option 003, 65, 66 option 004, 65, 67 option 100, 65, 68 option 101, 65, 69, 88
Agilent E3153A rack mount kit for the
pulse generator, 63
Agilent E3153A rack mount kit option
001, 65
Agilent E3155A rack mount kit for the
HP A2287A 17-inch monitor, 63, 70, 99, 101
Agilent E3155B rack mount kit for the
HP A4330A 17-inch monitor, 63, 70, 99, 101
Agilent E3155C rack mount kit for the
HP A4490A 17-inch monitor, 63, 71, 99, 101
Agilent E3155D rack mount kit for the
HP D2838W 17-inch monitor, 63, 71, 99, 101
Agilent E3155E rack mount kit for the
HP D8900A 17-inch monitor, 63, 72, 99, 101
Agilent E3155F rack mount kit for the
flat panel display, 63, 73, 103
Agilent E3155G rack mount kit for the
HP D8906A 17-inch monitor, 99, 101
Agilent E3156A rack mount kit for the
745i controller, 63, 74, 108
Agilent E3156B rack mount kit for the
745/132L controller, 63, 74, 108
Agilent E3156C rack mount kit for the
C3600 controller, 63, 75, 108
Agilent E3157A rack mount kit for the
CD-ROM drive, 63, 76, 111
Agilent E3157B rack mount kit for the
DDS drive, 63, 77, 88, 112 Agilent E3171A,AJ system controller,
108, 136, 212 Agilent E3171A/AJ system controller,
22 Agilent E3172A,AJ system controller,
108, 212 Agilent E3172A/AJ system controller,
22
Agilent E4411B
mounting, 60, 61, 114 Agilent E4411B spectrum analyzer,
78, 114 Agilent SPECS, 136, 149, 213,
243 air duct, 118, 119, 120 automatic wafer prober, 186, 225,
275 AUX port, 129 AUX5, 124, 132 AUX6, 124 AUX7, 123 AUX8, 123
B
BASIC/UX, 136, 149, 165, 181, 213, 218, 242, 243, 244, 268
BNC cable for transition time
converter, 67, 119 BNC-T adapter, 123 BNC-T type adapter, 64, 119 BNC-to-BNC cable 115cm blue, 66,
67, 119, 126 BNC-to-BNC cable 115cm white, 65,
119, 126 BNC-to-BNC cable 115cm yellow,
66, 67, 119, 126 BNC-triaxial adapter, 65, 119, 129 breaker test switch, 42, 46
C
C3600, 75, 176, 183, 247, 272 cabinet configuration, 55, 56, 57,
60 cabinet fan error LED, 44, 48 cabinet fan protector, 48, 203 cable clampr, 33 capacitance compensation parameter,
189 CD-ROM drive, 111
mounting, 55 chuck connection output connector,
226 circuit diagram, 34 CMH, 123 CML, 123 CMU, 80 CMU (Agilent 4284A) test leads, 123 component locations, 38, 204 configuration file, 80, 96 configuration tool, 149, 213 configure command, 229 controller power outlets, 38, 42, 46,
50 cover for the DVM airflow, 68, 69 current consumption, 50
D
DDS drive, 112 mounting, 55
default setting, 130 diagnostics program, 207 diagnostics window, 208 DIP switch, 268 DVM, 80 DVM (Agilent 3458A) test leads,
124, 132 DVM and CMU power outlets, 38,
42, 43, 46, 47, 50 DVM-H, 124, 132 DVM-L, 124
E
E3120-40005 air duct, 119 E3120-61602 optical fiber cable, 119 E3120-61678 ground wire, 119
E3120-61683 test leads
(BNC-banana-plug cable), 64, 119 E3125-61042 1-to-2 connector, 65, 119 E3125-61607 pulse switch cable, 65, 119 E3150-61001 trigger distributor, 65 E3150-61002 transition time converter, 67 E3150-61601 PG cable 4.6m, 66, 67, 78, 119
E3150-61602 BNC-to-BNC cable
115cm white, 65, 119
E3150-61603 BNC cable for transition
time converter, 67, 119 E3160-00606 shelter plate, 68 E3160-60007 testhead power cable,
119 E3160-60065 PDU for 200V, 31 E3160-60066 PDU for 208V, 31 E3160-60067 PDU for 220V, 31 E3160-60068 PDU for 240V, 31 E3160-60265 PDU for 200V, 31,
228 E3160-60266 PDU for 208V, 31,
228 E3160-60267 PDU for 220V, 31,
228 E3160-60268 PDU for 240V, 31,
228 E4411B control software, 149, 213 EISA slot number, 268, 273 emergency breaker, 33, 38, 42, 46,
203 emergency off circuit, 34 EMO, 34, 41 EMO button, 34, 38, 43, 47, 203
338
Index
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Index
EMO protector, 38, 44, 48, 203 error messages, 22, 277 ext alarm terminals, 38, 43, 47 ext control terminals, 38, 43, 47,
203 EXT INPUT terminal, 126 extension fixture, 225
F
fan cover for the system controller, 68 fan protector, 38, 40, 44 feed through, 50 ohm, 67, 119, 126 flat panel display, 73, 103
G
general information, 21 GFCI, 42, 46 GFCI indicator, 42, 46 GPIB address, 80, 96
Agilent 3458A, 80 Agilent 4284A, 80 pulse generators, 96 GPIB bus address, 217 GPIB cable, 81 GPIB cable 1 m, 64, 67 GPIB cable 2 m, 65 GPIB cable 50cm, 66 GPIB interface, 176, 217, 247 GPIB interface card, 81 ground wire, 118, 119, 120 ground-fault circuit interrupter, 38,
42, 46
H
HF port, 129 HP A2287A 17-inch monitor, 70,
101 HP A4330A 17-inch monitor, 70,
101 HP A4490A 17-inch monitor, 71,
101 HP C2944D CD-ROM drive, 76,
111 HP C2948A CD-ROM drive, 76,
111 HP C4310A CD-ROM drive, 76,
111 HP C6364A DDS drive, 77, 112 HP D2838W 17-inch monitor, 71,
101 HP D8900A 17-inch monitor, 72,
101 HP D8906A 17-inch monitor, 72,
101 hp4070, 196, 205 hp4070 -start, 205
HP4070_E4411BDVR, 192 HP4070SYS, 154, 169 HPCONFIGTOOL, 160 HPOPTPCI64, 172 hpsrvc, 196 HP-UX, 136, 149, 150, 175,
213, 215, 243, 244, 246
I
IEC 320 C14, 51 In position, 42, 46 installation location, 29 installation overview, 143, 237 installation sequence, 25 INSTRUMENT POWER OFF, 38,
43, 47 INSTRUMENT POWER ON, 38,
43, 47, 203 instrument power outlets, 38, 42,
43, 46, 47, 50 interlock, 227 interlock connector, 227 interlock pins, 188, 207, 275
J
japanese environment, 181, 268 jumper switch, 268
K
kernel parameters, 216 keyboard, 137 keyboard shelf, 99, 102
L
leveling feet, 30 line frequency, 188, 229 LINE indicator, 38, 42, 46, 203 line voltage, 31, 50, 228 line voltage selector switch, 51 logical unit number, 81, 217 logical volumes, 215 login window, 205, 230
M
main breaker, 33, 38, 42, 46, 203 main power cable, 31, 33
allowable diameters, 31 main switch, 33, 38, 42, 46, 203 manipulator, 225 maximum current, 50 maximum input current, 31 measurement pins, 188, 275
mounting
17-inch color monitor, 54, 55
17-inch color monitor and keyboard
shelf, 99 Agilent 3458A, 54, 79 Agilent 4284A, 54, 79 Agilent 8110A, 54, 82 Agilent 81110A, 54, 82 Agilent 8114A, 54, 82 Agilent E4411B, 54 CD-ROM drive, 54, 111 DDS drive, 54, 88, 91, 112 flat panel display, 54 system controller, 54, 108 mouse, 102
N
NEMA L6-30P, 31
O
operation check, 41, 45 optical fiber cable, 118, 119, 120,
188 optical interface card, 183, 188,
272, 275 optical interface driver, 182, 268 Out position, 42, 46 over voltage LED, 42, 46, 203
P
PCI slot number, 182, 184, 268, 273
PDU, 33, 34, 41, 45 personality board, 207, 225 pflash command, 232 PG cable 4.6m, 66, 67, 78, 119,
128, 129 PLL REF IN/CLK IN terminal, 126 plug and play ID, 217 power cord, 50, 51, 64, 66, 67,
78 power cords, 98 power distribution unit, 31, 33, 34 power line, 31 power line cycle, 188 power outlet, 50 power outlet locations, 38 power outlet protector, 38, 43, 47,
203 probe card, 225 protector button, 41, 45
pulse generator (8110A, 81110A,
8114A) test leads, 125 pulse generator configuration, 125,
126 pulse switch cable, 65, 119, 129 pulse switch control port, 129 pulse switch in port, 129
Index
339
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Index
pulse switch out port, 129
Q
quick formatter, 209 quick formatter window, 209
R
rack mount accessories for the E4411B, 63
rack mount accessories for the HP
D8906A 17-inch monitor, 63 rack mount kit, 55
for 17-inch monitors, 70 for 745/132L controller, 74 for 745i controller, 74 for Agilent 3458A, 64 for Agilent 4284A, 64 for Agilent 8110A, 66 for Agilent 81110A, 66 for Agilent 8114A, 67 for Agilent E4411B, 78 for C3600 controller, 75 for CD-ROM drive, 76 for DDS drive, 76, 77 for flat panel display, 73 for HP A2287A, 70 for HP A4330A, 70 for HP A4490A, 71 for HP D2838W, 71 for HP D8900A, 72 for HP D8906A, 72 for pulse generator, 65 for system controller, 74 rack mount positions, 55, 58, 59,
60, 61, 62 rear plate for CMU, 68 rear plate for DVM, 68, 69 rear plate for system controller, 68 requirements, 24
S
semi-automatic wafer prober, 225 serial port, 217 shelter plate, 68 SICL, 136, 149, 162, 176, 213,
217, 242, 244, 247, 265 SICL driver, 256 site preparation, 23 slot/port number, 217 software configuration tools, 156,
244 software revision, 213 specs, 196 switch settings, 127 symbolic name, 217 system cabinet, 54, 100
installing, 27 system configuration, 185, 275
system controller
mounting, 55, 108 setting, 136, 142, 236 system switch, 38, 42, 46, 203
T
T72091-32-64, 163 test leads, 118 test leads (BNC-banana-plug cable),
64, 119 tester configuration, 188 tester management panel, 205, 230 testhead, 120, 225 testhead fan error LED, 44, 49 testhead fan protector, 49, 203 testhead firmware, 213, 230 testhead power cable, 118, 119,
122 testhead power supply, 51, 118,
133, 227 testhead power supply LED, 133 TH PS, 51, 118, 227 timi, 217, 256 TIS, 188, 275
errors, 277 TIS server, 188, 205, 230, 275 To CLK IN terminal, 126 To EXT INPUT terminal, 126 To TRIGGER OUT terminal, 126 transition time converter, 67 trigger cable, 125 trigger distributor, 65, 83, 125,
126 trigger distributor switch, 127 TRIGGER OUT terminal, 126
U
unpacking, 23, 29
upgrade kit for the 81110A and C3600
rack mount kit, 69, 88
upgrade kit for the 81110A rack mount
kit, 68, 85 user environment, 222
V
view4070, 209 vme, 217, 256, 260 vme2, 217, 256, 260
W
wafer prober, 81, 225 wafer prober sense switch, 188,
207, 275
Z
zip lock sealing, 65 zipper tube, 65, 129
340
Index
Agilent 4072A/4073A Installation Guide, Edition 6
Acrobat Distiller 4.05 for Windows FrameMaker 6.0